BHB Sicam Mic Eng PDF

Preface, Table of Contents
SICAM RTUs
Installation
1
Interfaces and Circuitry
2
SICAM MIC
Engineering Preparation
3
Engineering via SICAM TOOLBOX II
4
User Manual Engineering via Web Browser
5
Maintenance
6
Parameter Setting Instruction
7
Variables in the IL
A
Examples for Application Programs
B
Error Handling
C
Connection of Resistance Thermometers
D
Set up Dial-up Connection via PPP
E
Glossary
DC6-058-2.01
Note
Please take notice of the notes and warnings for your safety in the preface.
Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Although we have carefully checked the contents of this publication Copyright © Siemens AG 2015
for conformity with the hardware and software described, we cannot The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
guarantee complete conformity since errors cannot be excluded. contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offend-
The information provided in this manual is checked at regular ers will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by
intervals and any corrections that might become necessary are patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are re-
included in the next releases. Any suggestions for improvement are served.
welcome.
Subject to change without prior notice.
Document Label: SIC1703-BHBSICAMMIC-ENG_V2.01
Release Date: 2015-06-23
o
Siemens AG Order N : DC6-058-2.01
Preface
Purpose of this manual
This manual describes how to install and parameterize a SICAM MIC system, which errors
may occur and which are the existing diagnostic options.
Particularly it contains the following information:
Safety instructions
Installation instructions
Hardware descriptions (modules)
Engineering options
Parameterization of telecontrol applications
Programming of open-/closed-loop control functions
Saving and loading of application data
Test functions
Loading of firmware
Diagnosis
Target Group
The document you are reading right now is addressed to users, who are in charge of the fol-
lowing engineering tasks:
Conceptual activities, as for example design and configuration

Mechanical installation
Creation of the assembly technical documentation
Engineering and testing with the designated engineering tools
Technical system maintenance and service, module handling
Within this manual there are hints how to obtain information or files by means of Online Sup-
port Products. If you have no access please consult your project manager at Siemens.
Recommendations for Third-party Products
Siemens does neither receive liability nor warranty for recommendations which are given or
implied by this manual. For the correct and intended use of the respective product the associ-
ated technical descriptions must be paid attention to in any case.
Links to Third-Party Websites
Siemens is not responsible for the contents of third-party websites mentioned in this docu-
ment, as well as the correctness of the publications and links. For all product information the
respective manufacturer is responsible.
SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual 3

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Preface
Conventions Used
Manuals to be referred to are represented in italics, such as for instance SICAM MIC Sys-
tem Description, chapter "System Overview".
Outputs visible on the screen are described in this font.
Inputs via keyboard or mouse keys and visible on the screen are described in this
font.
Menu positions visible on the screen are described in this font.
Unchangeable texts that are contained in windows and are visible on the screen ARE
DESCRIBED IN THIS FONT .
Buttons in windows visible on the screen and to be operated by keyboard or mouse
are described in this font .
Operation code from programs and variable names are described in this font.
Names of parameters are described in this font; they also can contain the path of
the navigation tree which leads to the parameter, as for instance Parameter | CPC80 |
Topologie.
Names of values are described in this font.
Symbolic names, program names and file name extensions are described in this font.
Placement into the Information Landscape
Document name Item number

SICAM MIC System Description MC6-054-2
SICAM TM I/O Modules DC6-041-2
SICAM RTUs Common Functions Peripheral Elements According to DC0-011-2
IEC 60870-5-101/104
SICAM RTUs Common Functions System and Basic System Elements DC0-015-2
SICAM RTUs • Ax 1703 Common Functions Protocol Elements DC0-023-2
*)
SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help
*)
CAEx plus Online Help
*)
available in the engineering system SICAM TOOLBOX II
4 SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Preface
Further Support
For more information, please contact our Customer Support Center:

Phone: +49 (0)180 524 70 00
Fax: +49 (0)180 524 24 71
(charges depending on provider)
e-mail: support.energy@siemens.com
The Siemens Power Academy offers a comprehensive program of professional training events
in the fields of power generation, distribution and transmission.
Main training centers are:
Nuremberg, Germany (Head Office) Vienna, Austria

Phone: +49 911 433 7415 Phone: +43 51707 31143
Fax: +49 911 433 5482 Fax: +43 51707 55243
power-academy.ptd@siemens.com power-academy.at@siemens.com
Schenectady, NY, USA Hebburn, United Kingdom

Phone: +1 518 395 5005 Phone: +44 1914 953449
Fax: +1 518 346 2777 Fax: +44 1914 953693
pti-edpro.ptd@siemens.com pti-training.stdl.uk@siemens.com

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Preface
Notes on Safety
This manual does not constitute a complete catalog of all safety measures required for operat-
ing the equipment (module, device) in question because special operating conditions might
require additional measures. However, it does contain notes that must be adhered to for your
own personal safety and to avoid damage to property. These notes are highlighted with a
warning triangle and different keywords indicating different degrees of danger.
Danger
means that death, serious bodily injury or considerable property damage will occur, if the appropriate
precautionary measures are not carried out.
Warning
means that death, serious bodily injury or considerable property damage can occur, if the appropriate
precautionary measures are not carried out.
Caution
means that minor bodily injury or property damage could occur, if the appropriate precautionary measures
are not carried out.
Note
is important information about the product, the handling of the product or the respective part of the docu-
mentation, to which special attention is to be given.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Preface
Qualified Personnel
Commissioning and operation of the equipment (module, device) described in this manual
must be performed by qualified personnel only. As used in the safety notes contained in this
manual, qualified personnel are those persons who are authorized to commission, release,
ground, and tag devices, systems, and electrical circuits in accordance with safety standards.
Use as Prescribed
The equipment (device, module) must not be used for any other purposes than those de-
scribed in the Catalog and the Technical Description. If it is used together with third-party de-
vices and components, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens.
Correct and safe operation of the product requires adequate transportation, storage, installa-
tion, and mounting as well as appropriate use and maintenance.
During operation of electrical equipment, it is unavoidable that certain parts of this equipment
will carry dangerous voltages. Severe injury or damage to property can occur if the appropri-
ate measures are not taken:
Hazardous voltages can be present on all switching components connected to the power
supply.
Even after the supply voltage has been disconnected, hazardous voltages can still be pre-
sent in the equipment (capacitor storage).
The limit values indicated in the manual or the operating instructions must not be exceed-
ed; that also applies to testing and commissioning.
Danger
Consider obligatory the safety rules for the accomplishment of works at electrical plants:
1. Switch off electricity all-pole and on all sides!
2. Ensure that electricity cannot be switched on again!
3. Double check that no electrical current is flowing!
4. Discharge, ground, short circuit!
5. Cover or otherwise isolate components that are still electrically active!

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Preface

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Table of Contents
1 Installation ................................................................................................................... 23
1.1 Mechanical Design ......................................................................................... 24

1.2 Design and Elements of a Module .................................................................. 25
1.2.1 Peripheral Connector ................................................................................. 25
1.2.2 Communication Interfaces ......................................................................... 25
1.2.3 Connection Diagrams ................................................................................ 26
1.2.4 Locking Clips ............................................................................................. 26
1.2.5 Display Elements / Front Panel .................................................................. 26
1.2.6 Dimensions ............................................................................................... 26
1.3 Assembly ....................................................................................................... 27
1.3.1 Installation Location ................................................................................... 27
1.3.1.1 Mounting Position ................................................................................. 27
1.3.1.2 Space Requirement .............................................................................. 28
1.3.2 Installation of the TS35 Rail (DIN Rail) ....................................................... 28
1.3.3 Installation of the Cable Duct ..................................................................... 29
1.3.4 Installation and Removal of Modules.......................................................... 29
1.3.4.1 Handling ............................................................................................... 29
1.3.4.2 Coupling ............................................................................................... 30
1.3.4.3 Order.................................................................................................... 30
1.4 Setup of external Communication Connections ............................................... 32
1.4.1 Serial Interface .......................................................................................... 33
1.4.1.1 Multi-Point Traffic via Dedicated Line Modem and WT Channel Modem 33
1.4.1.2 Multi-Point Traffic via Glass Fibre Optic and Star Connection................ 34
1.4.1.3 Analog Dial-up Traffic with Eurocom 24 ................................................ 34
1.4.1.4 Analog Dial-up Traffic with Westermo TD-36 and External Supply......... 37
1.4.1.5 Dial-up Traffic ISDN with Westermo IDW-90 and External Supply ......... 38
1.4.1.6 GSM Dial-up Traffic .............................................................................. 39
1.4.2 Ethernet Interface ...................................................................................... 39
1.4.2.1 Dial-up Traffic GPRS ............................................................................ 39
1.4.2.2 LAN Communication............................................................................. 40
1.5 Power Supply ................................................................................................. 41
1.6 Wiring Process Peripherals............................................................................. 42
1.6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 42
1.6.2 Peripheral Connector ................................................................................. 43
1.6.3 Wiring of Analog Measured Values ............................................................ 44
1.7 Shielding and Protective Earthing ................................................................... 45
1.7.1 Shielding ................................................................................................... 45
1.7.2 Protective Earth and Ground...................................................................... 45
1.8 Label .............................................................................................................. 46
1.8.1 Region- and Component Number .............................................................. 46

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Table of Contents
1.8.2 Plant- and Location Designation ................................................................ 47

1.8.3 Operational Equipment Designation (BMK) ................................................ 47
1.8.4 Terminal Labeling ...................................................................................... 48
1.8.5 Individual Terminal Point Labeling ............................................................. 48
1.8.6 Terminal Coding ........................................................................................ 49
1.9 Switching the System On and Off ................................................................... 50
1.9.1 Switching On ............................................................................................. 50
1.9.2 Switching Off ............................................................................................. 50
2 Interfaces and Circuitry .............................................................................................. 51
2.1 Power Supply Modules ................................................................................... 52

2.1.1 PS-6630 .................................................................................................... 52
2.1.1.1 Front Panel........................................................................................... 52
2.1.1.2 Connector Pin Assignment and Display ................................................ 52
2.1.1.3 Block Diagram ...................................................................................... 53
2.1.1.4 Dimensions .......................................................................................... 53
2.1.1.5 Output Voltage 2 .................................................................................. 54
2.1.1.6 Short-Circuit Protection......................................................................... 54
2.1.1.7 Interruption Bridging ............................................................................. 54
2.1.2 PS-6632 .................................................................................................... 55
2.1.2.1 Front Panel........................................................................................... 55
2.1.2.3 Block Diagram ...................................................................................... 56
2.1.2.4 Dimensions .......................................................................................... 56
2.1.2.5 Output Voltage 2 .................................................................................. 57
2.1.2.6 Short-Circuit Protection......................................................................... 57
2.1.2.7 Interruption Bridging ............................................................................. 57
2.2 Master Control Modules.................................................................................. 58
2.2.1 CP-6020 .................................................................................................... 58
2.2.1.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................... 59
2.2.1.3 Dimensions .......................................................................................... 59
2.2.2 CP-6040 .................................................................................................... 60
2.2.2.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................... 61
2.2.2.3 Dimensions .......................................................................................... 61
2.3 I/O Modules.................................................................................................... 62
3 Engineering Preparation ............................................................................................. 63
3.1 Engineering Tools .......................................................................................... 64

3.1.1 Differences ................................................................................................ 64
3.1.2 Interlocking................................................................................................ 64
3.2 Software for the Engineering .......................................................................... 65
3.2.1 SICAM TOOLBOX II .................................................................................. 65

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Table of Contents
3.2.1.1 Prerequisites ........................................................................................ 66

3.2.2 Web Browser ............................................................................................. 67
3.2.2.1 Prerequisites ........................................................................................ 67
3.2.2.2 Program WEBmic ................................................................................. 68
3.2.2.3 Program FLASHmic.............................................................................. 68
3.3 Loadable Firmwares ....................................................................................... 69
3.4 SIM Card ........................................................................................................ 70
3.4.1 Card Reader/Writer (optional) .................................................................... 71
3.4.1.1 Settings of the Card Reader/Writer ....................................................... 71
3.5 Interfaces for the Engineering ......................................................................... 72
3.6 Connect Engineering PC with the Target System ............................................ 73
3.6.1 SICAM TOOLBOX II .................................................................................. 73
3.6.1.1 Point-to-point connection via serial interface ......................................... 73
3.6.1.2 LAN/WAN Connection via Terminal Server ........................................... 74
3.6.1.3 LAN/WAN connection via Ethernet Interface ......................................... 74
3.6.2 Web Browser ............................................................................................. 75
3.6.2.1 Point-to-Point Connection via Serial Interface ....................................... 75
3.6.2.2 Point-to-Point Connection via Ethernet Interface ................................... 76
3.6.2.3 LAN/WAN Connection via Ethernet Interface ........................................ 76
3.7 Interaction with the Engineering Tool .............................................................. 77
3.7.1 SICAM TOOLBOX II .................................................................................. 77
3.7.1.1 Engineering Procedure ......................................................................... 77
3.7.1.2 Structure of the User Interface .............................................................. 78
3.7.2 Web Browser ............................................................................................. 79
3.7.2.1 Engineering Procedure ......................................................................... 79
3.7.2.2 Communication Connection Setup on the Engineering PC .................... 81
3.7.2.3 Define IP Addresses ............................................................................. 81
3.7.2.3.1 Point-to-Point Connection via Serial Interface .................................. 82
3.7.2.3.2 Point-to-Point Connection via Ethernet Interface .............................. 83
3.7.2.3.3 LAN/WAN Connection via Ethernet Interface ................................... 84
3.7.2.4 Structure of the User Interface .............................................................. 87
3.7.2.4.1 Parameter Input ............................................................................... 88
3.7.2.4.2 Startup Request ............................................................................... 89
3.7.2.4.3 SICAM TOOLBOX II Interlocking ..................................................... 89
3.7.2.5 Exceptions with Engineering via SICAM TOOLBOX II ........................... 90
3.7.2.6 Exceptions with Engineering via Web Browser ...................................... 90
4 Engineering via SICAM TOOLBOX II .......................................................................... 93
4.1 Telecontrol ..................................................................................................... 94

4.1.1 Presets ...................................................................................................... 96
4.1.1.1 Users and Rights .................................................................................. 96
4.1.1.2 Password ............................................................................................. 97
4.1.1.3 Language ............................................................................................. 97
4.1.2 Entrance into the Project............................................................................ 97

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Table of Contents
4.1.2.1 Logon ................................................................................................... 97

4.1.2.2 Logoff ................................................................................................... 97
4.1.2.3 Change Password ................................................................................ 98
4.1.3 Plant Configuration .................................................................................... 98
4.1.4 Import Firmware ........................................................................................ 98
4.1.5 Configuration and Settings for Telecontrol ................................................. 99
4.1.5.1 Hardware Configuration ...................................................................... 100
4.1.5.2 System-Technical Settings ................................................................. 101
4.1.5.2.1 Communication.............................................................................. 101
4.1.5.2.2 Periphery ....................................................................................... 101
4.1.5.3 Process-Technical Settings ................................................................ 102
4.1.5.3.1 Levels............................................................................................ 102
4.1.5.3.2 Types ............................................................................................ 102
4.1.5.3.3 Images .......................................................................................... 103
4.1.5.4 Decentral Archiving (DEAR) ............................................................... 104
4.1.6 Transform Parameters............................................................................. 104
4.1.7 Import, Export, Backup of Engineering Data ............................................ 104
4.1.8 Documentation ........................................................................................ 105
4.1.8.2 Assembly Technique .......................................................................... 105
4.1.8.3 Interface to ELCAD............................................................................. 106
4.1.8.4 Telecontrol Function ........................................................................... 106
4.1.8.4.1 System-Technical Configuration .................................................... 106
4.1.8.4.2 Process-Technical Settings............................................................ 106
4.1.9 Commissioning and Test ......................................................................... 106
4.1.9.1 Loading Engineering Data .................................................................. 107
4.1.9.2 Parameter Comparison....................................................................... 108
4.2 Automation ................................................................................................... 109
4.2.1 Creating an Application Program as Function Diagram (FUD) .................. 110
4.2.1.1 Restrictions for the Creation of a Function Diagram ............................ 110
4.2.1.2 Configuring External Signals............................................................... 111
4.2.1.3 Create Function Diagram .................................................................... 111
4.2.1.4 Generate Program Code .................................................................... 112
4.2.2 Documentation ........................................................................................ 114
4.2.2.1 Cross Reference List .......................................................................... 114
4.2.2.2 Open-/Closed-Loop Control Function .................................................. 114
4.2.3.1 Load Application Program Code ......................................................... 115
4.2.3.2 Test Functions.................................................................................... 116
4.2.3.2.1 Simulate Function Diagram Offline ................................................. 116
4.2.3.2.2 Oscilloscope .................................................................................. 116
5 Engineering via Web Browser .................................................................................. 117
5.1 Telecontrol ................................................................................................... 118

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Table of Contents
5.1.1 Presets .................................................................................................... 118

5.1.1.1 Users and Rights ................................................................................ 118
5.1.1.2 Password ........................................................................................... 119
5.1.2 Logon and Logoff..................................................................................... 119
5.1.3 Offline Engineering .................................................................................. 120
5.1.3.1 Creating a New Project ....................................................................... 122
5.1.3.2 Starting the User Interface Offline ....................................................... 124
5.1.3.4 Save and Load Parameters ................................................................ 125
5.1.3.4.1 Write Parameters to SIM Card ....................................................... 125
5.1.3.4.2 Read Parameters from SIM Card ................................................... 125
5.1.3.5 Open Project ...................................................................................... 126
5.1.3.6 Close Project ...................................................................................... 126
5.1.3.7 Data Point Import and Export .............................................................. 127
5.1.3.7.1 Data Point Import ........................................................................... 127
5.1.3.7.2 Data Point Export .......................................................................... 128
5.1.3.8 Duplication of a Project ....................................................................... 129
5.1.4 Online Engineering .................................................................................. 132
5.1.4.1 Starting the User Interface Online ....................................................... 134
5.1.4.2 Automatic Hardware Configuration ..................................................... 134
5.1.4.3 Save and Load Parameters ................................................................ 135
5.1.4.3.1 Download Parameters ................................................................... 135
5.1.4.3.2 Upload Parameters ........................................................................ 135
5.1.5 Engineering Offline or Online ................................................................... 137
5.1.5.1 System Settings ................................................................................. 137
5.1.5.1.1 Station Address and Plant Data ..................................................... 138
5.1.5.1.2 IP Configuration ............................................................................. 138
5.1.5.1.3 Password and Access Right .......................................................... 139
5.1.5.1.4 Supervision and Fault Behavior ..................................................... 139
5.1.5.1.5 Reset all Parameters ..................................................................... 140
5.1.5.2 Time Settings ..................................................................................... 141
5.1.5.3 Configuration of the Communication Interface..................................... 142
5.1.5.4 Settings of the Communication Protocol.............................................. 143
5.1.5.5 Configuration of Inputs and Outputs.................................................... 144
5.1.5.6 Settings of the Inputs and Outputs ...................................................... 147
5.1.5.6.1 Binary Information Acquisition ........................................................ 147
5.1.5.6.2 Counting Pulse Acquisition ............................................................ 148
5.1.5.6.3 Current and Voltage Acquisition ..................................................... 150
5.1.5.6.4 Temperature Acquisition ................................................................ 151
5.1.5.6.5 Frequency Acquisition.................................................................... 152
5.1.5.6.6 Speed Monitoring .......................................................................... 153
5.1.5.6.7 Command Output .......................................................................... 156
5.1.5.6.8 Binary Information Output .............................................................. 158
5.1.5.6.9 Current and Voltage Output ........................................................... 159

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Table of Contents
5.1.5.7 Decentralized Archive (DEAR) ............................................................ 160

5.1.5.7.1 Common........................................................................................ 160
5.1.5.7.2 Configuration of DEAR................................................................... 160
5.1.5.7.3 Archiving Data Points from Peripheral Elements ............................ 162
5.1.5.7.4 Archiving Data Points from PLC ..................................................... 163
5.1.5.8 Documentation ................................................................................... 164
5.1.5.8.1 Overview ....................................................................................... 164
5.1.5.8.2 Power Supply Module .................................................................... 164
5.1.5.8.3 Protocol ......................................................................................... 165
5.1.5.8.4 I/O Modules ................................................................................... 165
5.1.6.1 Initiate Startup .................................................................................... 166
5.1.6.2 Startup Request due to Parameter Modification .................................. 166
5.1.6.3 Test Functions.................................................................................... 168
5.1.6.3.1 State Display of Inputs and Outputs ............................................... 168
5.1.6.3.2 Simulation of Outputs .................................................................... 170
5.1.6.4 Display Event List ............................................................................... 171
5.1.6.4.1 Save Event List.............................................................................. 172
5.1.6.4.2 Clear Event List ............................................................................. 172
5.1.6.5 Local Reading of the Decentralized Archive (DEAR) ........................... 173
5.1.6.5.1 Save DEAR ................................................................................... 174
5.1.6.5.2 Clear DEAR................................................................................... 175
5.2 Automation ................................................................................................... 176
5.2.1 Creating an Application Program as Instruction List (IL) ........................... 176
5.2.1.1 Structure of an Instruction List ............................................................ 176
5.2.1.2 Syntax for Instructions ........................................................................ 177
5.2.1.2.1 Common........................................................................................ 177
5.2.1.2.2 Addressing of I/O Variables ........................................................... 178
5.2.1.2.3 Addressing of Flags ....................................................................... 178
5.2.1.2.4 Call of Functions ............................................................................ 179
5.2.1.2.5 Call of Function Blocks .................................................................. 180
5.2.1.3 Instruction Comments......................................................................... 180
5.2.1.4 Settings in the Application Program .................................................... 180
5.2.1.4.1 Setting the Cycle Time................................................................... 180
5.2.1.4.2 Spontaneous Program Execution................................................... 182
5.2.1.4.3 Data Flow Control .......................................................................... 183
5.2.1.5 System Information in the Application Program ................................... 184
5.2.1.6 Command Processing according to IEC 61131 ................................... 184
5.2.1.7 Generation of Integrated Totals .......................................................... 185
5.2.1.8 Reading System Errors....................................................................... 185
5.2.2.1 Initiate Startup (Warm Restart) ........................................................... 186
5.2.2.2 Startup due to Application Program Change (Cold Restart) ................. 187
5.2.2.3 Configuration ...................................................................................... 188

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Table of Contents
5.2.2.3.1 Enable and Disable PLC Program Execution ................................. 189

5.2.2.3.2 Save and Load PLC Code ............................................................. 189
5.2.2.3.3 Recompile PLC Code .................................................................... 190
5.2.2.3.4 Erase PLC Code from SIM Card .................................................... 191
5.2.2.4 Test Functions .................................................................................... 191
5.2.2.4.1 Start and Stop Program Execution ................................................. 192
5.2.2.4.2 Stop Program Execution at a Command Line ................................. 192
5.2.2.4.3 Stop Program Execution dependent on Variable ............................ 192
5.2.2.4.4 Read and Write Variable ................................................................ 193
6 Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 195
6.1 LED Displays on the Master Control Module ................................................. 196

6.1.1 LED Display upon Startup........................................................................ 196
6.2 I/O Module Monitoring .................................................................................. 197
6.3 Behaviour of the Outputs on Startup and Communication Failure.................. 198
6.4 Diagnosis ..................................................................................................... 199
6.4.1 SICAM TOOLBOX II ................................................................................ 200
6.4.1.1 Ax 1703 Error Message ...................................................................... 200
6.4.1.2 Diagnosis of the Open-/Closed-Loop Control Function ........................ 201
6.4.2 Web Browser ........................................................................................... 202
6.4.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 202
6.4.2.2 System Diagnosis ............................................................................... 204
6.4.2.3 System Status .................................................................................... 205
6.4.2.4 Diagnosis of the Time ......................................................................... 207
6.4.2.4.1 Time Synchronization .................................................................... 207
6.4.2.4.2 Local Setting of the Time ............................................................... 208
6.4.2.5 Diagnosis of the Open-/Closed-Loop Control Function ........................ 209
6.5 Maintenance of the Hardware ....................................................................... 211
6.5.1 General for the Replacement of Modules ................................................. 211
6.5.2 Replacement of the Master Control Module ............................................. 212
6.5.3 Replacement of the SIM Card .................................................................. 212
6.5.3.1 Read and Write complete SIM Card .................................................... 213
6.5.3.2 Erase Content of the SIM Card ........................................................... 213
6.5.4 Replacement of an I/O Module ................................................................ 213
6.5.5 Removal of an I/O Module ....................................................................... 213
6.5.6 Adding an I/O Module .............................................................................. 213
6.6 Firmware Update .......................................................................................... 214
6.6.1 Establish Mechanical Connection with the Target System ........................ 214
6.6.2 Load Firmware ........................................................................................ 215
6.6.2.1 Errors upon Loading the Firmware ...................................................... 217
7 Parameter Setting Instruction................................................................................... 219
7.1 System Settings ........................................................................................... 220

7.2 Time Settings ............................................................................................... 222

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Table of Contents
7.2.1 Time Synchronization .............................................................................. 222

7.3 Communication ............................................................................................ 223
7.3.1 Protocol Configuration ............................................................................. 223
7.3.1.1 Transmission Facilities ....................................................................... 224
7.3.1.1.1 Multi-point Traffic (Ax, SK) and Repeater Operation (SK) ............... 224
7.3.1.1.2 Dial-Up Traffic (Ax) ........................................................................ 226
7.3.1.1.3 Ethernet, LAN (Ax, only CP-6040).................................................. 228
7.3.1.1.4 Internet, GPRS (Ax, only CP-6040) ................................................ 229
7.3.1.2 Message Settings (Ax)........................................................................ 230
7.3.1.3 Message Settings (SK) ....................................................................... 231
7.3.2 Protocol Settings ..................................................................................... 232
7.3.2.1 Multi-Point Traffic (Ax) ........................................................................ 232
7.3.2.2 Multi-Point Traffic (SK)........................................................................ 233
7.3.2.3 Repeater Operation (SK) .................................................................... 233
7.3.2.4 Dial-Up Traffic (Ax) ............................................................................. 234
7.3.2.5 Ethernet LAN and Internet GPRS (Ax, only CP-6040) ......................... 236
7.3.3 Settings if no Communication is Selected ................................................ 237
7.3.4 Communication Failure Handling ............................................................. 238
7.4 Hardware Configuration................................................................................ 239
7.5 Process Periphery ........................................................................................ 240
7.5.1 Single-Point Information Acquisition......................................................... 242
7.5.1.1 Release/Blocking................................................................................ 242
7.5.1.2 Acquisition.......................................................................................... 242
7.5.1.3 Inversion ............................................................................................ 242
7.5.1.4 Message Forwarding .......................................................................... 243
7.5.1.5 Information Objects ............................................................................ 243
7.5.1.6 Configuration of the Contacts ............................................................. 244
7.5.1.7 Settings .............................................................................................. 244
7.5.2 Double-Point Information Acquisition ....................................................... 245
7.5.2.2 Acquisition.......................................................................................... 245
7.5.2.3 Inversion ............................................................................................ 245
7.5.2.4 Monitoring Intermediate and Faulty Position ....................................... 245
7.5.2.8 Settings .............................................................................................. 248
7.5.3 Count Pulse Acquisition ........................................................................... 249
7.5.3.2 Acquisition.......................................................................................... 249
7.5.3.3 Inversion ............................................................................................ 249
7.5.3.4 Impulse Counting ............................................................................... 250
7.5.3.5 Counter Value Formation.................................................................... 250
7.5.3.6 Integrated Total Formation.................................................................. 250

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Table of Contents
7.5.3.7 Counter Interrogation .......................................................................... 251

7.5.3.8 Interval Control ................................................................................... 251
7.5.3.9 Transmission of Integrated Total ......................................................... 251
7.5.3.11 Spontaneous Message Reception ...................................................... 252
7.5.3.13 Configuration of the Contacts.............................................................. 253
7.5.3.14 Settings .............................................................................................. 254
7.5.4 Current Acquisition .................................................................................. 255
7.5.4.2 Acquisition .......................................................................................... 255
7.5.4.3 Correction........................................................................................... 256
7.5.4.4 Suppression of Zero Range and Plausibility Check ............................. 257
7.5.4.4.1 Unipolar Measurement................................................................... 258
7.5.4.4.2 Bipolar Measurement ..................................................................... 260
7.5.4.4.3 Live Zero Measurement ................................................................. 262
7.5.4.5 Change Monitoring ............................................................................. 263
7.5.4.9 Settings .............................................................................................. 266
7.5.5 Voltage Acquisition .................................................................................. 267
7.5.5.2 Acquisition .......................................................................................... 267
7.5.5.3 Correction........................................................................................... 268
7.5.5.4 Suppression of Zero Range and Plausibility Check ............................. 269
7.5.5.4.1 Unipolar Measurement................................................................... 270
7.5.5.4.2 Bipolar Measurement ..................................................................... 272
7.5.5.4.3 Live Zero Measurement ................................................................. 274
7.5.5.9 Settings .............................................................................................. 278
7.5.6 Temperature Acquisition .......................................................................... 279
7.5.6.2 Acquisition .......................................................................................... 279
7.5.6.3 Smoothing .......................................................................................... 280
7.5.6.4 Adaption ............................................................................................. 280
7.5.6.9 Settings .............................................................................................. 283

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Table of Contents
7.5.6.10 Values for the Linearization Tables ..................................................... 284

7.5.6.11 Calculation between 2 Basic Values ................................................... 287
7.5.7 Frequency Acquisition ............................................................................. 288
7.5.7.2 Acquisition.......................................................................................... 288
7.5.7.3 Correction .......................................................................................... 288
7.5.7.4 Frequency Characteristic .................................................................... 289
7.5.7.9 Settings .............................................................................................. 291
7.5.8 Speedmonitoring ..................................................................................... 292
7.5.8.2 Acquisition.......................................................................................... 293
7.5.8.3 Direction of Rotation Detection ........................................................... 293
7.5.8.4 Gradient Monitoring ............................................................................ 293
7.5.8.5 Standstill Detection ............................................................................. 294
7.5.8.6 Creep Detection ................................................................................. 294
7.5.8.7 Speed Threshold Values .................................................................... 294
7.5.8.9 Error Contact as Watchdog for the Speedmonitoring........................... 295
7.5.8.10 Speed Output ..................................................................................... 295
7.5.8.11 Data Points for the Software ............................................................... 296
7.5.8.15 Settings .............................................................................................. 298
7.5.9 Pulse Command Output .......................................................................... 300
7.5.9.1 Command Output Procedure .............................................................. 301
7.5.9.1.1 Command Output (OC).................................................................. 301
7.5.9.1.2 Command Output with internal Check (IC1) ................................... 302
7.5.9.1.3 Command Output with Resistance Check (RC1) ............................ 303
7.5.9.3 Initiate Command Output .................................................................... 304
7.5.9.3.1 Formal Check ................................................................................ 305
7.5.9.3.2 Direct Command............................................................................ 305
7.5.9.3.3 Select and Execute Command ....................................................... 306
7.5.9.3.4 1-out-of-n Check ............................................................................ 307
7.5.9.3.5 Set Control Location ...................................................................... 307
7.5.9.4 Monitor Pulse Duration ....................................................................... 308
7.5.9.4.1 Command Output Time.................................................................. 308
7.5.9.4.2 Return Information Monitoring........................................................ 308
7.5.9.4.3 Special Cases ............................................................................... 309

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Table of Contents
7.5.9.5 Prepare Control Circuit (dependent on the System Element)............... 310

7.5.9.5.1 Idle Check ..................................................................................... 310
7.5.9.5.2 Selective Activation Check ............................................................. 310
7.5.9.5.3 Resistance Check .......................................................................... 310
7.5.9.5.4 Electric Current Measurement........................................................ 311
7.5.9.5.5 Activation of Actuators with Self Interruption................................... 311
7.5.9.5.6 Earth-Fault Check.......................................................................... 311
7.5.9.6 Error Handling .................................................................................... 313
7.5.9.6.1 Abortion......................................................................................... 313
7.5.9.6.2 Abortion with Diagnosis ................................................................. 313
7.5.9.6.3 Abortion with Blockage .................................................................. 313
7.5.9.7 Periodical Control Circuit Check.......................................................... 314
7.5.9.8 Output ................................................................................................ 314
7.5.9.8.1 Circuitry Variants ........................................................................... 314
7.5.9.9 Triggering via Spontaneous Message Reception ................................ 316
7.5.9.12 Settings .............................................................................................. 319
7.5.10 Binary Information Output ........................................................................ 320
7.5.10.2 Output ................................................................................................ 320
7.5.10.2.1 Behavior of the Output upon Failure............................................... 321
7.5.10.6 Settings .............................................................................................. 323
7.5.11 Current Output......................................................................................... 324
7.5.11.2 Initiate Setpoint Command Output ...................................................... 324
7.5.11.2.1 Formal Check ................................................................................ 325
7.5.11.2.2 Direct Command............................................................................ 325
7.5.11.3 Technological Adaptation.................................................................... 327
7.5.11.3.1 Characteristic ................................................................................ 327
7.5.11.4 Output ................................................................................................ 328
7.5.11.8 Settings .............................................................................................. 331
7.5.12 Voltage Output ........................................................................................ 332
7.5.12.2 Initiate Setpoint Command Output ...................................................... 332
7.5.12.2.1 Formal Check ................................................................................ 333

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Table of Contents
7.5.12.2.2 Direct Command............................................................................ 333

7.5.12.3 Technological Adaptation ................................................................... 335
7.5.12.3.1 Characteristic ................................................................................ 335
7.5.12.4 Output ................................................................................................ 336
7.5.12.8 Settings .............................................................................................. 339
7.6 Decentralized Archive................................................................................... 340
7.6.1 Manner of Operation................................................................................ 340
7.6.1.1 Acquisition of Events .......................................................................... 340
7.6.1.2 Addressing of the Data Points............................................................. 341
7.6.1.3 Archiving before Time Setting ............................................................. 341
7.6.1.4 Handling of the Day Alternation .......................................................... 341
7.6.1.5 Supported Type Identifications............................................................ 342
7.6.1.6 Generation of Archive Files................................................................. 342
7.6.2 File Transfer according to IEC 60870-5.................................................... 343
7.6.2.1 Definitions for the Request of Files ..................................................... 344
7.6.2.2 Parameter Setting Rules for Remote Stations ..................................... 345
7.6.3 Settings ................................................................................................... 346
7.6.3.1 Configuration ...................................................................................... 346
7.6.3.2 Assign Data Points of the Peripheral Elements ................................... 347
7.6.3.3 Assign Data Points of the PLC ............................................................ 347
7.7 Automation ................................................................................................... 348
7.7.1 Settings ................................................................................................... 348
7.7.2 Technical Determining Factors ................................................................ 348
A Variables in the IL ..................................................................................................... 349
A.1 System Variables ......................................................................................... 350

A.1.1 Processing .............................................................................................. 350
A.1.2 Dataflow .................................................................................................. 350
A.1.3 System Errors ......................................................................................... 350
A.2 Data Points from the Peripheral Element ...................................................... 351
B Examples for Application Programs ........................................................................ 353
B.1 Transfer an Input to a Signaling Output and to a Command Output ............... 354
B.2 Combine two Inputs with AND ...................................................................... 355
B.3 Linear Adaptation with Value Selection ......................................................... 356
B.4 Operating Hours Counter.............................................................................. 357
B.5 Bounce Suppression .................................................................................... 359
B.6 Setpoint Command....................................................................................... 361
B.7 Create Command with ACTCON/ACTTERM via Input .................................. 362

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Table of Contents
B.8 Speed Comparison ....................................................................................... 367
C Error Handling ........................................................................................................... 369
C.1 System Errors in the Diagnosis ..................................................................... 370

C.1.1 Error Indications ...................................................................................... 370
C.1.2 Advanced Error Information ..................................................................... 377
C.2 Operator Errors ............................................................................................ 378
D Connection of Resistance Thermometers ............................................................... 381
D.1 Calibration Process ...................................................................................... 382
E Set up Dial-up Connection via PPP .......................................................................... 383
E.1 Windows Settings ......................................................................................... 384

E.2 Settings in Microsoft Windows 8 ................................................................... 385
E.2.1 Modem Installation .................................................................................. 385
E.2.2 Network Configuration ............................................................................. 388
E.4 Settings in Microsoft Windows Vista ............................................................. 406
E.5 Settings in Microsoft Windows XP Professional ............................................ 416
E.6 Settings in Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional ......................................... 425
E.6.2 Configuration of Network and Dial-Up Connections .................................. 428
E.7 Settings in Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 ........................................................... 433
E.8 Restore Settings for the Internet Use ............................................................ 447

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Table of Contents

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
1 Installation
Contents
1.1 Mechanical Design ......................................................................................... 24

1.2 Design and Elements of a Module .................................................................. 25
1.3 Assembly ....................................................................................................... 27
1.4 Setup of external Communication Connections ............................................... 32
1.5 Power Supply ................................................................................................. 41
1.6 Wiring Process Peripherals............................................................................. 42
1.7 Shielding and Protective Earthing ................................................................... 45
1.8 Label .............................................................................................................. 46
1.9 Switching the System On and Off ................................................................... 50

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.1 Mechanical Design
The system SICAM MIC consists of modules that are installed on a TS35 rail (DIN rail). The
sequence of modules from left to right or top to bottom is prescribed as follows:
1 power supply module (optionally 2 for redundancy)

1 master control module
Optionally up to 8 I/O modules
Standard Arrangement
8 I/O-Modules max.
TS35 rail
Master Control Module
Power Supply Module
The electrical connection of the modules with the power supply takes place during the process
of latching together, whereby each module can be individually replaced.
You find the exact information on mounting in section 1.3, Assembly.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.2 Design and Elements of a Module
1.2.1 Peripheral Connector
On the modules there are, depending on the type, up to 4 10-pole male connectors with re-
movable screw terminals (optionally spring-loaded- or crimp terminals can be used).
With the screw terminal, as an option there exists the possibility of a mechanical connector
coding (refer to chapter 1.8.6, Terminal Coding).
1.2.2 Communication Interfaces
These are only available on the master control modules. Depending on the type used
(CP-6020, CP-6040) these provide various connectors for the communication.
Connector used for

DSUB-9 V.28 serial interface; remote communication with multi-point traffic or
dial-up traffic according to IEC 60870-5-101
RJ45 10Base-T; network interface according to IEC 60870-5-104 of the
type TCP/IP

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.2.3 Connection Diagrams
These are located on the underside of the modules. They indicate examples of the external
circuitry of the modules.
1.2.4 Locking Clips
By means of these two metal clips the modules are locked onto the TS35 rail and also re-
moved.
1.2.5 Display Elements / Front Panel
The number and meaning of the displays on the front panel are, apart from the RY-LED, dif-
ferent on all modules. While the RY-LED always displays the functional readiness of the mod-
ule, the meaning of the other displays is to be taken from the respective description (see 6,
Maintenance).
1.2.6 Dimensions

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.3 Assembly
1.3.1 Installation Location
The terminal modules are designed for the installation in a cabinet, rack or on the wall. The
permissible temperature range for the operation of the modules is from –25°C to +70°C.
Further details can be found in the SICAM MIC System Description, chapter “Ambient Condi-
tions”.
1.3.1.1 Mounting Position
SICAM MIC systems may only be installed horizontally or vertically. The vertical installation is
to be preferred, since this provides a considerably more space-saving and efficient installa-
tion. The cabling of external cables is also made significantly easier as a result.
horizontal installation
vertical installation
Not permissible are installations on the ceiling (own weight) and on the floor (dust level).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.3.1.2 Space Requirement
he space requirement of a completely configured SICAM MIC system (power supply, master
control unit, up to 8 I/O modules) in the length comes to 630 mm (without end clip and plate
mounting for the system designation).
The space requirement for the width depends on several factors. Besides the size of the mod-
ule itself (130mm), the size of the cable ducts used and their minimum distance to the mod-
ules is to be taken into account. This distance is 20 mm if no lead labeling is to take place and
30 mm if the leads are to be fitted with labeling bushes.
630mm (system with 8 I/O modules)
63mm
20 mm
or
30 mm
1.3.2 Installation of the TS35 Rail (DIN Rail)
For the installation of the modules a TS35 rail is used.

This must conform to the European standard
EN 50 022.
The orientation and position in which the TS35 rail is
to be installed must be determined locally. Take into
account the details specified in chapter 1.3.1.2,
Space Requirement.
Caution
By means of the connection TS35 rail - cabinet/rack a reliable grounding connection must be guaranteed.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.3.3 Installation of the Cable Duct
For the cabling, cable ducts are to be provided at both sides of the modules (80x60mm with
SIEMENS standard design). The minimum distance from the terminal module to the cable
duct is 20 mm for cabling without lead labeling. If the leads are to be fitted with labeling bush-
es, the minimum distance is 30 mm (refer to chapter 1.3.1.2, Space Requirement).
1.3.4 Installation and Removal of Modules
1.3.4.1 Handling
The modules can be installed on the TS35 rail and removed again by hand, without any tools.
For this, the locking clips on the top side of the module are pressed together , the module
coupled with the neighboring module by means of the guides at the corners of the housing
and positioned on the TS35 rail .
For the removal, the locking clips are again pressed together and the module withdrawn with
clips pressed together.
Warning
The connecting and withdrawal of modules is only permitted in a de-energized state. This state is
achieved by interrupting the power supply to the power supply unit and to the peripherals.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.3.4.2 Coupling
Modules that are adjacent to each other are mechanically connected with each other by
means of the guides at the corners of the housing.
Caution
The housing form of older TM module series does not provide sufficient protection against incorrectly
positioned installation. Therefore pay attention to the correct alignment if you install such modules.
It is correct, when with vertical installation position of the system, the SIEMENS lettering on
the front panel can be read from left to right. With horizontal installation position of the system,
it must be possible to read the SIEMENS lettering on the front panel from bottom to top.
1.3.4.3 Order
The first two modules are always the power supply module and the master control module. Af-
terwards the I/O modules are installed.
Caution
With the last module, to protect the bus a protective cap is to be snapped on. Such a protective cap is
included in the package of every power supply module as standard.
In addition, with vertical installation an end clip is also to be fitted. This prevents the modules from shifting
due to their own weight.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
Designation Item Number / MLFB

PHOENIX CLIPFIX35 - End clip for PHO+3022218
TS35 rail
Order No. 3022218
Bus Terminator TC6-050

6MF13130GA500AA0
Note
Please consider the rules in the SICAM MIC System Description, chapter “System Overview“, section
“Architecture“ | “I/O Modules“ | ”Configuration Notes“.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.4 Setup of external Communication Connections
Depending on the master control module used, there are different communication interfaces
(serial V.28, Ethernet TCP/IP) to external data transmission facilities available.
The next section shows how the various methods of communication can be realized by means
of data transmission facilities.
Depending on the communication type, different connection cables are required for the con-
nection of a data transmission facility on the master control module.
Note
Communication cables are, if possible, to be installed separately from the supply and peripheral cables.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.4.1 Serial Interface
1.4.1.1 Multi-Point Traffic via Dedicated Line Modem and WT Channel

Modem
CE-070x TC6-210
V.24/V.28 (X1)
Note
Consider the power consumption of the modem when using this configuration (power supply of CE-070x
via CP-60xx).
Order information for the transmission facility and cables see SICAM EMIC System Descrip-
tion, Appendix “Order Information“, section “Accessories”.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.4.1.2 Multi-Point Traffic via Glass Fibre Optic and Star Connection
PS-663x CM-0822
Glass fibre optic cable

max. 1.5 km
CM-0827 Modular coupler

RJ45 - 9pol. D-SUB
tion, Appendix „Order Information“, section “Accessories”.
1.4.1.3 Analog Dial-up Traffic with Eurocom 24
The analog modem Eurocom 24 is directly mounted on the master control module.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
Modification instructions for the use of Eurocom 24 with SICAM MIC

To provide a safe hold of the modem on the master control module, the 9-pole DSUB interfac-
es of both devices are proivded with a connector lock (TC6-212). Proceed as follows:
Remove the threaded bolts of the 9-pole DSUB interfaces of modem and master control
module
Mount the slide lock frame with the fixing screws on the modem
Mount the lock posts of the slide lock on the master control module

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
Assemble Eurocom 24 on Master Control Module

To ease the assemble it is recommended to remove the master control module from the TS35
rail. The same applies also to the disassemble.
Open the slide lock frame
Put the modem on the master control module
Close the slide lock frame

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.4.1.4 Analog Dial-up Traffic with Westermo TD-36 and External Supply
Westermo TD-36 max. 25 m
Power WESTERMO TD-36
supply
PSTN
POWER
20 - 264VAC / 14 - 300VDC (TD-36 AV)

10 - 30VAC / 10 - 60VDC (TD-36 LV)
tion, Appendix ”Order Information“, section “Accessories”.
Cable Circuitry CP-60xx – Westermo TD-36

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.4.1.5 Dial-up Traffic ISDN with Westermo IDW-90 and External Supply
Westermo IDW-90 max. 25 m
Power
ISDN
supply
WESTERMO IDW-90
RS-232
12 - 48VAC / 12 - 34VAC (IDW-90 LV)
tion, Appendix ”Order Information“, section “Accessories”.
Cable Circuitry CP-60xx –Westermo IDW-90

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.4.1.6 GSM Dial-up Traffic

GSM Modem
TC6-211
1.4.2 Ethernet Interface
1.4.2.1 Dial-up Traffic GPRS
GPRS Modem
Patchcable
CP-6040

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.4.2.2 LAN Communication

Ethernet
TCP/IP 60870-5-104
Switch
Patch cable
CP-6040
You can find details on connections above 10 m in the manual SICAM RTUs Platforms Con-
figuration Automation Units and Automation Networks, appendix A; section "Electrical Con-
nection, Cable longer than 10 m".

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.5 Power Supply
The supply of the power supply modules (PS-663x) can be carried out with single leads of the
type H07V-K (1.5-2.5) or a cable of the type LA-YY-0(2x1.5-2.5) or H05VV-F3G(1.5-2.5) re-
spectively.
For the fuse protection a miniature circuit breaker 2-pole 2A characteristic C (standard type:
Merlin Gerin C60H 6kA) is recommended.
Primary Mains Units (Standard Types) see SICAM MIC System Description, Appendix A, sec-
tion “Accessories”.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.6 Wiring Process Peripherals
1.6.1 Introduction
Cabinet-internal wiring is preferably carried out with plastic-insulated cables according to DIN
VDE 298 T4 2/89. Types: H05V-K (0.5-1mm²), H07V-K (1.5-2.5).
The use of lead sleeves is recommended.
The construction of the peripheral connectors is designed for direct peripheral wiring. That
means, that the wiring can be carried out without the use of a routing terminal or other addi-
tional screw terminals.
For the wiring, cable ducts are to be provided at both sides of the modules (refer to chapter
1.3.1.2, Space Requirement).
Warning
The operations described in this manual presuppose a reliable grounding connection between SICAM MIC
and cabinet or rack.
Warning
For modules that operate with voltages > 60 V (e.g.: DO-6212, DI-6101) care must be taken that manipu-
lation on the peripheral connectors may only be carried out in a de-energized state.
The reason for this is that when withdrawing the upper peripheral connector under voltage, the external
voltage can be conducted through the lower peripheral connector still connected. The pins of the upper
peripheral connector now freely accessible will now conduct the external voltage.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.6.2 Peripheral Connector
Terminal Type Designation Lead Exit Cross-section

Screw terminal included in delivery side up to 2.5 mm²
up to 1.5 mm² 1)
Spring-loaded termi- FKC 2.5/10-ST-5.08 above up to 2.5 mm²
nal up to 1.5 mm² 1)
PHOENIX
Crimp terminal MSTBC 2.5/10-STZFD-5.08 above 1.5 mm² to 2.5 mm²
Crimp contact MSTBC-MT 1.5-2.5 1.5 mm² 2)
PHÖENIX 1.0 mm² 3)
1)
When using a jumper with 0.75mm² or a bridging cable fan
(see following picture)
2)
Jumper with 0.75mm²
3)
Jumper with 1.00mm²
External wiring in 3-wire technology
Designation Item Number

Labeled screw terminal (1-10); with-
out coding
Labeled screw terminal (11-20);
without coding
without coding
without coding
Withdrawal aid for terminals TC6-200
6MF13130GC000AA0

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.6.3 Wiring of Analog Measured Values
During the wiring of measured values with single wires, the wires must be twisted.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.7 Shielding and Protective Earthing
1.7.1 Shielding
Basically the TM-modules are designed in such a way that no shielded cables are required.
Normally, shielded cables are strain-relieved directly after the cabinet/rack entry and then
grounded on a large-surface screening rail installed for this purpose. The terminal modules
themselves provide no possibility of shield clamping.
1.7.2 Protective Earth and Ground
When installing a SICAM MIC system attention is to be paid that the cabinet or rack used fea-
tures a proper connection with protective earth. That means, that all electrical conducting
parts must be connected large-surface and as short as possible with the cabinet spar. The
cabinet spar itself must be connected with the existing grounding system.
If these prerequisites are given, the ground connection of the device takes place over the
connection of the TS35 rail with the cabinet spar. A reliable connection is achieved by using
screws with contact washers.
Note
The TS35 rail of a complete equipped System (PS+CP+8 I/O Module) must be screwed at least 4x on
metallic background. This background should be at least 40 cm wide. The usage of a mounting plate is
recommended.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.8 Label
This section shows how to label a SICAM MIC system according to the standard. Following
labels are intended:
Region- and component number

Plant- and location designation
Operational equipment designation (BMK)
Terminal labeling
Individual terminal point labeling
1.8.1 Region- and Component Number
For the label plate with the region- and component number, the end clip with label mounting is
to be fitted before the power supply module.
R#255/K#255
End bracket
Terminal strip marker

CLIPFIX 35-5 PHO+3022276
End clip for TS35 rail
KLM3 PHO+0811969
Terminal strip marker carrier, height-
adjustable, for end brackets

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.8.2 Plant- and Location Designation
The plant- and location designation normally takes place on the cabinet in which the system is
installed.
If required, the plant- and location designation can however also take place on a further end
clip with label mounting. This is fitted before the label mounting with the region- and compo-
nent number.
R#255/K#255
Plant/Location
End bracket
Terminal strip marker
1.8.3 Operational Equipment Designation (BMK)
For the labeling of the modules with the operational equipment designation (BMK) every mod-
ule is fitted with a PHOENIX label plate type: ZB8/27.
-A100 -A101 -A101.0 -A101.1 -A101.2
Standard labeling:
BMK HW-Designation Use

-Ax00 PS-663x Power supply
-Ax01 CP-6020/CP-6040 Master control module
-Ax01.0 Periphery
-Ax01.1 Periphery
-Ax01.2 Periphery
-Ax01.3 Periphery
-Ax01.4 Periphery
-Ax01.5 Periphery
-Ax01.6 Periphery
-Ax01.7 Periphery

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation

PHOENIX ZB 8/27 Zack-strip 10 pcs. PHO+0807216
1.8.4 Terminal Labeling
The individual terminals are already labeled ex works. The numbering takes place consecu-
tively from 1 – 20 (on power supply module and master control module) or from 1 - 40 (on all
I/O modules).
1.8.5 Individual Terminal Point Labeling
This method of labeling can take place optionally in addition to the terminal labeling.
Thereby an adhesive label is labeled individual, and afterwards placed on the slanted surface
of the housing cover.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation

PHOENIX BMKL 50x12 WH PHO+5032387
DIN A4 sheet with 63 white adhesive
labels
Order No. 5032387
1.8.6 Terminal Coding
In order to prevent terminal strips of the lower level of a module (terminal labeling: 1-10 and
31-40) from being interchanged with those of the upper level of the same module (terminal la-
beling: 11-20 and 21-30), terminals and male connectors are provided with a mechanical cod-
ing.
A coding that prevents terminal strips of one module from being interchanged with those of
another module can be realized with this method of coding, but is however not carried out at
works.
Designation Item Number/ MLFB

PHOENIX CR-MSTB/ Coding Ele- PHO+1734401
ment 6 pcs
Coding section for terminal strip TC6-055

6MF13130GA550AA0

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Installation
1.9 Switching the System On and Off
1.9.1 Switching On
Before switching the system on, all components must be connected to a power supply.
Switching on takes place by connecting the voltage, commonly for example by switching on a
miniature circuit breaker. The system starts up automatically (Startup after Power up).
The entire system is operational (without error display), as soon as all available components
are supplied with power and all system elements have concluded the startup (refer to section
6.1.1, LED Display upon Startup). This is also applicable analogously, if only parts of the sys-
tem are switched off and switched on again.
1.9.2 Switching Off
The switching off of the system takes place by disconnecting the voltage on all components. If
the power is switched off only at the master control module, the lower-level components are
not operational.
Caution
The switching off of the master control element during writing operations to the SIM card (load firmware,
load parameters) is to be absolutely avoided, since the data on the SIM card could be destroyed as a
result.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
2 Interfaces and Circuitry
Contents
2.1 Power Supply Modules ................................................................................... 52

2.2 Master Control Modules.................................................................................. 58
2.3 I/O Modules.................................................................................................... 62

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
2.1 Power Supply Modules
2.1.1 PS-6630
2.1.1.1 Front Panel
On the front panel there is a screw terminal for the power supply, as well as a lighted display.
P
S
-
6
6
3
0
2.1.1.2 Connector Pin Assignment and Display
Explanation

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
2.1.1.3 Block Diagram
Switch-over 5 V / 10 V by means of TM bus message to the power supply module.
2.1.1.4 Dimensions

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
2.1.1.5 Output Voltage 2
The output voltage 2 is used for the modem supply. For this 5.2 VDC or 10 VDC is available.
The switchover between these voltage values on the PS-6630 module is controlled by the
master control element - dependent on the modem type selected in the parameter setting. For
safety reasons +5.2 VDC is always activated by default for output voltage 2.
Which transmission facilities require which voltages can be seen in the sections 7.3.1.1,
Transmission Facilities.
2.1.1.6 Short-Circuit Protection
Via the controller on the primary side of the DC/DC-transformer the output voltages 1 and 2
are fundamentally protected against destruction due to overload or short-circuit (current limita-
tion of the primary current). However, this has the consequence that in this case the internal
fuse trips in the primary circuit and the PS-6630 fails as a result.
2.1.1.7 Interruption Bridging
Output delivered
Pout [W]
8
7
6
5
Uin=60VDC
4
Uin=20VDC
3
2
1
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180

Interruption time (typical) Tu [ms]

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
2.1.2 PS-6632
2.1.2.1 Front Panel
On the front panel there is a screw terminal for the power supply, as well as a lighted display.
P
S
-
6
6
3
2
Explanation

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
2.1.2.4 Dimensions

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
2.1.2.5 Output Voltage 2
The output voltage 2 is used for the modem supply. For this 5.2 VDC or 10 VDC is available.
The switchover between these voltage values on the PS-6632 module is controlled by the
master control element - dependent on the modem type selected in the parameter setting. For
safety reasons +5.2 VDC is always activated by default for output voltage 2.
Which transmission facilities require which voltages can be seen in the sections 7.3.1.1,
Transmission Facilities.
2.1.2.6 Short-Circuit Protection
Via the controller on the primary side of the DC/DC-transformer the output voltages 1 and 2
are fundamentally protected against destruction due to overload or short-circuit (current limita-
tion of the primary current). However, this has the consequence that in this case the internal
fuse trips in the primary circuit and the PS-6632 fails as a result.
2.1.2.7 Interruption Bridging
Output delivered
Pout [W]
8
76
5
Uin=110VDC
4
3
2
1
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180

Interruption time (typical) Tu [ms]

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
2.2 Master Control Modules
2.2.1 CP-6020
On the front panel there is 1 connection for the communication, as well as a lighted display.
C
P
-
6
0
2
0
Explanation

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
2.2.1.3 Dimensions

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
2.2.2 CP-6040
On the front panel there is 1 connection for the communication, as well as a lighted display.
C
P
-
6
0
4
0
Explanation

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
2.2.2.3 Dimensions

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
2.3 I/O Modules
The description of the I/O modules can be found in the manual SICAM TM I/O Modules.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3 Engineering Preparation
Content
3.1 Engineering Tools .......................................................................................... 64

3.2 Software for the Engineering .......................................................................... 65
3.3 Loadable Firmwares ....................................................................................... 69
3.4 SIM Card ........................................................................................................ 70
3.5 Interfaces for the Engineering ......................................................................... 72
3.6 Connect Engineering PC with the Target System ............................................ 73
3.7 Interaction with the Engineering Tool .............................................................. 77

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.1 Engineering Tools
The engineering of SICAM MIC is alternatively possible via
SICAM TOOLBOX II, with tool OPM II

Web browser
3.1.1 Differences
For the engineering via web browser no special knowledge of an engineering system is re-
quired, and also no licenses. The web user interface makes a very simple access to the pa-
rameter-setting of SICAM MIC. The structure of the parameter blocks is basically identical
structured like in the SICAM TOOLBOX II (consistent data management).
The engineering via web browser is useful for simple applications. There are not all the func-
tions which offer the SICAM TOOLBOX II, available. Main difference is, that via the web
browser no process-technical parameterization of the master control element is possible. With
the engineering via the SICAM TOOLBOX II, the online functions (diagnosis, test) are not
available.
You can find more details thereto in the sections 3.7.2.5, Exceptions with Engineering via
SICAM TOOLBOX II and 3.7.2.6, Exceptions with Engineering via Web Browser.
You find an overview of the respective functions in the sections 4, Engineering via SICAM
TOOLBOX II and 5, Engineering via Web Browser.
3.1.2 Interlocking
The writing access to a target system is exclusive. This means, changes of the parameteriza-
tion of a target system are only possible with that engineering tool, with which engineering
was begun for the first time.
If a target system has been parameterized via web browser, it is not possible to take over the
parameterization into the SICAM TOOLBOX II. All the online tools of the SICAM TOOLBOX II
(diagnosis, dataflow test, message simulation, etc.) cannot be used.
If a target system has been parameterized via the SICAM TOOLBOX II, there is only a read-
ing access possible via web browser (change of parameters not possible). The online func-
tions (diagnosis, process display) can be used in this case.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.2 Software for the Engineering
3.2.1 SICAM TOOLBOX II
The SICAM TOOLBOX II (as of Version 4) is available on DVD ROM and consists of the fol-
lowing toolsets:
EM II
Engineering Manager (base package)
PSR II
Engineering und Maintenance Computer
OPMII
Object-Oriented Process Data Manager
CAEx plus
Tool for the creation of an application program as function diagram (FUD), structured text
(ST), sequential function chart (SF)
Alternatively to the use of CAEx plus an existing and compatible instruction list (IL) can be
stored in the SICAM TOOLBOX II
The toolsets are also available as “Light” version. With this version, the engineering is limited
to maximal 100 system elements and 2000 data points.
The toolsets are available individually. You find information and updates for the individual
toolsets, as well as numerous licences, in Online Support Products.
Document Designation Item number

Licences,variants and order SICAM TOOLBOX II V5 licence catalog, D30-017-5
form licence demand
You find detailed information on installation and accomplishment of updates in the booklet of
the SICAM TOOLBOX II CD.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.2.1.1 Prerequisites
Prerequisite for the operation of the SICAM TOOLBOX II is the usage of an appropriate PC,
that must fulfill certain hardware requirements, depending on the license package you pur-
chased.
Information thereto reside within a permanently updated List of PC preference types (PC Prod-
ucts Preference List). Should that be not at your disposal, please consult your contact person
at Siemens.
For the installation of the SICAM TOOLBOX II the following preconditions are required:
DVD or BlueRay drive must existing

C:\ drive with file system NTFS must be existing
Administrator rights for operating system Windows ® (read and write rights to the file sys-
tem and the Windows Registry)
Installed TCP/IP
Other SICAM TOOLBOX II version must not be installed
Other ORACLE ® applications (data base, client, etc.) must not be installed
Necessary regional settings:
'Dot' for decimal separator and 'comma' for the thousand separator must be different
As separator an 'inverted comma' must not be used
Usage of Windows Fonts in normal size (96 DPI)
Microsoft Internet Explorer as of version 6.0
Macromedia Flash Player as of Version 7.0 (to play online help tutorial videos), see Instal-
lation CD1 directory \MACROMEDIA or www.macromedia.com
The initial installation needs 5 GB free harddisk memory
An update needs additional 2 GB installed main memory
Supported Operating Systems and Hardware Requirements

You find the exact information on supported operating systems and hardware in the following
document:
Document Designation Item number

Brochure with information on SICAM TOOLBOX II DVD Booklet V5 D3E-017-1
installation and performance
of updates

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.2.2 Web Browser
For the engineering via web browser you need the following programs:
Software Designation Item number

Microsoft Internet Explorer ® Web browser
1)
Microsoft Notepad ® Text editor for the creation of an application
program as instruction list (IL) 2)
CPC60 Firmware for the master control element 3) 4) SC6-060
4)
WEBmic Offline engineering tool SC6-900
1)
or an arbitrary ASCII text editor
2)
IL can be stored locally on the PC or also directly on a SIM card
3)
CPC60 contains the functionality of a web server as grafical user interface for the engineering (see
also 3.3, Loadable Firmwares)
4)
software and information can be found in Online Support Products
Note
When addressing SICAM MIC via other web browsers, a warning appears in the logon mask.
3.2.2.1 Prerequisites
Supported Operating Systems:
Operating system Web browser

Windows 8 Professional ® Internet Explorer ® as of version 10.0
Windows 7 Professional ® Internet Explorer ® as of version 8.0
Windows XP Professional ® as of Service Pack 2 Internet Explorer ® as of version 6.0
Windows 2000 Professional ® as of Service Pack 4 Internet Explorer ® as of version 5.5
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 ® Internet Explorer ® as of version 5.5
Microsoft Windows CE ® (Pocket PC as of 2002) Pocket Internet Explorer ® as of version 3.0
Note
As of CPC60 with revision 24.04 applies only Microsoft Internet Explorer® version 10 or 11 with Microsoft
Windows® version 7 or 8.
Thereby, “first-party cookies” must be enabled, otherwise you cannot log on at SICAM MIC.
This is the way to check the setting in the Internet Explorer: Click on the menu item Tools and select
Internet Options. In the following window click the PRIVACY tab, then click on the button Advanced . In
the following window, the option ACCEPT must be selected under FIRST- PARTY COOKIES.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.2.2.2 Program WEBmic
WEBmic is the tool for the offline engineering via a web browser. This program works as web-
server for the local data management on the engineering PC. It serves also for the saving and
loading of parameter files on a SIM card.
Additionally, WEBmic serves for the online parameterization of the IP address of a target sys-
tem that is connected via the communication interface.
You can find the corresponding executable file under SC6-900-<Version>.XX/86 in the
Online Support Products.
Note
The engineering is also possible online via a web browser. Thereto, no separate tool is required since the
firmware of the master control element contains the required functionality of a web server.
3.2.2.3 Program FLASHmic
FLASHmic is the tool for the reloading of CPC60 firmware updates. This program is on one
hand the flashloader and contains on the other hand the firmware in the current revision.
You can find the corresponding executable file under SC6-060-*/XX/86*) in the Online
Support Products.
You find the details on loading of firmware in section 6.6, Firmware Update.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.3 Loadable Firmwares
The modular system SICAM MIC consists of system elements, that are designed for specific
functions:
Master control element

Central processing and communication
Communication with control center and further automation units
Peripheral element
Acquisition and output of process signals
For the accomplishment of the respective functions, a special firmware is provided for each
system element (exception: protocol elements are integrated on the master control element).
The functionality of each system element is adjustable by means of parameters.
As a partner of Siemens, you are able to download all the code revisions for your system as
loadable binary files via Online Support Products.
Examples:
Firmware Item number Meaning

CPC60 central processing SC6-060-1 Revision history
and communication
SC6-060-1.XX/86 CPC60 binary file
SC6-060-1.XX/53 CPC60 TB II update
USIO60 universal signal input SC8-099-1 Revision history
and output
SC8-099-1.XX/53 USIO60 TB II update
USIO61 secured command SC8-098-1 Revision history
output
SC8-098-1.XX/53 USIO61 TB II update
The respective binary file contains the firmware code for the relevant system element (for en-
gineering via web browser).
The respective TB II update contains the firmware code for the relevant system element, as
well as the master data for the Toolbox II (for engineering via SICAM TOOLBOX II).
In order that the corresponding system elements work and can be parameterized, the respec-
tive
Firmware codes must exist in the target system

Toolbox update must be stored in the SICAM TOOLBOX II (for engineering via SICAM
TOOLBOX II)
How to load firmwares into a target is described in section 6.6, Firmware Update.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.4 SIM Card
For storing the parameters, SICAM MIC uses a SIM card (Subscriber Identification Module)
which is located in the housing of the master control module.
This card can be written while it is in the master control module (Online parameter setting) or
one writes it using an external read/write device (Offline parameter setting by means of
WEBmic.
Depending on the method used there are different demands on the hard- and software.
Note
The master control modules are supplied without SIM card.

SIM Card 32 kB CC6-093
6MF12131GA030AA0
SIM Card 128 kB CC6-092
(nur mit CPC60 as of Rev. 11) 6MF12131GA020AA0

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.4.1 Card Reader/Writer (optional)
Engineering data and firmwares can be read from the SIM card with a standard commercial
SIM card reader/writer and be stored on a PC. On the other hand, the data can be transferred
from a PC to the SIM card, particularly for the initialization of a target system.
A driver software required for the use of the SIM card reader/writer must be installed previous-
ly on the PC. Follow thereto the indications of the manufacturer.
Attention
After a driver installation for SIM card reader/writer the initial access to the SIM card with the tool WEBmic
requires considerably more time than the subsequent ones!
3.4.1.1 Settings of the Card Reader/Writer
You can read out the settings of the chipcard reader/writer via the WEBmic pop-up menu un-
der SIM Card Reader | SIM Card Reader Settings.
WEBmic checks whether a card reader is installed on the PC. If no valid installation is found an
error message appears. Otherwise, WEBmic checks the state of the installed card reader and
the SIM card and displays this in a status window.
Essentially the following information is displayed:
SIM card reader/writer info

Status = error (if reader/writer not found)
Status = valid (if reader/writer found)
PC port
Type
Version
Baud rate
SIM card info
Status = error (if SIM is faulty or reader/writer not found)
Status = wait (SIM not found or not valid)
Status = active (SIM card found)
Active identifier
Chip type
Protocol
Memory space

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.5 Interfaces for the Engineering
Depending on the master control module used, there are different communication interfaces
available for the engineering.
Master Control Interfaces Standard Connection

*)
CP-6020/CPC60 RS-232 IEC 60870-5-101 Point-to-Point (TCP/IP)
CP-6040/CPC60 RS-232 IEC 60870-5-101 Point-to-Point (TCP/IP)
LAN/WAN IEC 60870-5-104 Ethernet (TCP/IP)
*)
with supply for external modem
For the transmission of engineering data in a system SICAM MIC the engineering PC must be
connected with the target system, and a suitable SIM card must be equipped in the target sys-
tem.
Master Control Module CP-6020

Process communication and engineering are using use the interface exclusively, they are not
available simultaneously.
Master Control Module CP-6040

Process communication is available according to either IEC 60870-5-101 or IEC 60870-5-104,
but not simultaneously according to both standards, using both interfaces.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.6 Connect Engineering PC with the Target System
The parameter setting of SICAM MIC is online possible via the following connections:
Point-to-point connection via serial interface

Serial connection via telecommunication facilities
LAN/WAN connection via terminal server and serial interface
LAN/WAN connection via Ethernet interface
3.6.1.1 Point-to-point connection via serial interface
SICAM MIC is connected with the engineering PC directly via the direct cable connection.
TOOLBOX II
Direct cable connection

2xDB9F (TF5-204--)
TM 1703 mic
Master control module

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.6.1.2 LAN/WAN Connection via Terminal Server
SICAM MIC is connected with the engineering PC via a network and a terminal server (serial
DSUB9 interface).
Ethernet (TCP/IP)
Terminal
TOOLBOX II Server
CM-1820 TOOLBOX connection cable
CM-0820/ADAP
TOOLBOX adaptor
TM 1703 mic
3.6.1.3 LAN/WAN connection via Ethernet Interface
SICAM MIC is connected with the engineering PC via a network with standard patch cable
(ethernet interface RJ45).
Ethernet (TCP/IP)
TOOLBOX II
TM 1703 mic

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.6.2 Web Browser
The online parameter setting of SICAM MIC is possible via the following connections:
Point-to-point connection via serial interface

Point-to-point connection via Ethernet interface
LAN/WAN connection via Ethernet interface
3.6.2.1 Point-to-Point Connection via Serial Interface
PC and SICAM MIC are connected directly with the direct cable (DSUB connector, 9-pin,
male).
Webbrowser
2xDB9F (TF5-204--)
SICAM MIC

CP-6040 (-6020)

Direct cable 2xDB9F for SICAM MIC TF5-204
3 m; 9-pin D-Sub 6MF13140FC040AA0
(connection master control unit – PC)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.6.2.2 Point-to-Point Connection via Ethernet Interface
The parameterization via point-to-point is suitable for the initial parameterization or if the engi-
neering PC and SICAM MIC are not operated in a network (master control module CP-6040
required).
PC and target system are connected with a cross connected patch cable via the Ethernet in-
terface (RJ45 connector).
Webbrowser Cross connected patch

cable cat.5 (T41-258--)
SICAM MIC

CP-6040
Note
The point-to-point connection is not suitable for systems which are alredy operating within a network,
because the concerned station would have to be taken off from the LAN.
For local parameter setting or diagnostic during operation it is better to use the serial interface.
3.6.2.3 LAN/WAN Connection via Ethernet Interface
The parameterization via LAN/WAN is suitable if the engineering PC and (several)

SICAM MIC are operated in a network (master control module CP-6040 required).
PC and SICAM MIC are connected via standard patch cable (RJ45 plug) to a network (master
control module CP-6040 required).
Ethernet TCP/IP 60870-5-104
Standard patch cable
Webbrowser
SICAM MIC

CP-6040

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.7 Interaction with the Engineering Tool
3.7.1.1 Engineering Procedure
For the engineering of SICAM MIC serves in this case the SICAM TOOLBOX II.
The firmware CPC60 must have a revision level as of 14. Older revision levels are not suitable
for the engineering via the SICAM TOOLBOX II.
Before you begin with the engineering, the predefined configuration parameters of the SICAM
TOOLBOX II must be checked and changed, if necessary (refer to section 4.1.1, Presets).
The parameter setting is carried out with the tool "OPM II" (offline). An application program
can be edited with the tool "CAEx plus" as Function Diagram, or optionally as Instruction List
with a text editor in ASCII format (offline).
The engineering data maintained with the SICAM TOOLBOX II is stored in a data base on the
engineering PC.
By means of loading procedures, the engineering data can be transferred from the engineer-
ing PC to a target system (online). Thereto the target system must be connected with the en-
gineering PC and switched on, and a SIM card must be equipped in the master control mod-
ule of the target system.
During a loading procedure the engineering data is stored by the target system on the
equipped SIM card. With startup of the target system, all new or changed data is transferred
into its main memory.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.7.1.2 Structure of the User Interface
The single tools of the SICAM TOOLBOX II have a Windows-oriented design. They can be
started after successful installation from the Windows start menu (Start | Programme |
TOOLBOX II), or via the Toolbox shortcut on the Desktop.
The tools most frequently needed (Load Parameters, CAEx plus, etc.) can be started also
from the central engineering tool "OPM II".
The detailed instructions for working with the SICAM TOOLBOX II reside within the SICAM
TOOLBOX II Online Help, as well as the CAEx plus Online Help. The Online Help can be
started directly or from each tool via the menu Help.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.7.2 Web Browser
3.7.2.1 Engineering Procedure
For the engineering of SICAM MIC serves in this case a web browser and the program
WEBmic installed on the engineering PC.
The parameter setting may be carried out either with the program WEBmic (offline) or directly
in the target system via its integrated webserver (online). An application program can be edit-
ed as Instruction List with a text editor in ASCII format (offline).
Offline Engineering Online Engineering
The web browser accesses a local The web browser accesses a target
stored file on a PC or on a SIM card. It system. It displays HTML pages made
displays HTML pages made available available by the integrated webserver of
by WEBmic. the target system.
WEBmic
Parameters
Editor
Instruction List

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Offline Engineering
The engineering data maintained with WEBmic is stored in a file on the engineering PC (vari-
ant a) or on a SIM card (variant b).
Variant a: By means of loading procedures, the engineering data can be transferred from the
engineering PC to a target system via its integrated webserver (online). Thereto the target
system must be connected with the engineering PC and switched on, and equipped with a
SIM card.
During a loading procedure the engineering data is stored in the target system on the
equipped SIM card. With startup of the target system, all new or changed data is transferred
into its main memory.
Variant b: You can put the SIM card with the engineering data into the master control module
of the target system (only in de-energized state). Afterwards merely a startup of the target sys-
tem must be performed to activate the parameters and the optional application program.
WEBmic Local parameter file SIM read/write device SIM card
Online Engineering
Engineering data maintained with the webserver integrated in the master control module is
stored on the equipped SIM card. The data can also be transferred from the engineering PC
into a target system.
With startup of the target system, all new or changed data is transferred into its main memory.
Before you start with the engineeeing, you must
(if needed) store the firmware CPC60 on the SIM card

set up a communication connection on the engineering PC
define IP addresses for the data exchange with the target system

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.7.2.2 Communication Connection Setup on the Engineering PC
You find the instruction for different operating systems (Microsoft Windows ®) in the Appendix
E, Set up Dial-up Connection via PPP.
3.7.2.3 Define IP Addresses
For the parameterization the target system must be connected with the engineering PC and
switched on. In the master control module of the target system a SIM card must be equipped.
The establishing of a communication connection between engineering PC and the target

system takes place via adjustable IP addresses.
Predefined IP Addresses
Parameter Value Meaning/Remark

Own IP address 172.16.0.1 Address of SICAM MIC web server (point-to-point via
serial interface)
Remote IP address 172.16.0.2 Address that is assigned temporarily to the engineering
PC by SICAM MIC for the parameterize session (point-to-
point via serial interface)
Own IP address 172.16.0.3 Address of the SICAM MIC web server (point-to-point via
Ethernet interface)
Subnet mask 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 = not used
Default gateway 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 = not used
Interface half duplex Setting is dependent on the utilized transmission media
and should be changed only in exceptional cases
The adjustment of IP addresses is dependent on the selected physical connection (see 3.6.2,
Web Browser).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.7.2.3.1 Point-to-Point Connection via Serial Interface
Configure IP Address for Engineering PC

For the parameter setting the IP addresses predefined in SICAM MIC are used. Thereby the
web server of the target system assignes automatically an IP address to the engineering PC,
if this is configured for the automatic acceptance of an IP address.
Click in the control panel of the engineering PC on Network connections , after that on
New Connection Wizard .
Create now a serial connection to another computer (in this case SICAM MIC) via an available
COM interface of the engineering PC.
Click in the property dialog of the serial connection on the tab Networking , mark Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) and click on Properties .
Select OBTAIN IP ADDRESS AUTOMATICALLY and confirm with OK .
Confirm the connection settings with OK .
Connection Setup with the Web Browser

Start the web browser and enter in the address bar the IP address of your SICAM MIC. This is
set by default to 172.16.0.1.
After selecting the user and entering the password, you are logged on to the SICAM MIC sys-
tem.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.7.2.3.2 Point-to-Point Connection via Ethernet Interface
Setting the IP Address of the Engineering PC

For parameter setting of the IP address via point-to-point the engineering PC can be adjusted
according to the predefined IP address (172.16.0.3) of SICAM MIC.
Click in the Control Panel of your PC on Network and Dial-up Connections , then on
Local area connection and with the right mouse button Properties . Select Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) in the GENERAL tab and click Properties again. Enter 172.16.0.4
as IP address and 255.0.0.0 as subnet mask. Confirm your inputs with OK and confirm
in the property dialog with OK .

Start the web browser and enter in the address bar the IP address of your SICAM MIC. The
default address is 172.16.0.3.
tem.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.7.2.3.3 LAN/WAN Connection via Ethernet Interface
Setting of the IP-Address with WEBmic

A unique IP address must be set to SICAM MIC for operating within a network. The assign-
ment of the IP address depends on the subnetmask used in the network.
The IP address can be changed from each point of the network (also via router) from a menu
position of the offline tool WEBmic. The identification for the assignment of the IP adress takes
place solely via the MAC address of SICAM MIC. The MAC adress is printed on a label on the
back of the master control module.
For the address assignment start the program WEBmic.exe through double click with the left
mouse button.
The WEBmic.splash screen is opened.
Click OK to close the splash screen.
Now the WEBmic symbol appears in the notification area of the taskbar.
Click with the right mouse button on the WEBmic symbol to open the context menu.
If needed change the language and open the

context menu anew.
After that click on the item Set
Ethernet IP address (CP6040) .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The window for the IP address assignment is opened.
Supplement the last three bytes of the MAC ADDRESS and enter the IP settings.
Note
The IP settings are dependent on the configuration and the transmission media used in the network.
Contact the network adminiatrator for setting these values.
Click Set IP after entering the settings. The message writing ARP table appears. After
the addresses are written on the SIM card of the SICAM MIC, another message writing IP
address appears. If both messages contain the appendix OK, SICAM MIC can be identified
from the PC.
The status NOK means, that an error occurred with writing the address.
Check the set network addresses and the physical connection

If necessary, check the IP settings of your PC via the command prompt with the command
ipconfig.
Dependent of the used operational system, it may be necessary to start the offline tool
WEBmic with administrator rights; click thereto on the program file WEBmic.exe with the
right mouse button and select Run as administrator.
Note
With the firmware CPC60 as of revision 24.04 the setting of an IP address by means of WEBmic is support-
ed only as long as the default IP address (172.16.0.3) exists in the target system.
When the writing of the IP address is terminated with OK , you get access to SICAM MIC
with the web browser.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

Start the web browser and enter in the address bar those IP address, which you assigned
previousley to your SICAM MIC.
tem.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.7.2.4 Structure of the User Interface
Offline Dialog
The user interface represented in the web browser is structured in following parts:
Header
The indications in the header are
Station name
CASDU1
CASDU2
Time (generated offline from engineering PC, online from SICAM MIC)
Navigation tree
Serves for the navigation to the individual input/output masks. By means of a click on the
symbols + or – and on the respective file symbol the desired dialog will be opened.
Dialog for the parameter input
Parameters and values, explanation texts, display of states, execution of operator inputs.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Online Dialog
The user interface online is structured equally like the offline dialog. Additional item:
Informatory line
Appears with change of parameters that require a startup of SICAM MIC.
3.7.2.4.1 Parameter Input
The user interface supports different ways of parameter input:
Input of a value
The value is written into the input field. There are no restrictions for the input field. With the
value transfer a plausibility check takes place using the allowable value range and the
maximum number of characters. An implausible value will not be transferred or if neces-
sary set to "0". The assignment of signal texts is limited to maximum 10 characters.
Selection of a value
The value can be selected from a pull down menu or the selection is done by clicking on a
check box.
The description of the setting values is in chapter 7, Parameter Setting Instruction.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.7.2.4.2 Startup Request
After the change of settings of configuration parameters these must be activated by means of
a startup of the target system. In this case the informatory line appears.
By way of clicking on the interactive part a startup is triggered.
However, arbitrary additional parameters can be changed, until all together are activated with
a startup.
The indication is maintained thereto also with change of the parameter setting menus. It dis-
appears only after the performance of a startup of the target system.
3.7.2.4.3 SICAM TOOLBOX II Interlocking
If the initial engineering has been performed with the SICAM TOOLBOX II, a static indication
appears in the header:

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
3.7.2.5 Exceptions with Engineering via SICAM TOOLBOX II
The following functions are not supported by SICAM MIC:
Load firmware
Data flow test
Message simulation
Service function online
ST emulation
Topology test
Diagnosis
Function diagram online test
3.7.2.6 Exceptions with Engineering via Web Browser
The parameter records in the SICAM TOOLBOX II and in the web browser are basically iden-
tical structured. However, for the engineering via web browser some simplifications exist,
hence the following functions are not supported or implemented in another manner:
Parameters of the OPM II Expert Mode are not shown

If a function can be activated only via an expert parameter, the belonging data points are
not shown as well.
Example: the function Breaker Tripping Suppression with Auto-Reclose Function for double-
point information items can be activated only via an expert parameter, therefore the be-
longing data points reclosing <…>… are not shown.
HW configuration basic system element (BSE)
The BSE is automatically configured as soon as a SIM card with the firmware CPC60 has
been installed.
Process technique basic system element (BSE)
The process-technical settings in the BSE (system functions) are not available:
Error message detailed diagnostics table
Error message sum diagnostics table
Communication control message
Protocol element return information message
Protocol element control message
Redundancy return information message
Redundancy control message
Special application output
Special application input
However, with usage of an application program, global system variables are supported to
access the contents of the sum diagnostics table (see A, Variables in the IL.
System technique peripheral element (PE)
After the configuration of the PE the I/O modules must be configured in the OPM II. With
the engineering via web browser the I/O modules are configured automatically.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Process technique peripheral element (PE)

In contrast to the OPM II no images are applied, for each I/O module a configuration page
and a setting page exist.
In the configuration page the usage of the I/Os is defined (according to the assignment in
the SICAM TOOLBOX II).
In the setting page the previously configured I/Os are parameterized. There appear only
the parameters relevant for the defined usage.
The following general data points are not available:
Revision
Control location
Process technique protocols
In contrast to the OPM II no images are applied, the process technique is provided as
spreadsheets (send detailed routing, receive detailed routing).
Loading firmware and selection of protocol elements
Protocol elements cannot be loaded. They are fixed integrated in the master control ele-
ment firmware.
Loading firmware and selection of peripheral elements
Peripheral elements cannot be loaded. They are fixed integrated in the master control el-
ement firmware.
Message simulation
The message simulation is not supported (inserting of arbitrary messages into the sys-
tem). However, there is the possibility of displaying current process values of the periphery
(binary information states, integrated totals, measured values) and to set process values
(commands, setpoint commands).
Data flow test
The data flow test is not supported (different log points, filters, etc.)
Revision interrogation
The current firmware revision of the basic system element is displayed in the header of the
user interface, the revisions of the additional system elements is not relevant.
Application program
A graphical function diagram (FUD) creation is not possible, only an instruction list (IL) with
ASCII format can be loaded into the target system.
Test of the application program
Offline simulation is not possible. The online test is limited to the state display or the forc-
ing of one selectable variable (used in the IL) for each test.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4 Engineering via SICAM TOOLBOX II
Contents
4.1 Telecontrol ..................................................................................................... 94

4.2 Automation ................................................................................................... 109

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.1 Telecontrol
Overview of the Tasks
Task Meaning
Presets Define user and rights
Initialization of the plant data Configure plant and automation unit
Import firmware Load firmware into the SICAM TOOLBOX II
HW configuration Selection of the installed system elements
Parameterization of the sys- Time management
tem technique Communication common
Protocol elements
Assignment of process signals to data points
Decentralized archive
Parameterization of the pro- Create images
cess technique Assign images to data points
Settings for configured process signals
Routing of send data and receive data
Bulk edit Creation of great amounts of values of the images
Transfer parameters Compile the set values
Import/Export Restore and backup of application data
Documentation Prepared spreadsheets for printing
Hardware (configuration, pin assignment)
Parameters
Load parameters Transfer parameters and function diagram to the target sys-
tem
Parameter comparison Compare settings between current project and target system
Note
Test and diagnostic functions online can only be performed via the web browser.
Firmware loading can be performed only via the tool FLASHmic.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Overview of the Essential Administrative Functions
Authorization
Presets
TOOLBOX II
Presets System
project technique customer
configure plant plant

plant system technique region
manage- AU
ment
plant
assemble technique station
building location
cabinet
board rack
plant
process technique range
customer
plant management
content in export
export/backup system technique start export
data distri- record ...
process technique
bution center system elements
import selection import file selection import file

data distri-
bution center
generate (csv file)

document HW selection AU services
documentation
configuration assembly
technical
documentation
preview spreadsheet
document system technique selection AU
parameters
print spreadsheet
Overview of the Fundamental Procedure for the Parameterization
customer
define customer ans process technical plant
process technical branch
plant (with wizard) number
configure plant
OPM II define customer system technical plant
process technical region
plant (with wizard) AU
configure AU basic system elements

with modules peripheral elements
OPM II
select AU/BSE
system functions set parameters
system technique
set telecontrol save
parameters periphery define images
OPM II process technique system data set parameters
save
automatically when
system technique
translate saving
parameters
OPM II target system user defines the
process technique SAT1703… moment
(select AU)
parameters to
select AU load parameters
target system

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.1.1 Presets
Before you begin with the engineering of SICAM MIC, several basic settings are to be carried
out for the work with the SICAM TOOLBOX II:
User and rights

User-specific settings
Password
Workplace-specific settings
Organization of the SICAM TOOLBOX II
Language
For the access to the SICAM TOOLBOX II a logon with username and password is required.
The parameterization with the SICAM TOOLBOX II happens exclusively offline. Only the
transfer of data (firmware, application data), as well as test and diagnosis are performed
online via a communication connection.
The globally valid configuration parameters in the SICAM TOOLBOX II are displayed and set
with the tool "TOOLBOX II Presets". They can - dependent on the access rights - be changed
at any optional time.
You find the details thereto in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter "TOOLBOX II
Presets" and chapter "Administration of TOOLBOX II".
4.1.1.1 Users and Rights
The following user types are predefined and can be selected:
Type admin
Type profi
Type standard
For each user type different rights are predefined.
As user type admin you can freely assign new user names (max. 8 characters). For each
user a special role (max. 20 characters) can be assigned.
For each role certain rights can be freely selected and assigned from a list. Depending on
which role a user has been assigned, he may control determined functions. An exception are
the unchangeable roles, that are reserved for the Siemens specialists for maintenance pur-
poses.
You find the details thereto in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter “TOOLBOX II
Presets”, section “User/Role Administration”.
Note
All operation functions of SICAM MIC described in this manual are generally applicable for the "Adminis-
trator" role available in the SICAM TOOLBOX II.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.1.1.2 Password
The entrance into the SICAM TOOLBOX II is protected for each user by means of an individ-
ual password.
The preset password is equal to the predefined user type.
Note
The preset password must be changed after the first logon.
4.1.1.3 Language
The languages Deutsch or English can be selected:
4.1.2 Entrance into the Project
4.1.2.1 Logon
With the initial start of a tool of the SICAM TOOLBOX II you must enter a user name and a
password. After that you are able to begin the parameterization.
A user change is possible with the tool “TOOLBOX II Presets” (menu Authorization |
Login ).
4.1.2.2 Logoff
A user logoff is possible with the tool “TOOLBOX II Presets” (menu Authorization |
Logout ). You can continue to operate tools that are still active, but the activation of tools re-
quires another login.
If all tools are quit without logout, the user will remain logged in unless a logout from the
Toolbox PC or Toolbox Server takes place.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.1.2.3 Change Password
As user type admin you can define a password for each newly added user.
Guidelines for the Assignment of Passwords

The password may consist of up to 8 characters
No differentiation between upper case and lower case
Special characters can be used
Empty password possible (logon to the project without password)
4.1.3 Plant Configuration
A plant is configured according to different perspectives:
Project technique
System technique
Process technique
The configuration data is in each case specifically parameterized for the different views.
With the initial creation of a plant you must enter the configuration data into the SICAM
TOOLBOX II with the tool "OPM II". The entry of the parameters is thereby supported by
"Wizards". The plant topology is determined based on the parameter setting of the configura-
tion data.
After the initialization, the administration of the plant configuration can be carried out with the
tool "Plant Management". With this tool the configuration data can be changed or deleted at
any time.
You find the details thereto in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter "Plant Manage-
ment".
4.1.4 Import Firmware
For the parameterization of a target system the system elements to be used must be
equipped, and the belonging firmwares must be present in the SICAM TOOLBOX II.
You can import the required firmwares – if not yet present – into the data base of the SICAM
TOOLBOX II with the tool “Master Data Update”. You find the corresponding files in Online
Support Products (see section 3.3, Loadable Firmwares).
You find the details thereto in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter "OPM II", section
"Master Data Update".
An additional option provides the tool "Live Update". You find the information thereto in the
SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter "Service Programs", section "Live Update".

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.1.5 Configuration and Settings for Telecontrol
The acquisition, parameter setting and documentation for the telecontrol function and its as-
sociated data points is enabled in the SICAM TOOLBOX II mainly with the help of the tool
“OPM II” (Object Orientated Process Data Manager).
The user’s guide of the OPM II can be found in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter
“OPM II”.
The description of the system-technical and process-technical settings can be found in the
manual SICAM RTUs Common Functions System and Basic System Elements, chapter
“Telecontrol”.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.1.5.1 Hardware Configuration
Before the parameter setting a target system must be configured with the required system el-
ements:
Master control element

Peripheral element
I/O modules
Note
The firmware codes of the corresponding system elements must exist in the target system.
You find an overview of the available system elements and I/O modules with the technical
specification in the SICAM MIC System Description, chapter “Mechanical Design”, section
“Architecture | I/O Modules”, as well as in section 7.4, Hardware Configuration.
The configuration takes place with the tool “OPM II” via the menu items Tools | System
technique and Tools | Library Overview . Optionally, the configuration is possible with
the tool “HW-FW Configuration”.
By dragging the system elements of the system SICAM MIC from the Library Overview onto
the respective target system in the system technique, the corresponding system elements are
added with default parameters.
With use of I/Os, the higher-level peripheral element (USIO60 or USIO61) must be configured
at first. After that you can drag I/O modules onto the peripheral element and assign signals to
the respective I/O module (system technique).
When deleting a system element or an I/O module, all the corresponding settings in the sys-
tem technique are rejected.
Note
The configuration in the "OPM II" must match the mechanically installed I/O modules.
If you remove an I/O module mechanically, you must delete it also in the "OPM II". If you do not adapt the
configuration in the "OPM II", the target system detects this I/O module as failed (error indication).
If you add an I/O module mechanically without adapting the configuration in the "OPM II", this has no
effects. In this case, the added I/O module is ignored.
Like all the system-technical parameters, a changed hardware configuration must be convert-
ed and transmitted to the target system to become effective (refer to 4.1.6, Transform Param-
eters and 4.1.9.1, Loading Engineering Data).
After change of the hardware configuration, always an automatic startup of the target system
is performed. Thereby the target system checks if the mechanically installed I/O modules
match the parameterization. If not, an error information is output (red ER-LED lights up).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.1.5.2 System-Technical Settings
The system-technical configuration of a target system resides in the window “System tech-
nique”. This can be opened via the menu Tools | System technique .
The parameter setting is carried out in the navigation tree, respectively below the selected
basic system element:
Common settings
Time management
Communication protocols
Network settings
Topology
Dataflow filter
Periphery
Decentral archiving
4.1.5.2.1 Communication
A protocol suitable for the existing application can be determined by selection via a pull-down
menu under the basic system element (<Basic system element> | Communication 101/104
| Protocol configuration (Ax)) and its parameterization.
4.1.5.2.2 Periphery
The peripheral functions are defined by means of configuring the peripheral element, the
I/O modules suitable for the present application, as well as their parameters.
Below the level of the Ax-P-Bus the configured peripheral element with the configurable signals
is displayed:
Hardware pins
Software data points
By means of the context menu of a hardware pin or software data point, selection Edit
image , you get directly to the process-technical settings of the respective signal.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.1.5.3 Process-Technical Settings
4.1.5.3.1 Levels
The process-technical plant can be structured in freely-definable hierarchy levels. The follow-
ing graphic shows an example:
You find the instruction to create levels in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter
“OPM II”, section “Levels”.
The process-technical settings of the system elements can be opened centrally via the menu
item Tools | Images .
4.1.5.3.2 Types
Types form the template for the structure of a process-technical plant. They serve for the sim-
plification with engineering of large quantities of objects, parameters and values.
Types of the following type categories can be defined below the levels:
User types
Link types
Info types
Parameter types
A type is defined respectively for objects, that have the same features (examples: feeder, cir-
cuit breaker, disconnector).
You find the instruction to define the different types in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help,
chapter “OPM II”, section “Types”.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.1.5.3.3 Images
Images are real objects of the plant with parameters and signals (examples: feeder north, cir-
cuit breaker Q00, disconnector Q10).
Typified images
Typified images can be created from the defined types, that means, each images is as-
signed to a type. The assigned type defines thereby the structure for the image. The struc-
ture defines which linktypes include a signal and which parameter includes a link. This
structure can be changed only in the type of the belonging image. All images that are as-
signed to that type, adopt automatically the structure change (inheritance). The same be-
havior applies for default input.
The usage of typified images is the more efficient, the more identic images are present.
Typeless images
Typeless images do not have a reference to the types, that means, no inheritance takes
place. Typeless images are also created by structural changes of a typified image (since
the image does not have the same structure as the type).
Typeless images are advantageous, if images are only uniquely existing.
Below typless images, typified images can be used (example: voltage level “20 kV“ is
typeless since it is only uniquely existing, all feeders thereunder are typified images).
Link images
In the link images the parameters of the single target systems can be set.
The signals of the libraries include as first link a so-called common link (LNK_ADR). There
reside parameters (example: longtext, LAN station...) that include “references” to other
links of the same signal or are source of “formulas”.
A reference causes that upon changes of an entry in the common link the change takes
place automatically in the link of the specific target system. Message address
CASDU(1,2), IOA(1,2,3) and TI are generated automatically with filling of the 1703 link ad-
dress (Lk_Reg, Lk_Komp, Lk_BSE, Lk_ZSE, Lk_DP) by means of formulas and refer-
ences and do not have to be entered.
You find the instruction for the creation of images in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help,
chapter "OPM II", section "Images".
Parameterization of the Process Signals and Assignment to the System Technique

The parameters for the technological processing of process signals reside in the navigation
tree below the link images:
Addressing
Signal preprocessing
Signal postprocessing
You find the description of the parameters in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter
"Parameter Documentation" as well as in section 7.5, Process Periphery.
You find the description of the technological processing of inputs and outputs of the process
periphery in the manual SICAM RTUs Common Functions Peripheral Elements According to
IEC 60870-5-101/104.
The assignment of a process signal to a hardware pin or software data point in the system
technique takes place by means of assignment (alternatively automatical or manual). You find
the instruction thereto in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter "Parameter Documen-
tation", section “Assign”.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.1.5.4 Decentral Archiving (DEAR)
The decentralized archive serves for the local storage of events of a substation, and - when-
ever necessary - for the transmission to the control system. By means of that, it is for instance
possible to recover the archive of a control system after a communication fault.
In the decentralized archive all the data points used in the substation can be acquired.
You can configure the archive in the system technique of the “OPM II” (parameter group De-
centralized archiving of the respective automation unit). In the images you can define
the process-technical settings of the data points to be acquired. During operation, these data
points are archived chronologically upon status change. This applies for all commands and bi-
nary information items of the send and receive direction.
You find the detailed information on the settings in the manual SICAM RTUs Common Func-
tions System and Basic System Elements, chapter “Telecontrol”, section “Decentralized Ar-
chiving”.
4.1.6 Transform Parameters
Before loading into the target system, the set parameters of the process-technical plant must
be transformed. This is performed w ith the tool “OPM II”.
Select thereto via the context menu of the automation unit (right mouse click) the menu item
Target systems | SICAM 1703 | Transform… .
System-technical parameters are automatically transformed when saved.
Further details can be found in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter "OPM II", sec-
tion "Transform and Load", "SICAM 1703".
4.1.7 Import, Export, Backup of Engineering Data
The tool “Data Distribution Center” enables the importing and exporting of parameters, as well
as the creation of backup files.
You find the details thereto in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter “Data Distribution
Center”.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.1.8 Documentation
With the tool “OPM II” you can generate and print the documentation of the engineering data:
Hardware configuration
Assembly technique
Interface to Elcad
Telecontrol function
System-technical configuration
Process-technical settings
You find the details thereto in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter “OPM II”, section
“System Technique”, section “Documentation”.
You can initiate the documentation of the system elements in the plant tree of the menu
System technique , via the context menu of the automation unit.
The output takes place as a table in a file (format .csv) or to a printer.
With the tool “HW-FW Configuration” you can assign the required assembly-technical infor-
mation to the system elements.
4.1.8.2 Assembly Technique
You can initiate the documentation of the assembly-technical configuration in the plant tree of
the menu System technique , via the context menus of the I/O modules.
The output takes place as a table with adjustable layout, optionally as preview on the screen
or to a printer.
The documentation extends over the HW pins of the respective I/O module and contains:
Slot and type of I/O module

System-technical address of each pins within the message
Process-technical address of each pins within the message
Common information of a pin (long text)
Assignment of the pins to a link image in the “OPM II”

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.1.8.3 Interface to ELCAD
For the coupling with the design tool ELCAD, it is possible to transfer images that are as-
signed to a system element via this defined interface.
The output takes place to a text file (format asc).
The generation of the file takes place via selection of the menu Destination systems |
SICAM 1703… | SICAM 1703 Transformer.
“Elcad”.
4.1.8.4 Telecontrol Function
4.1.8.4.1 System-Technical Configuration
You can initiate the documentation of the system-technical configuration in the menu
System technique , via the context menu of an automation unit or of a specific system el-
ement.
The output takes place as a spreadsheet, optionally as preview on the screen or to a printer.
4.1.8.4.2 Process-Technical Settings
You can initiate the documentation of the process-technical settings in the tree of the menu
Edit image , via the context menu of a selected hierarchical level.
The output takes place as a spreadsheet, optionally as preview on the screen or to a printer.
4.1.9 Commissioning and Test
For commissioning and test of the projected settings the following functions are available
(online):
Load engineering data

Parameter comparison
For these functions the engineering PC must be connected with the target system (see 3.6.1,
SICAM TOOLBOX II).
Note
The online test functions and diagnosis provided by the SICAM TOOLBOX II are not supported for
SICAM MIC. Online functions are only available via the web browser.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.1.9.1 Loading Engineering Data
The loading of the parameters of a process-technical plant from the PC into the target system
takes place with the tool “OPM II” out of the System Technique.
Parameter | Loading .
For the loading of the parameters there are different variants available:
Load intelligent
only the changed parameters are loaded into the target system
as a result shorter loading times can be achieved
can be applied locally or remotely
Load unconditional
all parameters are loaded into the target system
after the unconditional loading of the parameters an automatic startup of the target sys-
tem is performed
can be applied locally or remotely
Initialize
all parameters are deleted in the target system, and all parameters newly transferred
is used for the first loading of an automation unit or of a basic system element
can be applied only with the locally connected automation unit
Caution
During a loading operation, the switching off of the system is to be absolutely avoided, since the data on
the SIM card could be destroyed as a result.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
With loading parameters, all settings that have been performed in the SICAM TOOLBOX II are
saved jointly on the SIM card of the target system:
Configuration parameters
System-technical parameters
Process-technical parameters (if they have been transformed previously)
Application program (if code has been generated previously)
“Transform and load | SICAM 1703”.
4.1.9.2 Parameter Comparison
With the tool “OPM II” you can check whether the parameter record in the target system is
current.
Parameter | Comparison ).
For each selected automation unit appears the indication whether the parameters are current
or not current.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.2 Automation
For the implementation of freely definable open-/closed-loop control functions you can create
optionally an application program as function diagram.
Overview of the Tasks
Task Meaning
Configure external signals Create images for spontaneous and periodical data points
Create function diagram Edit the application program
Simulate function diagram Offline test of the application program
Generate program code Compile application program
Load program code Transfer application program into the target system
Perform startup Initialize application program in the target system
Documentation Prepare application program for printing
Overview of the fundamental procedure for the programming of SICAM MIC
define images for …

configure spontaneous messages
external signals periodical data points
OPM II from periphery
translate CAEx plus: variable user defines the

parameters import/code generation moment
OPM II
edit function use of process technical

create signal list signals from OPM II
chart CAEx
plus
Offline simulation
simulate (test of function chart
select resource logic without target
function chart CAEx
system)
plus
generate code select resource code generation

CAEx
plus
load code select AU load parameters

OPM II

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.2.1 Creating an Application Program as Function Diagram (FUD)
For the creation of a Function Diagram the SICAM TOOLBOX II, tool "CAEx plus" is required.
4.2.1.1 Restrictions for the Creation of a Function Diagram
Blocks and data types

In the type instance and in the application blocks of the AU library, only blocks and data
types supported by SICAM MIC can be dragged and dropped into. For not supported
blocks and data types appears a one-way sign.
For an easy operability a SICAM MIC library exists within the project, which contains all
the compatible blocks for SICAM MIC.
Signals from the signal list
From the signal list only signal types supported by SICAM MIC can be dragged and
dropped into the type instance. For not supported signal types (for instance TI 38 – protec-
tion event) a one-way sign appears. The check is performed via the data type of the sig-
nal.
Also the system data point from the signal list can not be dragged and dropped into the
type instance.
System data points
Are available as global variables in the global variable object "System info" in the resource.
These global variables can be dragged and dropped into the FUD.
Type identifications
Since the type identifications supported by SICAM MIC are restricted, a check is per-
formed during the creation of the FUD. Not supported messages are not enabled to be
dragged and dropped into the FUD.
The message with the type identification 101 (counter interrogation) is not supported by
the FUD.
Retain
If messages or inputs/outputs of blocks are set to "retain" in the FUD, then a correspond-
ing warning is output upon the code generation.
CASDU
All the information which is produced in SICAM MIC has the same CASDU in the message
address. Thereby it is necessary that for messages which originate in the FUD the same
CASDU is assigned in the CAEx plus link.
With "wrong" setting in the "OPM II" the IL code generaration aborts with a corresponding
error information.
For input messages in the FUD an arbitrary message address can be assigned.
Status bit "Class 1"
This is not supported by the FUD (priority management of the communication function).
However, special variable names can be used to create a “CLASS 1” message and to trig-
ger thereby a dial-up connection.
Status bit "R" (redundancy)
This can be dragged and dropped into the FUD, however, it will never be set by the target
system. Using the redundancy bit a warning will be output upon code generation.
Additional attributes
These are not supported by SICAM MIC. Upon code generation these attributes are not
taken account of, and neither a warning nor an error will be output.
You find further information in the manual SICAM RTUs Common Functions System and
Basic System Elements, chapter “Automation”, section “Restricted Open-/Closed-Loop Con-
trol Function”.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.2.1.2 Configuring External Signals
The I/O's are integrated into the Function Diagram via the Signal List. Dependent from the
fact, whether the target system is engineered via the SICAM TOOLBOX II or via the web
browser, the Signal List can be alternatively
generated with the tool "OPM II"

imported from a local parameterization (refer thereto section 5.1.3.7, Data Point Import
and Export)
The signals of the process-technical plant can be used by "CAEx plus" after the transfor-
mation (refer to section 4.1.6, Transform Parameters). The structure of the project tree auto-
matically adapts to the structure from the "OPM II".
An introduction how to create a project can be found in the
SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter "Tutorials", section "CAEx plus"

CAEx plus Online Help, chapter "First Steps" and chapter "Additional Products", section
"Signal List (Optional)", as well as in the Online Help of "CAEx plus"
4.2.1.3 Create Function Diagram
The tool "CAEx plus" provides various editors and standard libraries for the creation of the
open-/closed-loop control functions.
The process-technical functions of a plant are created with the Function Diagram editor (FBD-
Editor). A Function Diagram is thereby created by the interconnection of
predefined functions and function blocks (SICAM MIC library)

functions and function blocks defined by the user
The exact description of the editor is included in the CAEx plus Online Help, chapter "Editors".
Additional information can be found in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter “Tutori-
als”, section “CAEx plus”.
You find the most important characteristic values (limits) for the creation of the open-/closed-
loop control function in the SICAM MIC System Description, chapter “Technical Specifications
of the Modules”, section “Master Control Modules”.
You find the technical details for the processing of the open-/closed-loop control function and
its partial functions in the manual SICAM RTUs Common Functions System and Basic System
Elements, chapter “Automation”, section “Restricted Open-/Closed-Loop Control Function”,
“Application Program”,”Function Diagram”.
Note
Optionally to the creation of a function diagram, an instruction list (IL) with ASCII format can be imported in
“CAEx plus” (tool “OPM II”, context menu of the CPU, Instruction list | Import from file ).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Function Diagram (exemplary logic)
4.2.1.4 Generate Program Code
Before the loading of the open-/closed-loop control function into the target system, the program
code must be generated.
The code generation can be started via the CAEx plus Transformer or from "CAEx plus" via
the context menu of the basic system element (resource).
Start of the Program Code Generation

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The function diagram is now translated and checked by a compiler. Simultaneously the pro-
gram code is created as instruction list (IL) in the folder “Specification”.
Via the menu Tools | Error-state viewer you can activate the notification display of the
code generation. There are recorded common notifications (as for instance information about
the occupied storage space for code and variables), as well as detected errors in detail.
Error State of the Compiler
The exact description of this tools is included in the CAEx plus Online Help, chapter "Target-
System Connection", section "Functions for Target-System Connection", section "Code Gen-
eration".
The code generation can be started independently from "CAEx plus" with the tool "OPM II"
through selection of the function Destination systems | CAEx plus… | signal
list/generate code. Thereby a signal list is created for the processing of the parameterized
signals in the open-/closed loop control function and read into "CAEx plus".
Further details can be found in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter "OPM II", sec-
tion "Transform and Load", "CAEx plus".

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.2.2 Documentation
4.2.2.1 Cross Reference List
With the tool “CAEx plus” a cross reference list over the project hierarchy can be generated,
displayed on the screen, or printed.
The cross reference list extends alternatively over a
Basic system element

Program organization unit
It is executed via the respective context menu Cross-references .
You find the details thereto in the CAEx plus Online Help, chapter “Basics”, section “Default
Operating Elements”, section “Commands of the Pop-Up Menus”.
4.2.2.2 Open-/Closed-Loop Control Function
In the project hierarchy of the tool "CAEx plus", by selecting one of each level, by means of
pop-up menu the function Print can be executed. The print operation is started on the default
printer of the PC.
You find the details thereto in the CAEx plus Online Help, chapter “Basics”, section “Default
Operating Elements”, section “Commands of the Pop-Up Menus”, section “Print in Project
Management”.
Additional information can be found in the CAEx plus Online Help, chapter "Basics", section
"Default Properties" as well as chapter "Lists and References", section "Designing Printouts
with DXF".
Further extensive possibilities for the documentation are provided by the optional function
Document Management (Additional product for "CAEx plus").
The details thereto can be found in the CAEx plus Online Help, chapter "Additional Products",
section "Documents Management (Optional)".

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.2.3.1 Load Application Program Code
To load the compiled program code into the target system, the engineering PC must be con-
nected with the target system (see section 3.6.1, SICAM TOOLBOX II).
The loading of the application program code into the target system takes place jointly with the
set parameters in the System Technique of the "OPM II".
Select thereto via the context menu of the respective automation (right mouse click) the menu
item Parameter | loading ). For further detail refer to section 4.1.9.1, Loading Engineering
Data.
All the open-/closed-loop control functions that have been performed in "CAEx plus", are
thereby stored on the SIM card in the master control element.
Alternatively the compiled Instruction List can be exported and loaded into SICAM MIC via the
web browser (refer to section 5.2.2.3.2, Save and Load PLC Code).
Note
The import of an Instruction List created by means of a text editor to "CAEx plus" is not possible.
The loading of the application program code leads to an operational interruption. After termi-
nation of the loading procedure, a startup of the target system is required.
The technical description thereto can be found in the manual SICAM RTUs Common Func-
tions System and Basic System Elements, chapter "Automation", section "Loading of Applica-
tion Program (Reload)".
The operating instructions can be found in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help, chapter
"OPM II”, section “Transform and Load | SICAM 1703".
Caution
During a loading operation, the switching off of the master control element is to be absolutely avoided,
since the data on the SIM card could be destroyed as a result.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
4.2.3.2 Test Functions
4.2.3.2.1 Simulate Function Diagram Offline
A function diagram can be tested in "CAEx plus" with the function "Offline Simulation".
This function can be called via the context menu of the CPU, program instance or type in-
stance (right mouse button). You can find the details thereto in the CAEx plus Online Help,
chapter "Additional Products", section "Offline Simulation".
Note
The function "Online Test" of the tool "CAEx plus" is not available for SICAM MIC.
An online simulation is only available via web browser (refer to 5.2.2.4, Test Functions).
4.2.3.2.2 Oscilloscope
Oscilloscope functions serve for the chronological arranged representation of analog values
and binary values during the "Offline Simulation" of the function diagram.
You find the details thereto in the CAEx plus Online Help, chapter "Additional Products", sec-
tion "Logic Analysis with Oscilloscope functions".
CAEx plus Oscilloscope (Example)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5 Engineering via Web Browser
Contents
5.1 Telecontrol ................................................................................................... 118

5.2 Automation ................................................................................................... 176

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Engineering via Web Browser
5.1 Telecontrol
5.1.1 Presets
5.1.1.1 Users and Rights
Description Administrator Guest

Local Remote Offline Local Remote Offline
Initial page x x x x x x
*)
System settings Administrator x x x - - -
change password
Guest x x *) x - - -
change password
Communication Parameterization x x *) x - - -
Display x x x x x x
*)
Periphery Parameterization x x x - - -
Display x x x x x x
*)
save/load x x - - - -
Process Display x x - x x -
*)
Control x x - - - -
HW Configuration - - x - - -
Diagnosis x x - x x -
*)
Only if enabled by the local administrator with parameter "remote control via web" (safety rele-
vant), see section 5.1.5.1, System Setting
Difference between Access Location LOCAL and REMOTE

The difference between the access location depends on the communication link between PC
and SICAM MIC.
Access Location Meaning/Note

Local link via serial interface (without modem) or via Ethernet
Remote link via modem, operation possibilities are limited sometimes (see above), the
parameter remote control via web is not visible.
Note
All operation and test functions of SICAM MIC described within this manual are generally valid for the
unrestricted access right (Administrator LOCAL and Administrator OFFLINE).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.1.2 Password
Every project can be protected by means of a password. The default password is sat and
should be absolutely changed after the initial logon.
The allocation of the password is possible at any time within the system settings, the storage
takes place jointly with the parameters of the open project
Online: on the webserver of the respective target system
Offline: within the respective parameter file
For the allocation of a password pay attention to the following guidelines:
A passwort may consist of maximum 8 characters (additional characters are cut)

Case sensitive
Special signs are allowed
Note
In case of problems with passwords, please contact the Siemens Support Center.
5.1.2 Logon and Logoff
For the engineering of SICAM MIC you must select the language and the user type in the lo-
gon mask of the user interface. After input of the correct password and click on Logon you
are presented with the start mask of a project. Working online, thereby a session with the
master control element (webserver) is opened.
The users obtain different access rights.
Language User Access right

Deutsch Administrator read and write
Guest Read
English Administrator read and write
Guest Read
To quit a project properly, you must click on the button Logout in the start mask.
In order that in case of an unwanted abort of a project (upon failure of the communication link,
unintended close of the web browser, etc.) the previous opened session will be terminated,
the firmware of the master control element contains two safety mechanisms:
Termination of the session by timeout

If there is no access to the webserver within 15 minutes, the session will be terminated au-
tomatically. For a new access a new logon is required.
Termination of the session by a new logon
With a logon to the webserver a still opened session will be terminated immediately.
Caution
If several users are allowed to access the same master control element, then the last one who is logging
on with the correct password gets the access right. The session of the predecessor will be terminated.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.3 Offline Engineering
With offline engineering there is no physical connection to the target system.
Overview of the Functions with Offline Engineering

Component Functions Meaning/Note
WEBmic Create new project Edit a new file which contains the plant data "custom-
(Dialog via er", "plant", "station name" in its name, and start of
pop-up menu) the web browser (offline)
Open existing project Open existing parameter file and start of the web
browser (offline)
Close project Close current parameter file
Duplicate project Copy already existing parameter file and/or write this
on the SIM card; optionally write application program
on SIM card 1)
Data point import/export Save data points of a project as file or load from a file
Read/write parameters Read parameters from SIM card and write into file or
of/to SIM card vice versa 1)
Read/write PLC of/to SIM Read application program from SIM card and write
card into file or vice versa 1)
Read/write complete SIM Create complete data image 1)
card
Erase complete SIM card Erases all the user data from SIM card 1)
Set Ethernet IP address Write IP address online into the target system (with-
out web browser); the MAC address of the target
system must be known
SIM card reader settings Lists the settings of the SIM card read/write device 1)
Parameters Edit settings for system, time, communication protocol
and periphery (save in a local file or SIM card)
HW documentation Input/output/terminal assignment of the configured
modules, signal assignment of communication cables
Decentralized Archive Configure decentralized archive, define data points of
the I/O modules and of the application program (via
web browser)
HW configuration Configure current equipment (master control module
and I/O Modules)
ASCII editor 2) Instruction list Edit file that contains the application program
1)
only with installed SIM_card_reader
2)
for instance Microsoft Notepad ®

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The following graphic shows the offline parameter setting of SICAM MIC as flow chart.
task: create a new open an

load a project save a project
project existing project
start WEBmic
write parameters read parameters

new project open project
to SIM card from SIM card
SIM File SIM File
plant data filename filename source filename target
OK OK OK OK
project is written project is written

webbrowser (starts automatically) to the SIM card to the file
log on
edit project
apply parameters
project project
to SIM to file
project is written project is written

to the SIM card to the file
With the offline tool WEBmic the configuration of the parameters can be carried out without the
target system. The parameters are written in a file or directly to the SIM card in the read-/write
device.
Note
Here only those steps are described that are relevant for the parameter setting offline. All further steps are
described in section 5.1.5, Engineering Offline or Online.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.3.1 Creating a New Project
Before you can begin with the parameter setting you must first create a project, in which the
data for your system are managed. Proceed as follows:
Start the program WEBmic.exe with a double click.
The WEBmic.splash screen is opened.
Click OK to close the splash screen.
The WEBmic symbol appears in the notification area of the taskbar.
Click with the right mouse button on the WEBmic symbol to open the WEBmic context menu.
If needed change the language and open the

context menu anew.
After that click on the item New project ..

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The window for the definition of the file storage location is opened.
Under DESTINATION you can now select whether you wish to write the project data directly to
the SIM card in the connected read/write device or to a file, or both in parallel.
If there is no chipcard reader/writer installed the menu positions that refer to the SIM card are
disabled (they appear as engraved text).
In the CUSTOMER INFORMATION the name of the customer, the plant and the station are entered.
The filename for the project data is automatically created from these entries.
Click on OK to create the project. Thereby, depending on the selection, either a project-
specific parameter file is generated or the SIM card is written. Both can also be performed in
parallel. The file is given a name that is composed from the plant data and the type identifica-
tion mic.
If SIM CARD is marked, but no read/write device is installed or connected, the information
Can't write to SIM Card appears.
Save Parameters
If the web browser has been started from a file via Open project or New project, then the
parameter record is written to the file with each transfer of a parameter.
If the web browser has been started from a SIM card via Open project or New project, then
the parameter record is written to the SIM card with each transfer of a parameter.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.3.2 Starting the User Interface Offline
The web browser is automatically started after the creation of the project. The initial mask of
the user interface is opened.
After selecting the user and entering the password (refer to section 5.1.1, Presets) you can
now begin with the parameter setting.
As a basis for the parameterization of the peripherals, first the configuration of SICAM MIC
must be parameterized offline.
After you have logged on, click in the menu tree on HW Configuration. In the configuration
mask you can select the master control module and the available I/O modules. A SICAM MIC
supports max. 8 I/O modules.
An overview of the available master control units and I/O modules and their description can be
found in the section 7.4, Hardware Configuration (please consider also the "Configuration
Rules").

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
After selection of the modules save the settings with a mouse click on the button Apply . De-
pending on the selection, the settings are stored on the SIM card or in the file.
Note
A manual configuration of I/O modules is only possible offline. The configured HW configuration is com-
pared with the configuration currently existing with a startup of SICAM MIC. If no concurrence exists, an
error message is generated.
Reset all Parameters

Data points of I/O modules already configured can be reset to their default values by removing
the corresponding module in the configuration, clicking the button Apply, and then reconfigur-
ing the module. The associated data points are then present with their default values.
5.1.3.4 Save and Load Parameters
Offline, for these functions a SIM card read-/write device installed on the engineering PC is
necessary. In this case the web browser is not required.
5.1.3.4.1 Write Parameters to SIM Card
This function is used for transferring the parameters from a file on PC to the SIM card.
To do this, click in the WEBmic pop-up menu on Write parameters to SIM Card. A browse
window appears for selecting the source path and the source file. The fixed default file type is
mic.Only this file type can be written to the SIM card.
Then click on Open in order to write the parameters from the selected file to the SIM card.
The write operation takes a few seconds. Take notice of the Active-LED on the read-/write de-
vice, if present.
5.1.3.4.2 Read Parameters from SIM Card
This function is used for transferring the parameters from the SIM card to a file, for example in
order to duplicate the corresponding project.
To do this, click in the WEBmic pop-up menu on Read parameters from SIM Card. The
read operation is started and takes a few seconds (Observe Active-LED on the read-/write de-
vice). A browse window appears for selecting the destination path and the destination file. The
filename suggested is produced from the read-out plant data (C USTOMER, PLANT and STATION
NAME). The filename can also be renamed. The fixed default file type is mic.
Then click on Save in order to store the parameters from the SIM card in the selected file.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.3.5 Open Project
To edit an existing project, in the WEBmic pop-up menu click on Open project. In the dialog
window you can select whether wish to work with a file or on a SIM card. There is a browse
function available for selecting a file.
After the selection click on OK .
The web browser is started automatically, the project is opened and the initial mask of the us-
er interface offline is loaded.
After successfully logging on, now the telecontrol parameters can be read and changed.
Changes are stored with transfer to the file or to the SIM card respectively. On exiting the pro-
ject, WEBmic asks whether it should also be stored on a SIM card. With this, you have the
possibility of creating a SIM card and a consistent backup file in one operation.
Project with old Revision Level

If the project has been edited with an older revision level of WEBmic, a hint indication appears
with the question, if the parameter setting shall be converted to the current revision level.
If you click No , the project will not be opened.
With the selection Yes a converting of the parameterization takes placee, the web browser is
started automatically, the project is opened and the initial mask of the user interface offline is
loaded.
Note
A converting can not be undone. A converted project is not downward compatible, it means that it can not
be opened by WEBmic with a lower revision level.
5.1.3.6 Close Project
After the editing of a project offline, the project should be closed. To do this, in the WEBmic
pop-up menu click on Close project.
As soon as you open a further project or a new one the current project is automatically closed.
With a WEBmic session always only one project can be open.
Whether a project is still open can be detected in the pop-up menu as long as the menu item
Close project can be activated.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.3.7 Data Point Import and Export
So that the configuration of the data points can be managed externally, it can be imported into
a project or exported from a project as a file. The advantage is for instance, that the configura-
tion in the system management only needs to be performed once.
Note
A configuration of data points created with the "OPM II" can be imported with WEBmic. Reversely a config-
uration created with WEBmic can be imported with the "OPM II".
The function can only be executed starting from an open project.
The format of the import or export file is csv (comma separated value), that means, it concerns
a table that can be opened and worked on both with an ASCII text editor and Microsoft Excel®.
5.1.3.7.1 Data Point Import
The table must contain the following headings in the first row, in the text editor view the single
columns must be separated with ";":
MICDP (data point address)

MICTEXT (short text)
TI (type identification)
CASDU1
CASDU2
IOA1
IOA2
IOA3
Only that data points are handled which belong to the CASDU1 and CASDU2 of the corre-
sponding substation. Therefor the table may contain also not belonging data points, as for in-
stance from all substations of the plant.
To perform an import, click in the WEBmic pop-up menu on Data point import (CSV file ->
SICAM MIC). A browse window appears for selecting the source file. The file must be a text
file of the type csv.
Remove Single Data Points

If the type identification of an entry is 0 or –1, the corresponding data point (DP) in
SICAM MIC will be removed and set to "not used". The same applies also if
IOA1/IOA2/IOA3=0/0/0.
After selecting the text file with the parameters to be imported WEBmic asks whether data
points that do not exist in the text file should be deleted in SICAM MIC. You can thereby de-
cide whether you wish to add only new parameters with the help of the table, or whether ex-
actly the configuration from the table is to be stored in the opened project.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Acknowledge the message box with Yes or with No . After completed import a message box
appears which displays the number of imported data points.
So that the imported data points are applied in the opened project, the display on the user in-
terface (web browser) must be updated. You achieve this either with the Update function of
the Web browser or with repeated selection of the Input-/Output mask.
Note
The updated project is only stored by clicking the button Apply in any optional user mask. If the project is
closed without an update having taken place, then the imported data are lost.
5.1.3.7.2 Data Point Export
The export file contains – in contrast to the import file – the additional column
MICSRC (module type, source of the data point)
If the project contains an application program, all the data points programmed in the optional
Instruction List (IL) can be exported together with the data points configured for the
telecontrol.
To perform an export, click in the WEBmic pop-up menu on Data point export (SICAM MIC
-> CSV file). Now a message box appears with the question whether the export should be
performed with the data points used in the IL.
Acknowledge the message box with Yes then a browse window appears for selecting the IL-
file. After completed selection, confirm with Open .
Then a browse window appears for selecting the destination file for the data points to be ex-
ported. Specify a filename and path. The default file type is set to csv.
Click on Save to write the text file.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.3.8 Duplication of a Project
If more than one SICAM MIC is employed in a plant with the same or similar parameters, the
possibility exists, with the help of WEBmic - based on a project already completely parameter-
ized - to produce the required number of copies.
Since in each case the copied projects can be written directly to a SIM card, for the commis-
sioning of additional SICAM MIC no PC is required. Prerequisite is, that the configured hard-
ware corresponds to the configuration.
The dialog for the duplication is started in the WEBmic pop-up menu by means of Duplicate
project.
Selection of Source and Target

Select the source (parameter file, file type mic) in the dialog window under PAR using the
Browse function.
Select the target for the copy(s) by clicking on the check box for SIM CARD or for FILE. Both
media can be written to simultaneously.
If the check box SIM CARD is ticked and no SIM card is present, then the error message Not
a valid I2C SIM Card! appears
When working with SIM cards, besides the parameters an optionally available application pro-
gram can also be duplicated at the same time. To do this, select the source (IL, file type plc)
under PLC. In this way more than one SICAM MIC can each be supplied with parameters and
user-program code at the same time in one operation.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Insert Rows
The corresponding number of rows must be inserted in the table depending on how many
copies are to be created.
Mark the 1st row or click in a field in this row. Now click with the right mouse button at any op-
tional place in the table. The pop-up menu for editing the rows and values opens. It can be se-
lected between two menu items:
Insert row
Inserts 1 row before the marked row.
Insert rows
By means of an entry a freely definable number of rows (value between 1 and 1000) is in-
serted before the marked row.
Duplication of Basis Parameters

By clicking on the check box for FILENAME SAME AS STATION NAME the filename for the file(s) to
be created is automatically derived from the station name.
By clicking on the check box for ETHERNET IP ADDRESSE SAME AS SOURCE the IP-addresses for
the copied projects are automatically set the same as the IP-address of the source project. As
a result, in certain cases a simplified postprocessing of these parameters can be achieved.
The basis parameters for the unambiguous identification of a station (a project) can be edited
in tabular form:
Station name
CASDU1
CASDU2
Link address
Ethernet IP address
These values can be entered manually or generated automatically. Automatically generated

values can be postprocessed manually.
Mark the column whose values are to be duplicated, or even the entire table. Now click with
the right mouse button at any optional place in the table. The pop-up menu for editing the
rows and values opens. It can be selected between two menu items:
Fill with first value

Copies the value of the 1st row to all subsequent rows.
Increment from first value
The rows of the marked columns are written in each case ascending plus 1 from the value
of the previous row.
If the values from the first row have been retained, then the filename at least must be unam-
biguous. Otherwise always only one file can be written.
All parameters of a project can be changed later with the user interface.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Creation of Project Duplicates

After all rows are filled with the basis parameters the copies can be generated. The initiation is
carried out manually and can take place in two different ways:
Clicking the button Selected >>

The projects listed in tabular form are created selectively by marking the row number(s).
Clicking the button All >>
All projects listed in tabular form are created.
A copy is only then created if all parameters are entered. After the generation procedure to
file, a message box confirms how many parameter files have been successfully generated.
For the generation procedure to SIM card, the corresponding number of SIM cards must be
available. WEBmic writes each copy to a SIM card and then asks you to insert a new SIM card
in the read-/write device. This procedure repeats until all copies have been written.
After the generation, close the dialog by clicking on the button Close .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.4 Online Engineering
With online engineering the target system is connected with the engineering PC and switched
on. In the master control module of the target system a SIM card must be inserted.
Overview of the Functions with Online Engineering
Component Function Meaning/Remark

*)
FLASHmic Firmware update Transfer of firmware into SICAM MIC
Webserver Parameters Edit settings for system, time, communication protocol
(dialog via web and periphery
browser) Save/load parameters Transfer parameters from SICAM MIC to PC and vice
versa
Process visualization Status of the inputs/outputs (for each configured
I/O module)
Simulate outputs Assign values to outputs for test and service purpose
Event list Chronological display of the occurred events
System diagnosis Show generated messages from self monitoring
HW documentation Terminal assignment of configured modules
Save/load PLC code Transfer of Instruction List from SICAM MIC to PC
and vice versa
Recompile PLC code Compile Instruction List on SIM card (SICAM MIC)
Erase PLC code Erase Instruction List from SIM card (SICAM MIC)
Enable/disable PLC Active after startup only, all internal and external
program execution signals will be set to default value
PLC diagnosis Used cycle time and memory
Start/stop PLC Start/stop the execution of the application program;
stop: current states of internal and external signals
remain "frozen"
Read/write variable Status display or simulation of a selected variable
Initiate Startup Reset system with subsequent startup
*)
contains the firmware CPC60 (current revision)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Online parameter setting
task: create a new open an

load a project save a project
project existing project
Ethernet serial
set up modem
start WEBmic
connection
set Ethernet IP
address (CP6040)
OK
start webbrowser manually

IP address (serial: 172.16.0.1)
log on
load parameters save parameters

edit project (upload) (download)
apply parameters filename source filename target
project is written project is written project is written

to the SIM card to the SIM card to the file
Via the integrated webserver the configuration of the parameters can be performed directly in
SICAM MIC. In this case the parameters are written directly on the SIM card inside the target
system.
Prerequisite is an existing communication link between the engineering PC and SICAM MIC.
Note
Here only those steps are described that are relevant for the parameter setting online. All further steps are
described in section 5.1.5, Engineering Offline or Online.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.4.1 Starting the User Interface Online
Start the web browser of your PC, enter the previously parameterized IP address of
SICAM MIC in the command line (example: http://172.29.2.226) and transfer it.
The initial mask of the user interface is opened online.
After selecting the user and entering the password (see section 5.1.1, Presets) you can now
begin with the parameter setting.
When you are logged on, the start mask appears with the menu tree for navigating to the indi-
vidual parameter-setting functions.
Online all telecontrol parameters can be set in the same manner as offline. The only exception
is the configuration of the I/O modules.
5.1.4.2 Automatic Hardware Configuration
With a startup SICAM MIC learns the actually existing configuration of the modules. If a con-
figuration is not yet set on the SIM card, then the modules are automatically transferred in the
correct order in the menu tree. The same is valid when I/O modules are added (attached to an
already set configuration). The parameters of newly detected modules are assigned with their
default values.
After the exchange of a module with a module of the same type the originally configured pa-
rameters are retained. If in contrast to the set configuration, I/O modules are removed or their
order changed, then an error is signaled and the red ER-LED activated.
Reset all Parameters to Default Values

After the resetting of the parameters a startup is executed automatically, and the current con-
figuration of the modules is transferred to the dynamic menu tree.
For further details, see section 5.1.5.1, System Settings, Reset all Parameters.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.4.3 Save and Load Parameters
The telecontrol parameters stored in SICAM MIC can be saved on a data medium, or read in
from a data medium.
By clicking on Upload/Download in the menu tree the mask for parameter management
opens.
5.1.4.3.1 Download Parameters
This function is used for transferring the parameters from SICAM MIC to a file (Download), for
example in order to duplicate the corresponding project.
The parameters can be transferred to a file as follows:
Click with the right mouse button on DOWNLOAD PARAMETER (RIGHT CLICK, SAVE TARGET AS). A
browse window opens for specifying the destination file and the destination path.
The default filename is produced from the 3 names for customer, plant and station. The file-
name can be renamed, the suggested type identification mic should be retained for the access
to the file by WEBmic.
After confirming with OK the parameter record is read from the SIM card of SICAM MIC and
stored in the set file.
5.1.4.3.2 Upload Parameters
A parameter record stored in a file can be loaded into SICAM MIC (Upload). The file can have
been created previously with the function download parameters or by creating a new pro-
ject with WEBmic. As with Save, the file type mic should be used.
The parameters can be transferred to SICAM MIC as follows:
Enter the name of the source path and the source file either directly in the input line or select
these with the search function.
With a mouse click on the button Browse… a window opens, in which the source can be lo-
cated.
With a mouse click on the button Open the path and filename are transferred.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
To load the parameters click on the button Upload .
The parameter record is now written to the SIM card of SICAM MIC. However, before it is
checked, if the parameters are valid.
If the parameters are not valid, an error information will be displayed.
Note
For the transmission over Ethernet it is recommended to deactivate the settings for HTTP 1.1 on your PC
(Control panel | Internet options | Advanced). Otherwise the possibility exists, that the transferred
ASCII file of SICAM MIC can not be interpreted.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5 Engineering Offline or Online
Regardless of whether you enter into a project offline or online, you can set all telecontrol pa-
rameters
System settings
Time settings
Communication
Periphery
and configure the decentralized archive (DEAR).
5.1.5.1 System Settings
By clicking in the menu tree on System settings the mask for setting the system parameters
is opened.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Changed parameters are stored on the SIM card or in the file by clicking the button Apply .
The setting of the compatibility mode is only active online after a startup.
Note
Certain parameters are only active after change and application with a subsequent startup of SICAM MIC
(see section 5.1.6.2, Startup Request due to Parameter Modification).
The details relating to the parameters are described in section 7.1, System Settings.
5.1.5.1.1 Station Address and Plant Data
Common Address of ASDU

Enter an unambigous station address (CASDU1 and CASDU2). Both addresses together pro-
duce automatically the CASDU upon transfer. An inadmissible value is set to a value between
0 and 255.
Plant Data
The initial set plant data (customer, plant, station name) can be changed at any time. The
storage takes place upon transfer. After refreshing of the user interface the station name will
be displayed in the header. The filename which is put together from the original customer in-
formation remains unaffected.
5.1.5.1.2 IP Configuration
IP addresses serve for the communication between engineering PC and SICAM MIC (refer to
3.7.2.3, Define IP Addresses).
Note
The IP settings are dependent on the configuration and the transmission media used in the network. For
setting these values please contact your network administrator.
Parameterization via a TCP/IP Serial Link

The default addresses need not to be changed since they are used temporarily for the param-
eter setting of SICAM MIC.
The own IP address will be assigned to the SICAM MIC webserver, the remote IP Ad-
dress will be assigned to the engineering PC, if that is configured for obtaining the IP address
automatically. For this, check the network settings of your PC under Settings | Network and
Dial-up Connections | Local Area Connection | Properties | Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) | Properties (path indication is depending on the different operating systems).
For further details refer to section 3.7.2.3.1, Point-to-Point Connection via Serial Interface.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Parameterization via a Ethernet TCP/IP Link

The addresses for the Ethernet interface are set by default and must be changed on the sub-
net of SICAM MIC, if needed:
For a point-to-point link an arbitrary IP address can be assigned to a SICAM MIC. The ini-
tial parameter setting can be done by selection of the default IP address 172.16.0.3, or
with the function "write Ethernet IP address" of WEBmic. The webserver assignes an IP
address automatically to the engineering PC, if this is configured for the automatic takeo-
ver of an IP address.
For further details refer to section 3.7.2.3.2, Point-to-Point Connection via Ethernet Inter-
face.
For a network link the addresses are to be set and administrated corresponding to your
plant configuration. The initial setting can be done by selection of the default IP address
172.16.0.3, unless SICAM MIC is located in another subnet.
For further details refer to section 3.7.2.3.3, LAN/WAN Connection via Ethernet Interface.
Note
The IP address can also be changed via the user interface. If SICAM MIC can no longer respond with the
new address from the web browser, then the IP address can only be corrected again online with the help
of WEBmic.
The initial setting of the Ethernet IP address of a SICAM MIC can be done apart from the system settings
also online with the help of WEBmic.
5.1.5.1.3 Password and Access Right
Administrator Password, Guest Password

The passwords to enter in a project can be changed at any time. A changed password is
stored after transfer, the project remains open. A new logon into the project is only possible
with concordance of the entry and the current password.
It is differed between upper and lower case, special characters as "." or "/" are permitted. The
procedure applies in the same manner for the users "Administrator" and "Guest".
Remote Control via WEB Enabled

The local Administrator thereby determines, whether the remote administrator obtains the
same access rights or is restricted only to access one SICAM MIC (see section 5.1.1.1, Users
and Rights).
5.1.5.1.4 Supervision and Fault Behavior
Usage of the D01 Output

The output D01 on the master control unit can be used alternatively as watchdog, output or er-
ror output.
Note
If the output D01 is used as watchdog or error output, then on the master control unit now only 1 infor-
mation or command output (D00) is available. Then a double-command output via the master control unit
is not possible.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Ax 1703 Error Message Enabled

The Ax 1703 error message corresponds to the standard IEC 60870-5-101/-104 private range
(TI135 FC148/4), further information see section 6.4.1.1, Ax 1703 Error Message.
Error Messages
For the messaging of a sum error for the types "error" and "failure" a free address (IOA1,
IOA2, IOA3) can be defined.
Compatibility Mode
It can be differentiated, whether SICAM MIC is connected with an automation unit of the older
system family (SK-Mode) or the current system family (Ax-Mode).
Acquisition Grid of the TM Modules

Basically the acquisition of the input signals is performed in a 10 ms grid. For fast applications,
the possibility to reduce the acquisition grid to 2.5 ms exists. This option, however, is only
possible with the suitable I/O modules (see section 7.4, Hardware Configuration).
Cause of Transmission ACTCON (7), ACTTERM (10)

If the identifications for command confirmation (ACTCON) and command termination
(ACTERM) are not used, all commands and set point commands sent to the PLC are changed
from the global chronologic ring to chronologic ring (behavior like single-point information).
The general interrogation (TI 100) is excluded.
5.1.5.1.5 Reset all Parameters
Online, all parameters can be reset to their default values. An already existing configuration is
thereby lost and the parameter setting can be attached as with the creation of a new project.
To do this, click on the button Parameter reset and confirm with Yes .
The parameters are now reset and an automatic startup of SICAM MIC is executed. The cur-
rent configuration of the modules is thereby learned.
The data of the automation function (optionally loaded IL) remain unaffected.
Note
It must be considered that with the resetting of the parameters the IP addresses are also affected (serial
and Ethernet). If no connection to SICAM MIC can be established, a valid IP address must be set again
(see section 5.1.5.1.2, IP Configuration.
Offline, the parameters can be reset only module by module by means of removing or ex-
changing a module in the Hardware Configuration.
The default values for the individual parameters are specified in section 7.1, System Settings.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5.2 Time Settings
By clicking in the menu tree on Parameter | Time settings the mask for setting the time pa-
rameters is opened.
The internal clock of SICAM MIC is used for time-tagging of generated data (from the periph-
erals and optional IL). The time stamp has a resolution of 10 ms.
The time is displayed in the header of the user interface online. Here the updating does not
take place continuously, but rather with each updating of the web browser.
Settings
With the help of pull-down menus the time zone and, if necessary, a rule for the summer-
wintertime switching can be adjusted. Changes are stored in the file or on the SIM card by
clicking the button Apply . In online operation the settings are immediately active (no startup
required).
With communication according to IEC 60870-5-104 the time can be synchronized via SNTP
(Simple Network Time Protocol). To achieve this, the IP address of up to 4 SNTP servers can
be entered, as well as the cycle time of the SNTP synchronization. The settings thereto reside
within the mask Parameter | Communication | Protocol | Settings under TIME
SYNCHRONISATION (NTP).
Additionally, the time can be set online manually. This is especially useful for the stand-alone
mode (see section 6.4.2.4.2, Local Setting of the Time).
Information concerning time synchronization resides within section 6.4.2.4, Diagnosis of the
Time, and concerning the settings in section 7.2, Time Settings.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5.3 Configuration of the Communication Interface
By clicking in the menu tree on Parameter | Communication | Protocol | Configuration

the configuration mask for the protocol is opened.
Here the type of communication can be selected:
IEC 60870-5-101 multi-point traffic (serial)

IEC 60870-5-101 dial-up traffic (serial)
IEC 60870-5-104 Ethernet, LAN (only master control module with Ethernet interface)
IEC 60870-5-104 Internet, GPRS
No communication (stand-alone operation)
With a change to the type of communication, the configuration mask refreshes immediately
with the respective specific parameters. Working online, the button Apply must be clicked for
this if necessary.
The changed settings are stored by clicking on the button Apply (SIM card or file). When pa-
rameterizing online a startup of the system is required, so that the settings become active.
The meaning and the value ranges for the individual protocol parameters are explained in sec-
tion 7.3, Communication.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Common Settings
Independently from the type of communication, for each information object type can be de-
fined whether a transmission shall be carried out with or eithout time tag.
With selection multipoint traffic or dial-up traffic, the supported transmission facilities can be
set, as well as the number of bytes for the standardized identifiers in the message header ac-
cording to IEC 60870-5-101:
Link address
Common address of the ASDU (CASDU)
Information object address (IOA)
Cause of transmission (COT)
Type identifiers (TI)
The setting of the transmission rate (baudrate) enables the reduction of the data volume for
the transmission to the central station and the adaptation to the transmission facility.
5.1.5.4 Settings of the Communication Protocol
By clicking in the menu tree on Parameter | Communication | Protocol | Settings the set-
tings mask for the protocol is opened.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
According to the selected type of communication, the specific settings can be performed here.
Changes are stored by clicking on the button Apply (SIM card or file). With parameter setting
online the settings are subsequently active, no startup is required.
The meaning and the value ranges for the individual protocol parameters are explained in the
sections 7.3.1, Protocol Configuration and 7.3.2, Protocol Settings.
Exceptional Settings for Dial-up Traffic

Optionally, an SMS can be sent independently from the process communication upon state
change of up to 8 definable data points (phone number adjustable).
For SICAM MIC an automatic monitor can be set. At a fixed time the substation tries to set up
a connection to the master control. The time for the communication setup is free settable
(hour, minute).
If in the network at a defined moment a connection setup is carried out already (example:
counter interrogation), delay times can be prevented as long as the monitoring function is trig-
gered temporal as far as possible from that moment.
Selection "no Communication"

Optionally SMS can be sent. The preconditions for this are like for SMS upon dial-up traffic.
5.1.5.5 Configuration of Inputs and Outputs
SICAM MIC makes available integrated functions for the technological preparation of the in-
puts/outputs (preprocessing of signals, postprocessing of signals).
In a SICAM MIC a maximum of 8 I/O modules can be operated. The following module types
are supported:
Binary input module

Binary output module
Analog input module
Analog output module
Speed acquisition module
In addition to this, the master control modules are also equipped with binary inputs/outputs.
Corresponding to the set configuration of the modules, their names can be found again in the
menu tree under the menu item Periphery. The same structure is also located under the
menu item HW Documentation.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
In the mask Parameter | Periphery | <module name> | Configuration the respective module-
specific inputs or outputs appear.
Module specific a list of the pins and their settings appear. These settings specify type, name
and information object address (IOA) of each data point.
Here, the inputs/outputs fixed assigned to the I/O module can be freely assigned from the
hardware to data points in the software.
Assignment of Inputs/Outputs to Information Objects

Each I/O module is equipped with an individual number of physical input/outputs, that are
used for the acquisition or the output of electrical signals. In the configuration mask, for each
I/O module the module-specific inputs/outputs appear automatically together with the as-
signed parameters.
The assignment of the electrical signals to an I/O module is carried out according to the rela-
tive terminal assignment. Based on the order of the configured modules, the system calcu-
lates an absolute data point address (DP) for each input and output. This is unambiguous
within a SICAM MIC.
Via parameter setting the electrical signals are assigned to information objects. Each infor-
mation object is given an information object address (IOA1, IOA2, IOA3) for unambiguous
identification. This address is used for assigning the electrical signals for communication
(telecontrol) and for control (automation).
In the default is IOA1=DP, IOA2=0, IOA3=0. Alternatively for each information object an op-
tional IOA (respectively between 0 and 255) can be parameterized.
Altogether up to 256 data points can be configured. In addition, a long text of up to 10 charac-
ters can be freely assigned to each data point. This text is used both in the Documentation as
well as for a logging of the respective data point in the Display Event List.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Assignment of information objects and inputs/outputs
Type Meaning Connection Scope

Single-point infor- information acquisition 1 binary input
mation
Double-point infor- information acquisition 2 successive binary inputs
mation
Integrated total count pulse acquisition 1 binary input
Measured value current acquisition 1 analog input
voltage acquisition 1 analog input
temperature acquisition 2-wire 1 analog input
3-wire
4-wire
speed acquisition 1 impulse input

frequency acquisition 1 impulse input
2 successive impulse inputs
Single command command output 1-pole 1 binary output
1½-pole *) 1 binary output + 1 binary output

for group relay
2-pole *) 2 successive binary outputs
Double command command output 1-pole 2 successive binary outputs
1½-pole *) 2 successive binary outputs

+ 1 binary output for group relay
2-pole *) 4 successive binary outputs
Single-Point Infor- binary information output 1 binary output

mation
Setpoint command current output 1 analog output
Setpoint command voltage output 1 analog output
*)
does not apply for master controle module I/Os and DO-6200
The precise description of the different information objects and the type identifiers (TI) can be
seen in the section 7.5, Process Periphery.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5.6 Settings of the Inputs and Outputs
In the mask Parameter | Periphery | <module name> | Settings depending on the module-
specific configuration, name and type of the assigned inputs/outputs appear automatically with
their specific parameters.
The exact description of the module specific parameters and value ranges is - structured by
information object type - in the section 7.5, Process Periphery.
Distinction Class 1 Data/Class 2 Data

Each information object in monitoring direction (inputs) can be assigned to the Class 1 or to
the Class 2. This assignment is specified in the standard IEC 60870-5-101/-104, and serves
for the priorization of information objects for the transmission by the communication function.
5.1.5.6.1 Binary Information Acquisition
For the acquisition of single-point or double-point information a digital input module must be
configured. The local inputs on the master control module can be used also.
Class 1 Data
By means of selection via the corresponding check box a binary information is assigned to the
Class 1 (marked) or to the Class 2 (not marked).
In both cases the spontaneous transmission to the central station takes place upon each
change of state of the binary information (exception: Class 2 data with dial-up traffic).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Inversion of Binary Information Items (Digital Inputs)

With an Inversion the state of a signal from the hardware is output inverse from the allocated
information object in the software (open-circuit/closed-circuit principle).
For double-point information items the OFF and ON contact can be inverted seperately. This
is useful, if for example a feeder signal is configured as closed-circuit contact, and the other
one as open-circuit contact.
Intermediate State Suppression Time for Double-point Information Items

An intermediate state is given if an actuator (disconnector, valve etc.) is not in a final position.
In case of a fault (gear defect, open-circuit signaling contact etc.) this must be reported.
During the natural run time of the actuator (from OFF to ON or CLOSED to OPEN etc.) how-
ever, a fault message must not be output. Therefore the intermediate state message can be
suppressed by an adjustable time. Only at expiration of the monitoring time and still present
intermediate position, the fault is reported.
5.1.5.6.2 Counting Pulse Acquisition
For the acquisition of binary information items a digital input module must be configured. The
local inputs on the master control module can be used also.
Class 1 Data
By means of selection via the corresponding check box an integrated total is assigned to the
In both cases the spontaneous transmission of the integrated total to the central station takes
place interval controlled (exception: Class 2 data with dial-up traffic).
Setting of the Mode for the Counter Freeze and Transmission

This parameter defines how the integrated total is generated:
in a certain time interval

by means of an external counter interrogation

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Setting of the Interval Control

The local interval control serves for the autonomous freezing and transmitting of counting val-
ues to the central station. It is active after startup of SICAM MIC, even if no time is set in the
system yet.
The counting value is frozen and transmitted spontaneously to the central station in the ad-
justed time-scale. With dial-up traffic a counting value of the Class 2 is only frozen.
Example: quarter hour values
interval time to be set = 15 minutes
results following freezing and transmission moments:
HH:00:00
HH:15:00
HH:30:00
HH:45:00
If instead of the interval control a counter interrogation is adjusted, the counting value is only
frozen and transmitted on request by the central station.
Overflow Counting Value (Value Range)

Exceeding the adjusted value range (parameter "overflow at") the "carry" bit (CY) is set and
the counting is continued with 0. At the next transmission the current integrated total is sent
with the "carry" bit, and the "carry" bit is reset again.
There is no "overflow" bit (OV) available.
Counter Groups
Each counting value can be classified to a group (adjustable group 1…4). Due to individual
defined criteria, the counter groups can be requested independently from the master control
(spontaneous information object "counter interrogation").

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5.6.3 Current and Voltage Acquisition
For the acquisition of currents and voltages an appropriate analog input module must be con-
figured.
Class 1 Data
By means of selection via the corresponding check box a current value or a voltage value is
assigned to the Class 1 (marked) or to the Class 2 (not marked).
In both cases the spontaneous transmission of the current or voltage value to the central sta-
tion takes place threshold value controlled (exception: Class 2 data with dial-up traffic).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5.6.4 Temperature Acquisition
For the acquisition of temperatures an analog input module AI-6310 must be configured.
Class 1 Data
By means of selection via the corresponding check box a temperature value is assigned to the
In both cases the spontaneous transmission of the temperature value to the central station
takes place threshold value controlled (exception: Class 2 data with dial-up traffic).
Connecting Resistance Thermometers

The resistance thermometers can be connected using 2-, 3- or 4-wire technique. The
I/O module supplies the constant current needed for the measurement.
In 2-wire technology, it is necessary to compensate for the voltage drop on the measuring cir-
cuits by means of a calibration process, during which so-called calibration-values are created.
If a calibration process has never been performed, this is signaled by the diagnostic message
“factory calibration for 2-wire technology not performed”.
The instructions for the calibration exist in appendix D, Connection of Resistance Thermome-
ters.
Note
In 3- and 4-wire technology, it is absolutely necessary to connect the common (IREFx,y-) and, in 4-wire
technology, in addition the current source output (IREFx+) directly to the resistance thermometer.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5.6.5 Frequency Acquisition
For the acquisition of frequencies a module TE-6420 must be configured.
Class 1 Data
By means of selection via the corresponding check box a frequency value is assigned to the
In both cases the spontaneous transmission of the frequency value to the central station takes
place threshold value controlled (exception: Class 2 data with dial-up traffic).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5.6.6 Speed Monitoring
For the acquisition of revolutions per minute a module TE-6420 must be configured.
It is recommended to use a CP-6040 since all the online functions are considerably faster via
the Ethernet than via the serial interface. Further, using a CP-6020 the communication must
be interrupted for an online function.
Frequency of Pulses and Acceleration Time Constant

Specify the frequency of the pulses at maximum speed, as well as the time which the generat-
ing unit needs to reach the maximum speed. With these values the measured speed is cor-
rected during startup of the machine.
Speed Measured Value Output

By means of assignment of an IOA the speed value can be output via a digital output. The
anlog value output is provided for the local display only, it can not be used for a protective
function. At failure of the speed monitoring module the last value remains active.
Via the corresponding check box you can decide whether the value is output with (marked) or
without (not marked) sign.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Assignment of the Single-Point Information "Guide Vane Closed"

During standstill a speed signal may be bouncing due to vibrations. Using two sensors this
bouncing can be suppressed by means of this information. If this signal does not exist or the
guide vane is open, a speed is detected and depending on the range the outputs are set.
Instead of "guide vane closed" an equivalent information like "nozzle closed" can be allocated.
By means of assignment of an IOA unequal 0/0/0 for the digital input signal, you can decide
whether the single-point information is used.
Assignment of the Error Information

By means of the respective assignment of an IOA, the error information acquired by the speed
monitoring can be output via digital outputs.
A fault of the speed contacts is present
if the difference of both speeds is greater than the set value (then the signal with the
smaller value is set to "faulty").
upon open-circuit.
During running machine a sensor fault does not lead to a malfunction. After a shutdown, how-
ever, there is no direction noted and no outputs are set. A fault of the sensor signals should be
considered in the startup/shutdown sequence of automatic operations.
Permitted Deviation of the Sensor Signals

Through the staggered mounting of the sensors a speed change can be detected earlier from
one signal than from the other one. The parameter should be >=1%.
Note
If the deviation is set too small, error messages may occur upon change of small speeds.
Setting the Speed Limits

Dependent on the speed value up to 14 events can be defined. By means of the respective
entry of an IOA unequal 0/0/0, the therefore required digital outputs can be defined.
Enter for the activation of the desired output a threshold value and an operate lag, and for the
termination a hysteresis.
You can define the monitoring direction by means of selection greater/smaller (raising/falling
speed).
With a configuration with 2 sensors you can define the sense of rotation by means of selection
foreward or backward.
Normally the threshold values are performed as make contacts. If a break contact functionality
is desired, the output must be set inverse.
Example: desired resolution at 130% nominal speed
with make functionality greater than 130% with a hysteresis of 5%

with break functionality smaller than 125% with a hysteresis of 5%

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Setting the Standstill Detection

By means of entry of an IOA unequal 0/0/0 a digital output for the output of a standstill infor-
mation can be defined.
For the activation of the function enter the number of speed pulses and the monitoring time
within the speed pulses are counted up.
For the activation and termination of the digital output you can enter a common delay time.
Setting the Creep Detection

By means of entry of an IOA unequal 0/0/0 a digital output for the output of a creep infor-
mation can be defined.
For the activation of the function enter the number of speed pulses, from which the digital out-
put shall be activated (the value must be smaller than that for the standstill detection).
Caution
With an impulse frequency greater than 4.1Hz the creep contact will be reset (this must be considered in
the sequence of automatic operations). The creep detection is active only with closed guide vane.
Setting the Measured Value Parameters

These parameters are only active for the communication link, the measured value to the ana-
log output is transmitted cyclically.
Speed Measured Value for the Communication

The measured value is generated as absolute value only. If a directional speed value is de-
sired, an applicational solution via the PLC (IL) is possible. For the generation of a value with
sign, both parameterized data points "hand of rotation backward" and "hand of rotation for-
ward" can be evaluated.
Class 1 Data
By means of selection via the corresponding check box a speed value is assigned to the
In both cases the spontaneous transmission of the speed value to the central station takes
place threshold value controlled (exception: Class 2 data with dial-up traffic).
Single-Point Information Items for the Communication

By means of selection via the corresponding check box you can define whether all the infor-
mation shall be sent also to the communication (marked) or not (not marked).
Error Output D01

By means of selection via the corresponding check box you can define whether the error out-
put of the master control element shall be used (marked) or not (not marked). This digital out-
put can be used for instance to initiate an emergency closure.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5.6.7 Command Output
For the output of commands (OC) an appropriate digital output module must be configured.
The local outputs on the master control module can be used also.
Return Information Monitoring

The parameter "Command termination (TERM)" specifies the time, within which the return in-
formation assigned to an output command must arrive.
If the return information of the actuator does not arrive within this time, an error message
takes place. The time value can be selected independently of the command output time.
The adjustable time value applies for all the commands of the respective I/O module.
Note
In order to avoid errors in the signaling of an unsuccessful command initiation, the state information moni-
toring time should be longer than the command output time.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Secured Commands
Besides the standard command output SICAM MIC provides the command output with inter-
nal checks (IC) and the command output with resistance check (RC1).
For the realization of secured commands the corresponding digital output modules must be
configured (mask HW Configuration in the menu tree):
1 digital output basic module

1 up to 7 digital output modules
Please consider the guidelines in the SICAM MIC System Description, chapter “System Over-
view”, section “Architecture” |”I/O Modules” | "Hardware Configuration Rules".
The detailed description for the checked commands can be found in the section 7.5.9, Pulse
Command Output.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5.6.8 Binary Information Output
For the output of binary information items an appropriate digital output module must be con-
figured. The local outputs on the master control module can be used also.
Terminate or Keep Output

For single-point information items the behaviour at the output can be adjusted for the case
that the communication to the master control fails.
Terminate output
The information output will be reset (logical "0").
Keep output
The information output will be "frozen" with the last output state.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5.6.9 Current and Voltage Output
For the output of currents or voltages an analog output module AO-6380 must be configured.
Keep Output/Send Substitute Value

For current and voltage setpoint values the behaviour at the output can be adjusted for the
case that the communication to the master control fails.
Keep output
The last output value will be "frozen".
Output substitute value
The value which is entered in the field SUBSTITUTE VALUE will be output.
Input of the Ranges

Normalized and scaled values.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5.7 Decentralized Archive (DEAR)
5.1.5.7.1 Common
The decentralized archive (DEAR) serves for the archiving of data points that are used in the
telecontrol function or in the automation function.
DEAR can be configured online (webserver) or offline (WEBmic), just like the settings for data
points of the telecontrol function. Data points of the automation function can be configured on-
ly online automatically (see section 5.1.5.7.4, Archiving Data Points from PLC).
5.1.5.7.2 Configuration of DEAR
First the archive must be configured. To do this, click in the menu tree Decentral
Archive | Configuration to enter the parameters.
Timeout for Filetransfer

With this parameter it is defined when the data transmission will be cancelled if a disturbance
occurs during a file transfer (connection error etc.).
Address Subdirectory, File

The main directory has got its fixed address (IOA1=0, IOA2=0, IOA3=0). The addressing of
the subdirectory and of the first file can be chosen freely. The addresses of all the subsequent
files will be calculated automatically. This means, that the second file has the same address
as the first file, but the value of the IOA1 is incremented by one and so on (see example be-
low).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Recording Grid for Measured Values

This parameter defines the recording grid (the cycle time) for measured values. It can be set
from 1 to 60 minutes.
Number of Bytes for CASDU, IOA, COT in the Archive

You can select the format of saving the entries into the archive. If there is a control system
which needs another format for the CASDU, IOA or COT you can define this with the help of
these parameters. The parameters only affect the entries in the DEAR, however, it will not af-
fect any other data in your automation unit.
Note
It is not possible to call the archive from more than one different control system which use different set-
tings for the number of bytes for CASDU, IOA, COT, because the settings for these parameters affect the
whole archive of a automation unit.
Memory Configuration Archive

With the help of this parameter it is possible to select the configuration of the archive stored
on the SIM card. You may select this parameter referring to your field of application. The
smaller the bandwidth of your communication line is the smaller the separated files should be.
Spontaneous Transmission of Directory List

It is possible to transmit the directory list spontaneously. This behavior is specified in the IEC
60870-5. It means, that whenever there is a change in the directory list (one file was written,
or an old file was deleted), this change may be reported to the control system. However, since
upon initialization of a file transfer the control system asks for the directory list anyway, it is not
useful to transmit the directory list spontaneously.
Note
The addresses that are calculated automatically are not shown in the web browser. If such an address is
set in the parameterization of the telecontrol function within SICAM MIC, an error message occurs on
attempt to apply.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5.7.3 Archiving Data Points from Peripheral Elements
Click in the menu tree on Decentral Archive | Data Points PE and an automatically gener-
ated list of the data points available through the configuration of I/O modules appears.
The desired data points for the entry in the archive can be marked by clicking the respective
checkbox ARCHIVE.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5.7.4 Archiving Data Points from PLC
If you want to store data points in the decentralized archive that are programmed in the IL, the
respective addresses (IOA) must be entered in a list, and marked by clicking on the respective
checkbox ARCHIVE.
You reach the list by clicking on Decentral Archive | Data points PLC in the menu tree.
Note
After a cold restart all the data points which are used un the IL are entered automatically into the list. If
necessary, the selection for the archive can be changed manually.
After filling out the list click on the button Apply. The system checks automatically if the
datapoints are available, and adds the correct type identification for each datapoint.
Caution
By a later change of the Instruction List (IL) or change of addresses in the parameter setting (periphery)
the datapoint numbers may change. During startup SICAM MIC checks if the assignment of the datapoint
number to the information object address and the type identification is valid. If this is not the case, the
complete archive will be deleted and an error information is recorded in the History Diagnosis.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5.8 Documentation
Both online as well as offline the current hardware configuration is created automatically on
the user interface and displayed in the form of tables. The tables can be printed out directly
from the web browser.
Click in the menu tree on HW Documentation. The submenus appear for
Overview
PS-66xx
Protocol
Master control unit DI
Master control unit DO
IOM 0
IOM 1
IOM 2
IOM 3
IOM 4
IOM 5
IOM 6
IOM 7
The order and number of the I/O modules corresponds to the configured configuration.
The clicking the individual submenus you get to the respective hardware configuration.
5.1.5.8.1 Overview
Parameter Output Meaning/Note

Slot acc. to configuration power supply (PS)
master control unit (MCU)
I/O module (IOMx)
Type acc. to configuration supported module types see in section 7.4,
Hardware Configuration
Operational equipment 10 characters the text can be entered here
designation
5.1.5.8.2 Power Supply Module
Parameter Display Meaning/Note

Customer/plant/station acc. to system settings
CASDU1/CASDU2 acc. to system settings
Operational equipment acc. to overview
designation
Pin module specific
Terminal module specific terminal designation

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.5.8.3 Protocol

Protocol acc. to protocol configura- IEC 60870-5-104 (Ethernet)/
tion IEC 60870-5-101 dial-up traffic (serial)/
IEC 60870-5-101 multi-point traffic (serial)/
no communication
transmission facility acc. to protocol configura- modem, radio, ring, direct
tion
Cable assignment acc. to transmission facility pin and signal assignment of the cable to
the transmission facility
Signal acc. to transmission facility signal name
5.1.5.8.4 I/O Modules

Operational equipment acc. to overview
designation
Pin module specific
DP module specific
unit acc. to periphery settings only for AI (current/voltage acquisition)
Type acc. to periphery settings
connector acc. to periphery settings only for AI (temperature acquisition)
type acc. to periphery settings only for DO and AO relevant
Text acc. to periphery settings
*)
IOA1/IOA2/IOA3 acc. to periphery settings
Terminal acc. to periphery settings

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Via access to the integrated webserver of SICAM MIC (user interface online) operating func-
tions that serve for test, commissioning and diagnostics of the telecontrol function can be exe-
cuted:
Startup
Reset all parameters to default values
Process visualization
state of inputs/outputs
simulation of outputs
Event list
5.1.6.1 Initiate Startup
A startup of SICAM MIC can be initiated independently of a parameter change, by clicking the
button Reset in the menu Parameter | System settings.
Note
After a change of the IP address of a SICAM MIC a startup is always executed automatically. The same is
applicable if the parameters are reset to default values (see section 5.1.5.1, System Setting, Reset all
Parameters).Reset all Parameters
Warning
A startup has also consequences for the automation function (if used). For details thereto refer to section
5.2.2, Commissioning and Test.
5.1.6.2 Startup Request due to Parameter Modification
Certain parameters can only be activated after a startup of the systems. In this case the indi-
cation line parameter active after reset appears in the mask title, as soon as
changed parameter has been transferred.
Even further parameters – also in different masks – can be changed, before all are switched
active together by means of a startup. The startup can be executed with a click on the interac-
tive part Reset in the indication line.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Parameters that require a Startup due to Modification

Menu/Submenu Type Parameter
System settings Compatibility mode
Acquisition grid of TM modules
Communication | Protocol | Ethernet Configuration of the protocol
Configuration Transmission facility
Max. message length
Monitor direction type identification
Communication | Protocol | Ethernet Own IP address
Settings Remote IP address
Communication | Protocol | dial-up traffic Configuration of the protocol
Max. message length
Baud rate
Link address
Bytes link address
Bytes CASDU
Bytes IOA
Bytes COT
Bytes time tag
Communication | Protocol | dial-up traffic Power supply modem
Settings
Communication | Protocol | multi-point traffic Configuration of the protocol
Max. message length
Baud rate
Link address
Bytes link address
Bytes CASDU
Bytes IOA
Bytes COT
Bytes time tag
Communication | Protocol | multi-point traffic Power supply modem
Settings DLC frequency range
Radio circuit identifier
Relay operation
Monitoring timeout
Periphery | Configuration DI Type
Class 1 data
Inversion
IEC 60870-5-101 group (RQT)
Periphery | Settings DO in case of communication failure
keep output/terminate output
Periphery | Configuration AI Unit
Type
Periphery | Settings AI (all parameters)
Periphery | Configuration AO Unit
Type
Periphery | Settings AO (all parameters)
Periphery | Configuration TE (all parameters)
Periphery | Settings TE (all parameters)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.6.3.1 State Display of Inputs and Outputs
The states of the binary and analog inputs/outputs can be visualized online. To do this, click in
the menu tree on Visualization and then on the required module.
The updating does not take place continuously and if required must therefore be retriggered
with a repeated click on the required module, or by clicking on View | Refresh in the web
browser.
Binary Inputs
Type State Format Meaning/Note
Single-point Off binary
information On
Double-point Off binary faulty position = on & off
information On intermediate position = not on & not
faulty position off & monitoring time expired
intermediate position
Integrated total value 31 bit depends on parameterized frozen
24 bit value
2 decades BCD
3 decades BCD
4 decades BCD
5 decades BCD
6 decades BCD
7 decades BCD
8 decades BCD
9 decades BCD
Binary Outputs
Single-Point Off binary
Information On
Single command Off binary
On
double com- Off binary
mand On

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Analog Inputs
Current –100%…100% normalized format corresponds to the parame-
–32000…32000 scaled terization of the AI module
–32000…32000 floating point
Voltage –100%…100% normalized format corresponds to the parame-
–32000…32000 scaled terization of the AI module
Temperature –50°C…350°C floating point
(-58F…662F)
-100°C…700°C
(-148F…1292F)
-60°C…250°C
(-76F…482F)
Analog Outputs
Current –100%…100% normalized format corresponds to the parame-
–32000…32000 scaled terization of the AO module
Voltage –100%…100% normalized format corresponds to the parame-
–32000…32000 scaled terization of the AO module
Speed acquisition
Frequency 2…10000Hz floating point

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.6.3.2 Simulation of Outputs
Binary and analog outputs can be simulated online with the help of the web browser. It is to be
observed thereby, that the state of a simulated output can change automatically due to
running application program (state change through logic operation)

the communication (state change in receive message)
Warning
The manual controlling of outputs with the plant running can lead to damage to persons and machines.
Ensure that aggregates in the control area of the command output as well as those subsequent aggre-
gates in the process chain are protected and that persons in the vicinity are warned.
Binary Outputs
By selecting in a pull-down menu, depending on which state it is in, you can set and transfer a
binary output either to On or to Off. Only one output can be written for each transfer.
The following manual control possibilities are provided:
Type Choice Scope 1)

Single-point Off 1 binary output
information On
Single command command output time without identifi- 1 binary output
er 2) 1 binary output + 1 binary out-
short command output time 3) put(group relay)
long command output time 3) 2 successive binary outputs
Double com- Off Command output time without 2 successive binary output
mand On identifier 2) 2 successive binary output + 1 binary
short command output time 3) output(group relay)
long command output time 3) 4 successive binary output
1)
dependent on the settings of the digital outputs
2)
the command output time corresponds to the parameterization of the respective data point
3)
the command output time corresponds to the parameterization of the digital output module
Analog Outputs
You can set and transfer an analog output to any optional value within the type-specific value
range. Only one output can be written for each transfer.
Type Choice Format Scope Note

Current -100%…100% normalized 1 analog output format corresponds to
-32000…32000 scaled the parameterization of
the DO module
-32000…32000 floating point
Voltage -100%…100% normalized 1 analog output format corresponds to
-32000…32000 scaled the parameterization of
the DO module
-32000…32000 floating point

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.6.4 Display Event List
By selecting the mask Decentral Archive | Event list in the menu tree, the display of events
(process information) can be reached.
In the event list all the spontaneous datapoints which are configured in the substation will be
logged chronologically upon a change of state.
The time tagging has a resolution of 1ms and is carried out automatically by the firmware, just
as the logging.
The event list records up to 100 signaling entries. For this the firmware utilizes a ring buffer,
which means if the signaling buffer has been fully written, the respective oldest signal entry is
overwritten by the most current.
Structure of the Information in the Event List

Time DD.MM.YYYY Time tag
hh:mm:ss:ms
TI Single-point information Information object, type identification
Double-point information
Single command
Double command
Setpoint value
IOA1/IOA2/IOA3 0…255/0…255/0…255 Set IOA
Text 10 characters Set signal text
Cause Spontaneous Information from periphery or application program
Act Command or setpoint value via communication or
Operation
Actcon Command confirmation
Actterm Command termination
State On ON (switch closed)
Off OFF (switch open)
Faulty ON & OFF
Intermediate Not ON & not OFF & monitoring time expired
<Value> Only for setpoint input
Quality NT At failure of I/O module
IV If value invalid
Location Remote Via communication
Local Via operation (web browser)
<Empty> Not determinable origin or from I/O module
Direction From PE to COM Shows source and target of a data point (data flow):
From PE to PLC PE …periphery
From COM to PE COM …communication
PLC …programmable logical controller (IL)
From COM to PLC
WEB …manually controlled via web browser
From PLC to PE
From PLC to COM
From WEB
Arch. Selected Indication whether data point is archived in DEAR
Not selected

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.6.4.1 Save Event List
For documentation or archiving purposes the current content of the event list can be exported
and stored in a file locally on your PC.
Download Event List as CSV file (Comma Separated Values)

In the subgroup DOWNLOAD EVENTLIST (SICAM MIC -> PC) click with the right mouse button on
the link DOWNLOAD EVENTLIST AS CSV-FILE (RIGHT CLICK, SAVE TARGET AS).
Specify the name and path for your destination file in the browse window. The default file type
is csv. Then the file can be opened as Microsoft Excel ® table or also with a text editor.
Download Event List as XML file (Extensible Markup Language)

In the subgroup DOWNLOAD EVENTLIST (SICAM MIC -> PC) click with the right mouse button on
the link DOWNLOAD EVENTLIST AS XML-FILE (RIGHT CLICK, SAVE TARGET AS).
is xml. Then the file can be opened with the web browser.
5.1.6.4.2 Clear Event List
The current event list can be cleared by clicking on the button clear and then confirming the
query with OK . Subsequently an empty mask appears with the status information event
list cleared in the header. With a new selection in the menu tree one returns to the event
list.
Note
The event list is also cleared if the voltage supply of SICAM MIC is interrupted for at least 10 s.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.6.5 Local Reading of the Decentralized Archive (DEAR)
By selecting the mask Decentral Archive | Download in the menu tree you reach the dis-
play of the current file directory.
In the DEAR all the spontaneous datapoints which are configured to store in the archive will
be logged chronologically upon a change of state. Commands and binary information in re-
ceive direction are also included.
Structure of the Information in the DEAR

Time DD.MM.YYYY Time tag
hh:mm:ss:ms
TI Single-point information Information object, type identification
Single command
Double command
Setpoint value
IOA1/IOA2/IOA3 0…255/0…255/0…255 Set IOA
Text 10 characters Set signal text
Cause Spontaneous Information from periphery or application program
Act Command or setpoint value via communication or
operation
Actcon Command confirmation
Actterm Command termination
State On ON (switch closed)
Off OFF (switch open)
Faulty ON & OFF
Intermediate Not ON & not OFF & monitoring time expired
<Value> Only for setpoint input
Quality NT At failure of I/O module
IV If value invalid

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.1.6.5.1 Save DEAR
The current content of DEAR is stored in one or several files.
Download DEAR as CSV file (Comma Seperated Values)

In the subgroup DOWNLOAD EVENTLIST AS CSV (SICAM MIC -> PC) click with the right mouse
button on that link, which contains the desired recording period and select SAVE TARGET AS.
is csv. Then the file can be opened as Microsoft Excel® table or also with a text editor.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Download DEAR as XML file (Extensible Markup Language)

In the subgroup DOWNLOAD EVENTLIST AS XML (SICAM MIC -> PC) click with the right mouse
button on that link, which contains the desired recording period and select SAVE TARGET AS.
Specify the name and path for your destination file in the dialog window SAVE AS. The default
file type is xml.
The saved file can be opened afterwards with the web browser.
5.1.6.5.2 Clear DEAR
The DEAR is stored on the SIM card. The archive can be deleted automatically (information in
the menu Diagnosis | Overview)
after power failure during the writing of a file on the SIM card
if the SIM card is plugged into another master control element
Note
Upon request of the superior control center system a file transfer may happen. While this process is run-
ning an operation or display via the web browser can not take place.
Attempting to select a HTML page, then the information occurs that at this time a display is not possible.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.2 Automation
5.2.1 Creating an Application Program as Instruction List (IL)
For the creation of an Instruction List an ASCII Editor (for instance Microsoft Notepad®) is re-
quired. The programming takes place independently from the target system.
You find an overview on the Automation Function, as well as the instruction for the program
creation, in the manual SICAM RTUs Common Functions System and Basis System Ele-
ments, Chapter “Automation”, section “Restricted Automation Function”.
Note
For the program creation in FUD the SICAM TOOLBOX II (as of version 4.0), tool "CAEx plus" is required
and the firmware CPC60 as of revision level 14.
The loading into the target system is performed by the integrated webserver of SICAM MIC.
The instructions thereto reside within section 5.2.2.3.2, Save and Load PLC Code.
5.2.1.1 Structure of an Instruction List
The structure of the application program consists of 3 parts (execution in this order):
Startup (PLC_RESET)
The startup part is run through once after a startup. Here all variables can be initialized,
that are required directly after startup and before the current initial image.
Initialization (PLC_INIT)
The initialization part is run through once after a startup. Here all variables can be initial-
ized, that are required directly after the current initial image and before the execution of
the cycle part.
Cycle (PLC_START)
The cycle part is run through cyclically. Here, the open-/closed-loop control function is
programmed.
Note
The system provides only one task. The cycle time is definable by means of parameter PLC_CYCLETIME
in the IL. The value can be changed dependent on logic operation by the application program.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Application Program (Example)
5.2.1.2 Syntax for Instructions
5.2.1.2.1 Common
Each instruction command must be in one line. Each line must be concluded with a paragraph
break, line break or both (done automatically by the text editor).
An instruction command consists of the command (operation) and an operand.
Example:
LD M_BOOL_TEST (*command: LD operand: M_BOOL_TEST*)
Each operation produces a calculated value (result). The following operation can calculate fur-
ther with this result.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.2.1.2.2 Addressing of I/O Variables
The format of an I/O variable must correspond with the respective input/output of the periph-
ery.
A command or setpoint value is assigned to an I/O variable by an ST operation and the ad-
dress of the operand. A state or value of an I/O variable is read by an LD operation and the
address of the operand.
Example for the simple syntax:
I_030_001_000_000_TEST.VALUE
0_031_005_001_000.OFF
Example for the expanded syntax:
E_045_001_001_001_002_003_TEST.VALUE or
E_045_001_001_001_002_003.VALUE
The attribute of the I/O variable must be separated by a ".". An I/O variable without attribute is
not allowed.
Note
If the same IOA is used input- and output side, the freely definable Name must be different.
I/O variables must not contain special signs!
5.2.1.2.3 Addressing of Flags
A flag is assigned by an ST operation and the address of the operand. The value of a flag is
written by an LD operation and the address of the operand.
The number format must be chosen according to the format of the value to be stored.
Example:
LD I_030_002_000_000.VALUE
ST M_BOOL_FLAG00
Note
At startup all flags which are not signed as "retain" are initialized with "0".

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.2.1.2.4 Call of Functions
Functions have only temporary variables, therefore with each call all necessary call parame-
ters must be set. Not used call parameters do not affect the result on execution of the func-
tion.
Example: If an addition (ADD) of 3 values is performed, then the inputs IN0, IN1, IN2 are
used. The remaining inputs are automatically set to "0".
The writing of inputs of a function must always begin with IN0 and take place in ascending
order without gaps.
The call parameters must be interchanged with a combination of LD and ST.
The name of the call parameter is produced from the name of the function and the name of
the parameter separated by a ".".
Example:
LD 9 (*load value 9 into the accumulator*)

ST SQRT.IN0 (*store at input for square root func-
tion*)
CAL SQRT (*call function*)
ST ADD.IN0 (*store result from*)
(*square root function at input 0 for ADD
function*)
LD 17 (*load value 17 into the accumulator*)
ST ADD.IN1 (*store at input 1 for ADD function*)
CAL ADD (*call function*)
ST M_DINT_RESULT (*store result in a flag*)
The results of the respective functions are written in the accumulator. In the example the value
is also stored on the flag M_DINT_RESULT.
After the call of a function (CAL) all inputs of the respective function are set to the default val-
ues again.
Example:
LD M_DINT_COMPARE (*load flag*)

ST EQ.IN0 (*store at input 0 for equal function*)
LD 3 (*load value 3*)
ST EQ.IN1 (*store at input 1 for equal function*)
CAL EQ (*call function*)
ST O_030_008_000_000.VALUE (*if both values are equal the output of
the function is set to 1*)
If a comparison of two values is performed, the output is set if the flag M_DINT_COMPARE is
written with 3 (the writing of the flag is not included here).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.2.1.2.5 Call of Function Blocks
Function blocks do not have any temporary variables. Each new (derived) function block oc-
cupies a new memory in the RAM.
Respectively the first result of the function block is written in the accumulator. If a function
block has more than one result, then this can be accessed as with the parameter transfer.
Example:
LD 1
ST CTU_TEST.CU
ST CTU_TEST.R
LD 5
ST CTU_TEST.PV
CAL CTU_TEST
LD CTU_TEST.CV (*access to 2nd result*)
5.2.1.3 Instruction Comments
Comments in the application program can be set at any arbitrary place and must begin with
"(*" and end with "*)". The documentation can also extend over several lines.
Example:
LD 15 (*load constant 15*)

ST M_DINT_CONSTANT (*store in a flag*)
5.2.1.4 Settings in the Application Program
By means of predefined system variables the following parameters can be set for the program
execution:
Cycle time
Spontaneous program execution
Data flow control
5.2.1.4.1 Setting the Cycle Time
The cycle time determines the time interval for the execution of the Instruction List.
The shorter the set interval is the smaller must be the IL, otherwise the processing time is ex-
ceeded. A cycle time of 2 ms for instance is only possible for very small Instruction Lists.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The cycle time can be specified in the IL with the variable PLC_CYCLETIME:
In the program part PLC_RESET.

Time-scale is set one time with a startup.
In the program part PLC_START.
Time-scale is set during running operation and can be changed by means of the applica-
tion program.
Example:
PLC_RESET:
LD 20
ST PLC_CYCLETIME (*set cycle time 20ms*)
If the cycle time is set to the value "0", no cyclic program execution takes place.
Under certain circumstances the cycle time can be changed independently by the system:
If no cycle time is set, it is set to 100ms (default).

Extended due to exceeding of the processing time
Retriggering due to spontaneous program execution
Affecting the Processing Time

The processing time is the duration of a program run of the complete IL. It is primarily deter-
mined by the size of the IL (number of operations).
Note
It is to be considered, that the processing time of an application program can be variable. Amongst other
things, it is also influenced by control operations using the web browser.
The processing time can be extended due to:
Number of communication connections (to further automation units, control system)

Number of I/O modules on the TM-Bus
Relative program calls
Diagnosis and error handling
Test- and commissioning functions such as status and simulation of inputs/outputs
Saving the IL (Download)
Change of parameters online
The processing time of the application program is displayed on the user interface (online) un-
der PLC | Diagnosis.
Exceeding Processing Time

The processing time must not be greater than the cycle time. If the maximum processing time
successively exceeds 50% of the set cycle time five times, then the cycle time is increased by
50% independently by the system.
Simultaneously an error information is set (error number 033, see section C.1.1, Error Indica-
tions).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.2.1.4.2 Spontaneous Program Execution
For faster reaction times, the application program can be executed spontaneous (event-
controlled). This must be defined in the startup part of the IL (PLC_RESET).
Possible events are:
Change of state of a data point from the periphery

Change of state of a data point from the communication
The spontaneous program execution is enabled in the IL by setting the variable PLC_SINGLE
to "1" ("single run").
Example:
PLC_RESET:
LD 1
ST PLC_SINGLE (*set single processing*)
With a spontaneous program execution the entire application program is processed one time.
If an event occurs just when the application program would run, then the spontaneous pro-
gram execution is first started after the current program execution has completed (the applica-
tion program cannot interrupt itself). The reaction time can therefore be delayed accordingly.
If several events occur at the same time or one after the other just when the application pro-
gram is running, then the states are temporarily stored in a ring and processed chronologically
with the next spontaneous program execution. The same is also valid if a data point changes
its state several times (transient storage). For further details refer to the SICAM RTUs Com-
mon Functions System and Basis System Elements, chapter "Automation", section “Restricted
Open-/Closed-Loop Control Function”, section "Internal Signal Processing".
At the end of each spontaneous pass the cyclic pass is retriggered around the set cycle time.
In this case no exceeding of the cycle time is signaled.
As long as the events occur in a time-scale that is smaller than the cycle time, only spontane-
ous program passes take place. If the cycle time is set to "0" and the spontaneous program
execution to "1", then only spontaneous program passes take place.
Example:
Event occurs during a cyclic program execution (S1).

Event occurs during a pause (S2).
C C S1 C S2 C
tD t
tP tP tP tP tP
tC tC tC tC
C cyclic processing tP processing time

S spontaneous processing tD delay time
tC cycle time

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.2.1.4.3 Data Flow Control
With the variable PLC_TX_DATAFLOW_xxx (xxx = typ identifier) in the IL it can be deter-
mined, how the input signals from the periphery are to be forwarded. The parameter setting is
carried out seperately for each type identification and must be programmed in the startup part
of the IL (PLC_RESET):
Send to the controller (PLC_TX_DATAFLOW_xxx = "0").

This applies to signals that are to be logically linked further, but are not forwarded to either
the central station or to the control system.
Send to the controller and to the communication (PLC_TX_DATAFLOW_xxx = "1").
This applies to signals that on the one hand are logically linked further, but on the other
hand are to be provided directly for the central station or for the control system.
1)
Control
Periphery routing implicit Code Communication

via the address
2)
1) Data from the communication are sent either direct to the periphery or to the control.
2) Data from the periphery are sent either direct to the communication or to the control.
By means of a systemvariable the data flow can be directed in such a way, that the data from
the periphery are sent direct to the communication as well as parallel to the control.
Example:
PLC_RESET:
LD 1
ST PLC_TX_DATAFLOW_030 (*all single-point information is to be
sent parallel to the PLC AND to the communication*)
Automatic Routing of the Data Points

In the SICAM RTUs Common Functions System and Basis System Elements, chapter "Auto-
mation", section “Restricted Open-/Closed-Loop Control Function”, section "Internal Signal
Processing" |”Automatic Routing of Data Points” exists a listing of the routing possibilities for
data points which are used within the IL.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.2.1.5 System Information in the Application Program
By means of predefined system variables the following information items can be evaluated in
the control logic:
System time
Processing time
Processing time exceeded (yes/no)
Number of program runs
Moment of the last parameter change
System error
For further details, refer to the Appendix A, Variables in the IL.
Note
The system information is are also displayed in the user interface (online) under the Diagnosis of the
Open-/Closed-Loop Control Function.
5.2.1.6 Command Processing according to IEC 61131
If a command (Activation, ACT) is generated by the controller and output to a peripheral ele-
ment, then the messages for command acknowledgement (ACTCON) and command termina-
tion (ACTTERM) are generated with the corresponding output address of the controller.
If the output address of the controller is the same as the input address, then both messages
are automatically transmitted again to the controller.
If an ACT remains in the controller (target = controller, no periphery), then an ACTCON,

ACTTERM that is to be possibly simulated can be generated in 1 cycle pass. For this the cause
of transmission for the command must be set to 0 and the spontaneous bit to 1. Then one
ACTCON and one ACTTERM respectively will be transmitted.
Example:
LD 0
ST 0_045_001_001_001.COT
LD 1
ST 0_045_001_001_001.S
If this function is not used, the ACTCON and ACTTERM can also be generated individually (for
this at least 2 cycle passes are required).
Note
As of Revision 14 of the firmware CPC60 the corresponding type identification can be generated by means
of utilization of the command "with/without time" (for instance TI 45/TI 58).
With lower revision level only tipe identifications without time can be generated (for instance TI 45).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Single Command and Double Command

Single commands (TI 45) can be generated by the IL only with the states
0 (OFF) only with COT = 7, 10 (CON, TERM) and S = 1

1 (ON)
Double commands (TI 46) can be generated by the IL only with the states
01 (OFF)
10 (ON)
Other states will not generate a command.
5.2.1.7 Generation of Integrated Totals
There are two possibilities of integrated total generation in the controller
Spontaneous transmission with change.

Automatically if the input address is unequal to the output address of the controller.
Behavior according to parameter setting of the digital inputs (remote control).
Automatically if the input address is equal to the output address of the controller.
5.2.1.8 Reading System Errors
With the system variable PLC_SYSERROR_xxx (xxx = error number) system errors can be
read and linked further in the IL. An overview of the system errors that can be processed in
the ILcan be found in section C.1.1, Error Indications.
Example:
PLC_START
LD PLC_SYSERROR_006 (*queue overflow class 2 if bit="1"*)
ST M_BOOL_ERROR006 (*store in a flag*)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The integrated webserver of SICAM MIC contains functions for the loading and saving of data,
test, commissioning and diagnostics. These functions can be executed with the user interface
online:
Startup
Configuration
Diagnosis
Test functions
state of inputs/outputs
simulation of outputs
5.2.2.1 Initiate Startup (Warm Restart)
A startup of SICAM MIC can be initiated in two manners:
Operation of the telecontrol function (see section 5.1.6.1, Initiate Startup)

Switchover between blocked and enabled program execution (see Configuration)
Internal Procedure
With a startup of SICAM MIC all flags, times and counters used in the application program are
set to "0". All flags that are identified as non-volatile (retain), are loaded from NV-RAM. The
entire input process image of the controller is initialized with the current state of the periphery.
All other data are initialized with the following values:
Variable Value
T, PN, COT 0
ORIGINATOR 0
OV, S, GI, SB, BL, IV, CLASS1, CA, CY, SQ 0
NT 1
User data 0
Time 01:01:2000 00:00:00.000
The controller starts the operation only after the initialization.
Note
The communication (serial or Ethernet) is first begun after one single, complete pass of the cycle part of
the application program (PLC_START).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.2.2.2 Startup due to Application Program Change (Cold Restart)
After the loading of the application program, a startup is requested by SICAM MIC and per-
formed automatically.
This relates to the following possible operating functions (see Configuration):
Upload PLC Code

Recompile PLC Code
Erase PLC Code
Internal Procedure
The newly loaded IL is converted upon startup of the system automatically by a compiler and
written in a separate area of the Flash-PROM (checksum secured).
If the compiler detects a syntax error (violation of the language conventions), then the PLC is
stopped. In the masks Diagnosis | Overview and Diagnosis | History Diagnosis the sum
error PLC syntax error PLC halted is reported. On the master control module the red
ER-LED lights up.
If the compiler detects no error, two startups are carried out. Subsequently the application
program is processed from the Flash-PROM.
After the loading of the application program the sector of the NV-RAM is initialized for the con-
troller (either according to default or with the explicitly specified initialization values, see in
section 5.2.1.4, Settings in the Application Program).
The syntax errors are displayed in the mask PLC | Diagnosis under ERROR WHILE COMPILING.
In the mask PLC | Debug is displayed, whether the PLC is running or is stopped.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.2.2.3 Configuration
The functions for managing the optional IL are located in the menu tree under
PLC | Configuration.
The following functions are available:
PLC program execution

disable
enable
PLC Code
Upload
Download
Recompile
Erase from SIM card
To execute automation functions there must be an appropriate IL on the SIM card of the mas-
ter control module. The IL cannot be programmed directly on the SIM card, but rather only
created in the form of a text file on the PC. This file can then be transferred online to the SIM
card.
Note
The larger the IL the longer the loading and saving takes. The same is also applicable for the startup
operation, as well as all access- and screen updating times.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.2.2.3.1 Enable and Disable PLC Program Execution
With this function the execution of the application program can be disabled or enabled.
With disabled program execution the automation function is not active. For the data points that
are used in the IL the data flow changes: Data from the periphery are then sent directly to the
communication, data from the communication are sent directly to the periphery.
To switch over, under PLC PROGRAM EXECUTION select between disabled and enabled and
click with the mouse on the button Apply . The indication Parameter active after re-
set appears, since a startup of the system is required for activating the switchover. The
startup can be initiated directly by clicking on the interactive text reset.
With disabled program execution all variables (flags, timers and counters) remain reset, and
the outputs at their parameterized state. After renewed enabling, likewise a startup must be
carried out. The startup- and the initialization part of the application program are then pro-
cessed, before the cyclic program execution begins.
If the application program is disabled at the moment of a pass, then it is first processed com-
pletely and then remains stationary at the beginning (line 0). The test functions (see section
5.2.2.4, Test Functions) are irrelevant with program execution disabled.
Note
If no application program is loaded the program execution must be disabled, otherwise the red ER-LED
lights up and the information PLC enabled no PLC code available is output in the diagnosis.
5.2.2.3.2 Save and Load PLC Code
Save PLC Code

This function is used for saving the application program loaded in the PLC on the PC (online).
Click with the right mouse button on the logic operation DOWNLOAD PLC CODE (RIGHT CLICK, SAVE
TARGET AS). A browse window appears for selecting the target path and the target file. The
suggested file type plc should be retained.
Subsequently click on the button Save to write the file.
The target is a text file, that contains the application program code in ASCII format. The file
can be edited with any optional text editor (e.g. Notepad).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Load PLC Code

This function is used for loading the application program from PC to the SIM card in
SICAM MIC (upload).
To do this, enter the source path and the source file in the input line UPLOAD PLC CODE, or use
the button Browse to select the source file using the Browse window.
Then click the button Upload in order to write the IL to the SIM card.
After loading an IL and subsequent startup, SICAM MIC performs a Cold Restart. After that,
the PLC is running the application program cyclically or spontaneously.
Note
For the transmission over Ethernet it is recommended to deactivate the settings for HTTP 1.1 on your PC
(Control panel | Internet options | Advanced). Otherwise the possibility exists, that the trans-
ferred ASCII file of SICAM MIC can not be interpreted.
Save PLC Code (Offline)

Alternatively the application program can also be read from the SIM card offline with the help
of WEBmic and stored in a file. For this, the SIM card must be inserted in a read-/write device
installed on the engineering PC.
To do this, in the WEBmic pop-up menu click on the function Read PLC from SIM Card. A
browse window appears for selecting the target path and the target file. The file type plc is
fixed defined.
Load PLC Code (Offline)

Alternatively the application program can be written offline from a file to the SIM card with the
help of WEBmic. For this, the SIM card must be inserted in a read-/write device installed on the
engineering PC.
To do this, in the WEBmic pop-up menu click on the function Write PLC to SIM Card. A
browse window appears for selecting the source path and the source file. The file type plc is
fixed defined.
5.2.2.3.3 Recompile PLC Code
After an IL is loaded it is automatically compiled in the machine language specific for the sys-
tem. By means of a mouse click on the button PLC recompile this can be performed again
at any time.
The function is first activated with confirmation of a query. Subsequently a startup (cold re-
start) is required, which the system executes automatically.
All variables, including the non-volatile flags, are reset to their default values.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.2.2.3.4 Erase PLC Code from SIM Card
With a mouse click on the button PLC erase the IL is erased from the SIM card. The parame-
ters remain unaffected by this. An already existing IL is overwritten with renewed loading of an
IL, therefore no erasing is necessary.
The function is only activated with confirmation of a query. Subsequently a startup is required,
which the system executes automatically.
After each startup of the system, one must log on again. On the user interface the following in-
formation appears:
SIM Card writing. This procedure can last up to 30 seconds.

PLC compiling. This procedure can last up to 40 seconds.
In case of use of the serial interface the PPP connection must be
reestablished.
SICAM MIC Homepage (172.29.2.226)
The underlined output line is a hyperlink to the start page of the currently processed station
(the IP address specified here is to be regarded as an example).
In the menu PLC | Debug there are functions for test commissioning. In the lower adjustable
part of the mask the application program code (IL) loaded on the SIM card is output. Here the
application program code can be read online, but not changed.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The following test functions are available:
Program execution
Start
Stop
Stop at a command line
Stop dependent on variable
Variable
Read
Write
5.2.2.4.1 Start and Stop Program Execution
By means of the selection start or halt and mouse click on the button Apply you can halt or
start the program execution. Depending on the state the display changes in the mask PLC is
running or program halted at <line>. If the program execution remains halted after a
start attempt, there is an error or the program execution is disabled. Read the error messages
under Diagnosis | History Diagnosis or under PLC | Diagnosis.
In contrast to the function DISABLE PLC PROGRAM EXECUTION (see section 5.2.2.3.1, Enable and
Disable PLC Program Execution) a startup is not necessary to start and stop the program ex-
ecution.
After transfer of the stop command, a pass of the application program that has already begun
runs to the end, the application program remains stationary at the beginning of the cyclic exe-
cution (PLC_START). The momentary signal states are thereby retained, and variables can be
read out and overwritten. The data flow does not change, the data points from the communi-
cation and from the periphery continue to be sent only to the controller.
After a renewed start command, the application program begins again at the beginning of the
cyclic execution (without pass of the startup part and the initialization part).
5.2.2.4.2 Stop Program Execution at a Command Line
The program execution can be halted at an optional command line of the IL by entering the
number of the program line in the input field HALT PLC AT LINE and clicking the button Apply .
5.2.2.4.3 Stop Program Execution dependent on Variable
The program execution can be halted by comparing a variable with a constant. For this, enter
the name of the variable in the input field VARIABLE, select the required comparison operation
(==/</<=/>=/>) and enter the value at the right beside it.
As soon as the comparison is fulfilled, the application program is processed to the end and
halted at the beginning of the cyclic part.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
5.2.2.4.4 Read and Write Variable
The current values of variables can be read out or manually overwritten (simulated). Both are
only possible with enabled program execution.
The test function processes only the variables used in the IL. All type-specific attributes are
supported.
The syntax of the variable must correspond to the conventions for I/O variables and flags (see
section 5.2.1.2, Syntax for Instructions).
When simulating a variable the format of the input value must correspond with the data type
(BOOL, DINT, REAL). Always only one variable can be interchanged at one moment.
Permissible variable types are:
Binary input
Binary output
Analog input
Analog output
Flags
System variables, functions and function blocks have no test function.
Read Variable
In the corresponding pull-down menu select read. Write the name of the variable together
with attribute in the input line or copy it from the IL. Then click on the button Apply . The cur-
rent value of the variable is displayed in the field W ITH/IS.
Write Variable
In the corresponding pull-down menu select write. Write the name of the variable together
with attribute in the input line or copy it from the IL. Then click on the button Apply . Enter the
simulated value in the field WITH/IS. Then click on the button Apply to write the variable with
the value.
Note
With application program running the simulated value of a flag is statically overwritten. In contrast to this,
inputs/outputs are not statically overwritten, rather only with a change to their process image (edge-
triggered).
With application program stopped simulated values are retained.
After switching over between writing and reading, the button Apply must be clicked in order
to transfer the command. The writing or reading of a value takes place with each further click
of the button Apply .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
6 Maintenance
Contents
6.1 LED Displays on the Master Control Module ................................................. 196

6.2 I/O Module Monitoring .................................................................................. 197
6.3 Behaviour of the Outputs on Startup and Communication Failure.................. 198
6.4 Diagnosis ..................................................................................................... 199
6.5 Maintenance of the Hardware ....................................................................... 211
6.6 Firmware Update .......................................................................................... 214

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
6.1 LED Displays on the Master Control Module
LED Meaning Activated by Note

RDY Ready System readiness, module Goes out with startup, in opera-
readiness tion permanently lit if ready (also
applies for all other module types)
ER Error System error Lights up with startup, in opera-
tion terminated (no error) or
permanently lit (error)
OH0 Connection serial Every message that is sent Goes out with startup, lights up
over the serial interface (multi- permanently with established
point traffic); connection in dial-up traffic
Established connection (dial-up
traffic)
RTX0 Transmission/Reception Every message that is sent or Goes out with startup, flashes in
received over the serial inter- operation when sending or receiv-
face ing data
LNK1 Connection Ethernet Physical connection of the Goes out with startup, in opera-
master control module with the tion permanently lit (only master
Ethernet control module with Ethernet
interface)
RTX1 Transmission/Reception Every message that is sent or Goes out with startup, flashes in
received over the Ethernet operation when sending or receiv-
interface ing data (only master control
module with Ethernet interface)
6.1.1 LED Display upon Startup
As soon as the I/O module is supplied or a startup is triggered by power-on, the ER-LED on
the master control module lights up.
Subsequently the program memory is checked. If there is an error present in the PROM, then
the startup is not aborted, but the system is not READY (therefore no RY-LED, ER-LED lights
up). A diagnosis of the system must be carried out.
Since the ER-LED is activated via the firmware, the ER-LED also does not light up if a mas-
sive error occurs in the PROM that causes a failure of the firmware (see section 6.6.2.1, Er-
rors upon Loading the Firmware).
If the PROM-Test concludes without error, the RY-LED lights up on all configured modules.
Another test compares the I/O module configuration defined by parameters with the actual
physical configuration. If the configuration does not match, from the first faulty module all sub-
sequent modules are not READY (RY-LED does not light up). That means, that the removal of
already learned modules is only possible through re-parameterization of the configuration (pa-
rameter setting offline).
Note
If a faulty configuration of I/O modules for pulse commands is present, the pulse command output is
blocked (for all modules). A faulty configuration is also present if
– a DO-622x is configured, but no DO-6230
– a DO-6230 is configured, but no DO-622x
– more than one DO-622x is configured.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
6.2 I/O Module Monitoring
The I/O modules are checked cyclically for functioning over the TM Bus. A failure is detected
after max. 200 ms. The "RY" LED goes out on the corresponding I/O module.
After replacing the I/O module, failed I/O modules are started up again exclusively by running
up the master control element.
Caution
The module can only be replaced with the supply voltage turned off!

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
6.3 Behaviour of the Outputs on Startup and Communica-

tion Failure
The behavior of the outputs depends on the parameter "Failure mode" and the I/O module.
Fundamentally, with all modules that support the binary information output, the option exists to
"Terminate output" or "Keep output" with a communication failure.
An analog output module can "output a substitute value" or "terminate the output":
Error cause Description Action

Power-up Return of the operating volt- With power-up the substitute value is always
age after failure output; since no setpoint value has yet been
received, the parameterized substitute value
is calculated and taken in the process image
as act-value (active)
Reset Reset is possible via With a remote Reset the last value is always
Protocol reset, regardless of what has been parame-
Operation interface online terized; if no value has ever been received,
(web browser) the substitute value is output
Communication With communication failure at the master

failure master control control unit the substitute value is always
unit output
Failure of master With a failure of the master control unit the
control unit substitute value is output from the peripheral
element

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
6.4 Diagnosis
The following listing explains the different error categories and how the error messages are
logged.
Hardware errors
Monitoring of the individual system elements, configuration, communication and time syn-
chronization by the firmware. Logging online in
Activation of the red error-LED on the master control element
Diagnosis | Overview (errors present)
Diagnosis | History Diagnosis (time-tagged error messages, history)
Software errors
Monitoring by the firmware and logging online in
Diagnosis | Overview
Diagnosis | History Diagnosis (behavior of the PLC)
PLC | Diagnosis (errors when compiling the application program code, syntax of the
IL)
Parameter setting
SICAM TOOLBOX II: the input of the parameters is subjected to - as far as logically re-
cordable - parameter-specific conventions or plausibility checks. Faulty inputs are noti-
fied or directly prevented with the entry.
Web browser: If a in principle permitted parameter setting, that however does not
match the physically present system elements, is loaded into the target system, the
method of procedure is as with hardware errors.
Programming
SICAM TOOLBOX II: supervision by the CAEx plus compiler and logging in an error in-
formation list during compiling of the application program code.
Web browser: no supervision upon entry possible; error notification via PLC diagnosis.
Operator errors
Are largely excluded by the user interface. Naturally, all operator inputs, such as for ex-
ample the loading of parameters and application programs, are subject to the responsibil-
ity of the user. Profound knowledge of the automation technique in general, as well as the
documents mentioned in the preface, is presumed.
A list of error messages which are indicated in the diagnostic can be found in the Appendix
C.1.1, Error Indications.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
Note
The logging via diagnostic functions is for SICAM MIC only possible via a web browser.
6.4.1.1 Ax 1703 Error Message
Optionally, SICAM MIC sends the Ax error message, as a result a power network overview di-
agnostic with the SICAM TOOLBOX II in a central station is also effective for SICAM MIC.
Further diagnostics performed remotely are only possible when using the Ethernet interface
and web browser. With the serial connection (multi-point-/dial-up traffic) a remote diagnostic is
not possible, since no TCP/IP protocol is implemented. In this case a diagnostic is only possi-
ble with a web browser onsite.
Network overview diagnostic

The error messages of all automation units in the network are output in a report window with
the function Network overview diagnostic (sum information).
Structure of the Ax 1703 error message:
Bit No. Meaning Remarks

0 Internal errors PLC shut down
1 External errors TM module fault
2 Communication fault IEC 60870-5-104 connection failure
3 Test (not supported)
4 Warning Time not yet set
Since 60 min time not set
5 Module failure TM module failure
6 AU failure (not supported)
7 Startup Startup transient
These error bits are transmitted as single-point information. In SICAM MIC they are summa-
rized on two information object addresses (or-linked):
Property IOA bit Remarks

Fault 240 0, 1, 2 Parameter-settable
Failure 241 5, 6 Parameter-settable

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
6.4.1.2 Diagnosis of the Open-/Closed-Loop Control Function
Errors that can occur with the creation of the Function Diagram (for example the linking of a
binary signal to an analog input of a function) are displayed in a separate report window
("POU error check"):
Automatically with the incorrect input

Manually with the function Early error detection (pop-up menu in the Function Dia-
gram).
All editing errors can be displayed at any time.
The exact details can be found in the CAEx plus Online Help, chapter "Editors", section "FBD
Editor", section "Operation in FBD Editor".
Errors with engineering

Errors that can occur with engineering are displayed centrally in the "Error-state viewer" of
"CAEx plus". It essentially concerns thereby
Installation binary information

Export/Import binary information
Project management binary information
FBD editor binary information
Code generation binary information
Object-related binary information
Binary information of the object assistants
Binary information of the typical import
Signal list binary information
Binary information from hardware signal databases
The binary information are generated after the triggering of a function (for example "Code
generation").
The exact details can be found in the CAEx plus Online Help, chapter "Additional Products",
section "Error-State Viewer".
Errors with the target system connection

Errors that can occur with the target system connection are displayed centrally in the "Error-
state viewer" of "CAEx plus". It concerns thereby
General messages of the target system connection

Messages of the code generator
Messages of the control panel
Messages of the ONLINE applications
Messages of the "Open Operating System"
Messages of the target-system integration into the project management
Messages from "openPLC"
The exact details can be found in the CAEx plus Online Help, chapter "Target-System Con-
nection", section "Program Messages for Target-System Connection".
Note
An online diagnosis function of the tool "CAEx plus" is not supported for SICAM MIC.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
6.4.2 Web Browser
SICAM MIC contains various diagnostic functions for monitoring the system. Since the firm-
ware automatically executes the appropriate error monitoring routines, for this no settings of
any kind by the user are necessary.
Besides the parameter setting and the process visualization, the user interface online (web-
server) includes a diagnostic part for the visualization of status and error information.
The selection is carried out in the menu tree by clicking on Diagnosis:
Overview
History
Status Information
Time
6.4.2.1 Overview
By clicking on Diagnosis | Overview in the menu tree the overview mask is opened. Here
the most current errors are displayed for each module.
Display
An information display is present if unacknowledged or statical active errors are present. The
displayed system information are differentiated in
Error information
Errors acc. to Appendix C.1.1, Error Indications
Operation information
Time of the last change of parameters

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
Example 1:
An I/O module present in the configuration is not configured, startup with power-on.
Master control unit

No error
IOM 0:DO-6200
No error
IOM 1:DI-6100
No error
IOM 1:DI-6100
Hardware identification wrong
Example 2:
Sum error of two measured values through open-circuit (Live Zero Measurement).
Master control unit

No error
IOM 0:AI-6300
Error measured value 1 (invalid)
Error measured value 3 (invalid)
Acknowledging Errors
Errors that are no longer present can be acknowledged. To do this, click on the button Clear
and confirm with OK in the message box that opens. Following this the information errors
cleared appears in the current window.
Update the overview with a repeated click in the menu tree. If the errors are no longer present,
now the error texts are replaced with the display No error.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
6.4.2.2 System Diagnosis
By clicking on Diagnosis | History Diagnosis the information mask with the history is
opened. Here all system information together with time tag are displayed in chronological or-
der.
A maximum of 20 entries is possible. The signal list is a ring buffer, which means if the signal-
ing buffer has been fully written, the respective oldest signal entry is overwritten by the most
current.
Note
The signal list is cleared if the voltage supply of SICAM MIC is interrupted for at least 10s.
Display
An information display is present if unacknowledged or statical active errors are present. The
displayed system information is differentiated in
Error information
Errors acc. to Appendix C.1.1, Error Indications
Operation information
Logon
Logoff
Upload (load parameters)
Download (save parameters)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
Example:
Failure of a configured I/O module.
History Diagnosis
03.08.2004 10:15:01:446 Peripheral element 01 : Failure
03.08.2004 10:15:01:556 item number missing ON
03.08.2004 10:15:01:557 reset by hardware/power on : 3C 00
03.08.2004 10:20:00:401 queues cleared
Acknowledging Errors
Errors that are no longer actively present can be deleted from the signal list by clicking the
button Clear and confirming the query with OK .
Following this the information errors cleared appears in the current window. With a re-
newed clicking in the menu tree the updated signal list can be output.
If no new errors have been added only the information errors cleared appears in the in-
put/output mask.
6.4.2.3 System Status
By clicking on Diagnosis | Status information in the menu tree the status information mask
is opened. Here the identification features of the configured hardware is displayed module for
module.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
Display
If there is no error present, and the fitted hardware configuration matches the configured one,
the following information is displayed:
Item Number
Software version
SIM space (only master control module)
MAC Address (only master control module with Ethernet interface)
If a fitted module does not match with the configured module type, then the information wrong
hardware identification is displayed.
Example:
SICAM MIC configured with a power supply module, a master control module and three
I/O modules. Failure of a configured I/O module.
Status Information
PS-6620
item number: GC6-620-A.00/222-027
software version: 9-1.00
Master control unit

item number: GC6-040-A.01/326-006
Software version: 6
SIM size: 32768
MAC address: 00-E0-A8-01-10-A5
IOM 0:DO-6200
item number: GC6-200-A.00/222-055
IOM 1:DI-6100
item number: GC6-100-A.00/222-027
IOM 2:AI-6300
hardware identification wrong

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
6.4.2.4 Diagnosis of the Time
By clicking on Diagnosis | Time in the menu tree the diagnosis mask for the time is opened.
Here the time status can be read.
Display
The time status displays whether the time is set and synchronized, and whether the parame-
terized NTP-Servers are available (with communication via IEC 60870-5-104).
6.4.2.4.1 Time Synchronization
Multi-point Traffic
The time is transmitted to SICAM MIC from the control system (time master). So that an accu-
racy of 10 ms is achieved the time master must synchronize at least every 60 s.
Upon failure of the time synchronization after 10 min a warning will be set.
Dial-up Traffic
The time is transmitted to SICAM MIC from the control system (time master). A synchroniza-
tion can only take place each time a connection is established.
Ethernet
When using SNTP the current SNTP server is determined by means of "voting". This takes
place according to the weighting:
Attainability
Stand alone (SNTP server does not receive a time)
Distance (with regard to the time)
With communication via IEC 60870-5-104 upon failure of the time synchronization after the 3-
fold cycle time of the SNTP synchronization a warning will be set, or minimum after 10 min.
If the SNTP synchronization is not used, the warning will be set after 10 min.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
Example 1: Synchronized SICAM MIC.
status
OK: time set
status NTP server (actual: 0)

NTP 0 (172.29.31.10) : OK
NTP 1 (172.29.63.2) : NOK
NTP 2 (172.29.67.145) : NOK
NTP 3 (0.0.0.0) : NOK
Example 2: Not synchronized SICAM MIC.
status
Warning: time not set

Warning: time not synchronized for more than 10 minutes
status NTP server

NTP 0 (172.29.31.10) : NOK
NTP 1 (172.29.63.2) : NOK
NTP 2 (172.29.67.145) : NOK
NTP 3 (0.0.0.0) : NOK
6.4.2.4.2 Local Setting of the Time
Date and time of a SICAM MIC can be set also locally via the web browser (online). The val-
ues are read out from the parameterizing PC and updated permanently in the corresponding
input field under "local time set". Via the related pull-down menu it can be selected between
normal time or daylight saving time.
By clicking on the button Apply date and time are transmitted to the linked SICAM MIC.
After a refresh of the web browser the time display in the header will be updated.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
6.4.2.5 Diagnosis of the Open-/Closed-Loop Control Function
By clicking on PLC | Diagnosis in the menu tree the PLC diagnosis mask is opened. Here the
capacity of the CPU and the compiler errors (maximum 5 error messages) are displayed:
Message Meaning Note

Program running normal program execution
Program stopped at program execution halted, specifi- the application program can be
<Zeile> cation of the program line in which halted either manually or by the
the program is halted system due to an error
Cycle Time current cycle time if no cycle time is programmed it is
set to 100ms by the system
increase of the set cycle time by the
system is possible (see section
5.2.1.4.1, Setting the Cycle Time)
Current processing time processing time of the application
program at the moment the diag-
nosis window is updated
Maximum processing maximum achieved processing
time time of the application program
since the last startup
Single pass single processing programmed 0 = no
1 = yes
<Number> bytes from details of the program memory size of the Instruction List
16378 bytes code used occupied on the SIM card
<Number> bytes from details of the program memory flags and parameters of function
1024 bytes RAM used occupied in RAM blocks
<Number> bytes from 256 details of the program memory storage of non-volatile flags
bytes retain RAM used occupied in NV-RAM
Compiling errors display of the program errors that syntax, logic, false addressing
occurred compiling the IL exceeding of the limits for applica-
tion program size, cycle time,
memory cells

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
Outputs in the Diagnosis Mask

Example:
Cycle time set to 20 ms
program is running
cycletime (PLC_CYCLETIME): 20 ms
actual processing time (PLC_PROCESSINGTIME): 2 ms
maximum processing time: 8 ms
single processing on/off (PLC_SINGLE): 0
2750 bytes from 16378 bytes code used
0 bytes from 256 bytes retain RAM used
error while compiling:
E00: no error
Example:
Cycle time increase by the system
program is running
cycletime (PLC_CYCLETIME): 45 ms
actual processing time (PLC_PROCESSINGTIME): 15 ms
maximum processing time: 19 ms
single processing on/off (PLC_SINGLE): 0
0 bytes from 256 bytes retain RAM used
error while compiling:
E00: no error
In the example, the processing time successively exceeded the 50% of the programmed cycle
time (20 ms) five times and therefore the system has increased the cycle time to 30ms.
After again 50% of 30 ms has been exceeded five times in succession (max. processing time
19 ms), the system has again increased the cycle time by 50% (30 ms + 50% = 45 ms).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
6.5 Maintenance of the Hardware
6.5.1 General for the Replacement of Modules
Warning
For modules that operate with voltages >60 V (e.g.: DI-6101, DO-6212) care must be taken that manipula-
tion on the peripheral connectors may only be carried out in a de-energized state.
The reason for this is that when withdrawing the upper peripheral connector under voltage, the external
voltage can be conducted through the lower peripheral connector still connected. The pins of the upper
peripheral connector now freely accessible will now conduct the external voltage.
Warning
The connecting and withdrawal of peripheral modules is only permitted in a de-energized state, this means
that the power supply to the power supply unit and to the peripherals must be interrupted.
Detailed instructions for the assembly of modules can be found in the section 1.3.4, Installa-
tion and Removal of Modules.
To exchange a module tools are not required for either the hardware or the software:
the terminals can be detached without tools

the module can be detached from the DIN rail without tools
to remove the SIM card a ballpoint pen or a pencil is required
the user data (parameters and IL) are stored non-volatile on the SIM card
Independent of the firmware code the following information is stored non-volatile in

SICAM MIC:
Parameter Initialization with Handling during

completion Runtime
EEPROM SIM card EEPROM SIM card
Telecontrol parameters x
*)
Application program x x
MAC address x
Operating hours counter x
Item- and serial number of the x
module
*)
retained flags

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
6.5.2 Replacement of the Master Control Module
When replacing the master control module the SIM card can be withdrawn and inserted in the
new master control module. No project data (parameters and application program) are lost.
When switching over to another module type (e.g. CP-6020 to CP-6040) the configuration
must be adapted accordingly by means of parameter setting offline.
Caution
If the SIM card is put into another master control, then during startup the content of the decentralized
archive (DEAR) on the SIM card will be deleted and an error information is recorded in the History Diagno-
sis.
6.5.3 Replacement of the SIM Card
Where the SIM card is and how it is withdrawn or inserted is described in the section 3.4, SIM
Card.
New SIM cards can be ordered from Siemens (see SICAM MIC System Description, appendix
"System Components", section "Accessories").
Caution
The SIM card should only be withdrawn from or inserted into a de-energized master control module. The
content of a SIM card can become invalid if it is removed during a running writing operation. The content of
the SIM card must if necessary be deleted and written again new. After inserting the SIM card a startup of
the system is to be executed.
During the operation of SICAM MIC no access to the SIM card takes place by the system.
Therefore no error is reported if for example the SIM card is withdrawn.
In operation the system only accesses the SIM card with operator inputs such as loading pa-
rameters, loading PLC code or by selection of the test mask (display of the IL).
With each startup of SICAM MIC the system accesses the SIM card and checks it.
The following problems can occur with the SIM card:
SIM card not legible

The red ER-LED is activated. If the IP address is no longer legible, then the station con-
cerned can no longer be accessed by means of the web browser.
Data on the SIM card are faulty
The system detects a checksum error. In this case the SIM card is overwritten with default
parameters. This is also applicable if a new SIM card is inserted in the master control
module (no differentiation between faulty data or new SIM card).
The following error messages refer to problems with the SIM card:
SIM not available (SIM card not present or not legible)

SIM checksum error, PLC halted (check of the memory space for parameters and
temporary data with startup)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
6.5.3.1 Read and Write complete SIM Card
To be able to save or also duplicate the parameterization and the application program entirely,
WEBmic offers the both functions SIM Card Reader | Read entire SIM Card (Image) and
SIM CarD Reader | Write entire SIM CarD (Image).
6.5.3.2 Erase Content of the SIM Card
To erase the content of the SIM card, insert it into a read-/write device installed on the engi-
neering PC.
In the WEBmic pop-up menu select the function SIM Card Reader | Erase complete SIM
Card and click on OK .
The content of the SIM card is erased.
How to write a project backup on a SIM card is described in section 5.1.3.4, Save and Load
Parameters (offline) and in section 5.1.4.3, Save and Load Parameters (online).
6.5.4 Replacement of an I/O Module
When replacing an I/O module with the same module type no renewed parameter setting is
necessary. The parameters already stored on the SIM card are automatically used on the new
module.
6.5.5 Removal of an I/O Module
A removed or failed I/O module is detected online by SICAM MIC and signaled on the user in-
terface (Diagnosis | Overview and Diagnosis | History Diagnosis).
If an I/O module is to be removed later, then this must be parameterized offline, otherwise
SICAM MIC reports the module as faulty.
6.5.6 Adding an I/O Module
A new I/O module can be added, without a parameter setting being necessary. The system
detects the new module automatically with a startup, provides it with the default values and
displays it online in the menu tree of the user interface. That means, if only parameters with
default values are used with an I/O module, the system can also be expanded without user in-
terface.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
6.6 Firmware Update
A firmware update in SICAM MIC can be carried out exclusively with the program FLASHmic.
6.6.1 Establish Mechanical Connection with the Target System
For the execution of a firmware update you require the following configuration:
PC with FLASHmic
Connection with the master control module (serial or Ethernet)
Note
A serial connection via modem is not supported.
A connection via Ethernet is no longer supported as of FLASHmic resp. CPC60 revision 24.04!
Local serial
FLASHmic flash loader

TF5-204--
Ethernet
Ethernet TCP/IP 60870-5-104
Standard patch cable
FLASHmic flash loader

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
6.6.2 Load Firmware
For the loading of the firmware via Ethernet, an operable firmware must be present in
SICAM MIC.
If the file FLASHmic.exe is stored on the PC and you have connected the PC with the master
control element, you can begin with the firmware update.
Click (double-click) in the Windows Explorer on the file FLASHmic.exe to start the loading op-
eration.
Click OK to close the Splash Screen.
Select the language in which the firmware update is to be carried out and proceed with Next .
Select the required interface and start the firmware update with Next . When selecting the
Ethernet interface, you must also enter the IP address.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
FLASHmic now begins with the checks of the connection and the hardware of the target sys-
tem. Only when FLASHmic has confirmed all checks with OK does the actual loading operation
begin. The duration of the loading operation is dependent on the physical connection. With
operation via Ethernet the transfer time is influenced by the number of active participants and
by the volume of data traffic on the bus.
The loading operation is concluded free of errors when the information check firm-
ware ... OK appears. Then click on Next and Finish to close FLASHmic.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance
6.6.2.1 Errors upon Loading the Firmware
When loading the firmware into the Flash-PROM this is written completely new. For a perfect
functioning of the master control element it is therefore absolutely necessary that this proce-
dure completes without errors.
If FLASHmic terminates the loading procedure with the message Error, click on the button
Cancel . Afterwards start FLASHmic again and attempt to execute the loading operation
again. If an error occurs again, the master control element is no longer capable of functioning;
check the LED-display.
The following situations cause the master control element to be no longer capable of function-
ing:
Voltage failure while the loading procedure is running

Abortion of FLASHmic by the user while the loading procedure is running
Failure (defect, shutdown) of the PC
Abortion of the application program due to a hardware error
Abortion or excessively long fault of the communication connection between PC and
SICAM MIC
Note
A master control element that is no longer capable of functioning can be recognized, if after a startup of
SICAM MIC the yellow RDY-LED and the red ER-LED on the master control element do not light up. In
this case, please consult the Customer Support Center.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Maintenance

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7 Parameter Setting Instruction
Contents
7.1 System Settings ........................................................................................... 220

7.2 Time Settings ............................................................................................... 222
7.3 Communication ............................................................................................ 223
7.4 Hardware Configuration ................................................................................ 239
7.5 Process Periphery ........................................................................................ 240
7.6 Decentralized Archive................................................................................... 340
7.7 Automation ................................................................................................... 348

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.1 System Settings
The following table shows those parameters or possible settings that are effective for the en-
tire master control element.
Parameter Choice Meaning/Note

Common Address of 0…65535 65535 (default); region- and component num-
ASDU (CASDU) ber together
CASDU1 0…255 Corresponds to the region number
CASDU2 0…255 Corresponds to the component number
CASDU - Results from CASDU1 and CASDU2
Customer 18 signs Name of customer
Plant 18 signs Name of plant
Station name 18 signs Name of station
Own IP address 32 bit IP address IP address of the serial PPP adapter
172.16.0.1 default (no subnetmask)
Remote IP address (if 32 bit IP address Assigned IP address of the PPP adapter of the
negotiate) remote station
172.16.0.2 default (no subnetmask)
Own MAC address 1) fixed The fixed hardware address of the Ethernet
adapter
Own IP address 1) 32 bit IP address IP address of the Ethernet adapter
172.16.0.3 default
Subnetmask 1) 32 bit subnetmask Subnetmask for the classification of the IP
address;
0.0.0.0 (default = not used).
Interface 1) Halfduplex Fullduplex setting is often required if the
Fullduplex SICAM MIC is remote via glass fibre converter;
halfduplex default
Default Gateway (Rout- 32 bit IP address IP address of default router
er) 1) 0.0.0.0 default (not used)
Old Administrator pass- 8 signs Old login password for the administrator profile
word
New Administrator 8 signs New login password for the administrator
password profile
New Administrator 8 signs Confirmation of password for the administrator
password profile
Old Guest password 8 signs Old login password for the guest profile
New Guest password 8 signs New login password for the guest profile
New Guest password 8 signs Confirmation of password for the guest profile
3)
Usage of D01 output Output Output type on the master control element
Error output 4) (output default)
Watchdog 5)
Error message enabled selected Error message enabled
2)
not selected Error message not enabled
Region number 2) 0…255 Region number for Ax error message
2)
Component number 0…255 Component number for Ax error message
Error 0…255/0…255/0…255 240/0/0 default; 0/0/0 = not used; type of error
information (single-point information)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

Failure 0…255/0…255/0…255 241/0/0 default; 0/0/0 = not used; type of error
information (single-point information)
Remote control via WEB selected Enabled (default)
enabled not selected Not enabled
Compatibility of Ax 1703 Mode Details see Protocol Configuration
SICAM MIC SK 1703 Mode
Acquisition grid of TM 10 ms Scanning of the I/O modules by the master
modules 2.5 ms control element
IEC60870-5-101/104 ACTCON (7) and If ACTCON, ACTERM is not used, all com-
cause of transmission ACTTERM (10) used mands and setpoint commands sent to the
ACTCON (7), ACTCON (7) and PLC are processed like single-point infor-
ACTTERM (10) ACTTERM (10) not used mation items (entry in the "chronological ring"
instead of "global chronological ring")
1)
these parameters exist only for CP-6040
2)
these parameters exist only in the Ax mode
3)
the output can be activated only by means of the application program
4)
the error output is open (logical "0") if the error LED lights up
5)
the watchdog contact is open (logical "0") if the master control element fails

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.2 Time Settings
Daylight saving time offset 0…60 min 60 min default; 0=no switchover
Switching rule for daylight-saving Last Beginning of summer time
time 2. last Varying depending on nation or federal
3. last state, a switchover rule is applicable that is
4. last defined either positive counting or negative
5. last counting
First
Example: last Sunday in March at 2:00
Second
hours
Third
Fourth
Fifth
Weekday for daylight-saving time Monday…Sunday Daylight-saving time on (+)
Month for daylight-saving time January…December Daylight-saving time on (+)
Hour for daylight-saving time 0…23 Daylight-saving time on (+)
Minute for daylight-saving time 0…59 Daylight-saving time on (+)
Switching rule for daylight-saving Last Beginning of normal time
time 2. last Varying depending on nation or federal
3. last state, a switchover rule is applicable that is
4. last defined either positive counting or negative
5. last counting
first Example: last Sunday in October at
Second
03:00:00 hours
Third
Fourth
Fifth
Weekday for daylight-saving time Monday…Sunday Daylight saving time off (-)
Month for daylight-saving time January…December Daylight saving time off (-)
Hour for daylight-saving time 0…23 Daylight saving time off (-)
Minute for daylight-saving time 0…59 Daylight saving time off (-)
7.2.1 Time Synchronization
The internal clock of the SICAM MIC is set and synchronized remotely – dependent on the
used method of communication. Thereto SICAM MIC supports
the time synchronization command (Type Identification 103) without run time correction
the "Simple Network Time Protocol" (SNTP) with communication via Ethernet LAN and In-
ternet GPRS (Ax, only CP-6040)
the setting of date and time by the user online.
A serial time setting and a minute pulse are not supported. SICAM MIC can not be used as a
time master.
Note
If SICAM MIC is not time set, then all data are transmitted with relative time (beginning with 01.01.2000),
and the time is flagged as invalid. In this mode no automatic daylight-saving time switchover takes place.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.3 Communication
7.3.1 Protocol Configuration
SICAM MIC provides the following transmission methods for the data transmission, for that
different transmission facilities and settings are applicable, respectively.
Compatibility Mode Protocol
Ax mode IEC 60870-5-101 Multi-point traffic (serial)

IEC 60870-5-101 Dial-up traffic (serial)
IEC 60870-5-104 (Ethernet, LAN)
IEC 60870-5-104 (Internet, GPRS)
No communication
SK mode Multi-point traffic (PCBMxx)
Repeater operation (SKSZxx)
SK Mode
For the connection of SICAM MIC to existing networks with SK 1703 there are 2 compatible
protocols implemented:
SKSU41
PCBS09
SICAM MIC can therefore operated in multipoint traffic with SK 1703 or AK 1703 central sta-
tions with the protocols SKSZ40 and PCBM09. By means of that also a combination of
SK 1703, MK 1703, µK 1703 and Ax 1703 in existing multipoint traffic lines is possible.
The following limitations apply for the utilization of the SK mode:
No real-time tagging
No remote maintenance possible
No remote diagnostics possible
The record number is fixed preset to 1
The assignment of the data type to the data format identifier is fixed (as with MK 1703 and
µK 1703)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.3.1.1 Transmission Facilities
7.3.1.1.1 Multi-point Traffic (Ax, SK) and Repeater Operation (SK)
The following transmission facilities and transmission rates can be selected:
Transmission facility Operating Transmission rate Power

mode supply
Modem for "4-wire circuit RS-232 50/200/300/600/1200 5 V 2)
transmission line" (CE-0700) 5)
Modem for "2-wire circuit RS-232 50/200/300/600/1200 5 V 2)
Modem for "4-wire circuit RS-232 50/200/300/600/1200/2400 5 V 3)
transmission line" (CE-0701)
delayed 5)
4)
DLC Modem (CE-0740, CE- RS-232 4800/19200
0741) 1)
4)
DMS (ring configuration) RS-232 50/150/200/300/600/1200/
2400/4800/ 9600/19200
DMS (ring configuration AE RS-232 600/1200/2400 5 V 3)
with remote CE-0701)
Direct connection RS-232 50/150/200/300/600/1200/ -
2400/4800/ 9600/19200
4)
Radio digital RS-232 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200
4)
Radio analog RS-232 300/600/1200/2400/4800
CM-0827 optical 1) RS-232 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200 5 V 3)
1)
only supported in the Ax mode
2)
internally via the 9-pole D-SUB plug of the master control module or externally (selectable)
3)
internally via the 9-pole D-SUB plug of the master control module (fixed)
4)
must be supplied externally acc. to declaration of the manufacturer
Note
With communication via and internal supply of CE-070x, a special connection cable is required. Via this
Y cable the modem is also supplied with voltage.
Order information on additional equipment exists in SICAM MIC System Description, appendix “Order
Information”, section “Accessories”.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Time Settings of the Transmission Facilities

The following table shows the time settings of the individual transmission facilities. These
cannot be changed in the SICAM MIC configuration.
RTS
Transmission facility fixed tp tv tn tdis DCD tbs tstab tcl tdly
Modem for "4-wire circuit No 0 30 5 0 No 0 0 0 0
Modem for "2-wire circuit No 0 30 5 35 Yes 5 5 60000 200
Modem for "4-wire circuit No 0 55 5 0 No 0 0 0 0
delayed
CM-0827 optical No 0 1 0 0 No 0 0 0 0
DLC Modem No 0 1 1 0 No 0 0 0 0
DMS (ring configuration) No 0 10 10 0 No 0 0 0 0
DMS (ring configuration AE No 0 50 10 35 Yes 5 5 60000 200
with remote CE-0701)
Direct connection Yes 0 0 0 0 No 0 0 0 0
Radio digital No 30 100 30 50 Yes 10 5 0 200
Radio analog No 50 300 50 100 Yes 10 5 0 200
Time specifications in milliseconds

tp Break Time before switch on the transmit part
Before a message is transmitted the set pause time (tp) is waited before the transmit
signal level (RTS) is switched on.
tv Setup time after RTS ON
After the transmit signal level (RTS) is switched on the message transmission is started
after the set-up time (tv) has expired.
tn Reset time
After the message transmission has ended the transmit signal level (RTS) is first swit
ched off after expiry of the reset time (tn).
tdis Disable Time
To prevent interface errors, on reception of a message the possibility exists of deactiva
ting the receiver for a parameterized time.
tbs Bounce suppression time
With a change to the DCD-input from a stable state (active/inactive) the bounce sup
pression time is started.
tstab Stability monitoring time
After the bounce suppression time has expired, the stability monitoring time is started.
The "new" DCD-state is first used for the message synchronization after stability moni
toring time has expired.
tcl Continuous level monitoring time
Serves to detect a "countinuous level" on the line possible causes are for instance: de-
st
fective transmission equipment, noise level). The monitoring time is started with the 1
edge (inactive -> active) at the DCD-input and stopped again with going DCD-input (ac
tive -> inactive) after the bounce suppression- and the stability monitoring time has
expired. On detection of a countinuous level a fault is signaled.
tdly Transmission delay
A message transmision is started with "active DCD-input" at the latest on expiry of the
transmission delay.
Note
The time values for t p, tv and tdly are used to calculate the expected acknowledgement time!

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The following graphic shows a data transmission procedure from the view of the transmitter.
t dis t bs
RTS
t dly
DCD
tp tv tn t bs
TXD
RXD
7.3.1.1.2 Dial-Up Traffic (Ax)
The following transmission facilities and transmission rates can be selected:
Transmission facility Type Transmission rate Power

supply
Coherent Eurocom 24 Analog 1200 10 VDC 2)
Westermo TD-32 1) Analog 9600 4)
Westermo TD-35 1) Analog 9600 4)
Westermo TD-36
Westermo TDW-33
Kabelmetall LGM 64k 1) ISDN 4800/9600/19200 4)
4)
Westermo ID-90 ISDN 4800/9600/19200
Westermo IDW-90
Siemens M20 GSM 9600 10 VDC 3)
Siemens TC35 1)
Cinterion MC52iT
Falcom A2
Wavecom WMOD2
(transparent) 5)
Siemens M20 GSM 9600 10 VDC 3)
Siemens TC35 1)
Cinterion MC52iT
Falcom A2
Wavecom WMOD2
5)
(non-transparent)
4)
Insys GSM 4.1 GSM 9600
4)
Sepura Terminal TETRA 4800/9600/19200/38400
1)
product withdrawn
2)
internally via the 9-pole D-SUB plug of the master control module (fixed)
3)
internally via the 9-pole D-SUB plug of the master control module or externally (selectable)
4)
5)
transparent: AT+CBST=7,0,0; non-transparent (mode for Switzerland): AT+CBST=7,0,1
Note
With communication via TC35 or MC52iT and internal supply, a special connection cable is required. Via
this Y cable the modem is also supplied with voltage.
Order information on additional equipment exists in the SICAM MIC System Description, appendix “Order
Information”, section “Accessories”.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Settings of the Transmission Facilities

The following table shows the settings of the individual transmission facilities. These cannot
be changed in the SICAM MIC configuration.
Parameter Coherent Siemens Westermo Westermo Sepura Insys GSM

Eurocom24 M20, TC35 TD-36 IDW-90 Terminal 4.1
Command mode
Number of data bits 8 8 8 8 8
Number of stop bits 1 1 1 1 1
Parity None None None None None
Terminator <CR><LF> <CR><LF> <CR><LF> <CR><LF> <CR>
Message termina- - - - - -
tion
Data mode
Number of data bits 8 8 8 8 8
Number of stop bits 1 1 1 1 1
Parity None None None None None
Terminator <CR><LF> <CR><LF> <CR><LF> <CR><LF> <CR>
Terminator ASCII - - - - -
mode
CRC generator Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
polynom
Connection setup AT Hayes AT Hayes AT Hayes AT Hayes AT Hayes
(procedure) ETSI
Evaluate Modem No Yes No No Yes
information
Automatic call No No No No No
acception by Mo-
dem
Call acception on Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
call acception delay
Connection setup No No No No Yes
via command
Send escape se- No No No No Yes
quence with AT
Hayes
Use DCD with AT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Hayes
SMS
Besides the communication within the system combination, the dial-up traffic offers additional-
ly the possibility to send SMS for up to 8 binary information items. Thereby the modems
named above are supported.
For each of the 8 single-point or double-point information items can be defined, whether upon
occurrence of the coming, going, or coming and going edge of the information a trigger for a
SMS is generated.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Analog Modem
For the SMS sending via an analog phone line a connection to a phone provider is estab-
lished. Therefore a paid value added network service is required.
After setting up the connection to a phone provider the SMS message is sent via the TAP pro-
tocol. If no connection setup is achieved, a recent connection setup is performed after a fixed
break time of one minute.
Note
The UCP protocol is not supported.
GSM Modem
For the sending of SMS the AT-Hayes command record supported by the modem is used.
If a message is generated which shall be sent to the central station as well as being sent as
SMS, always first the connection setup to the central station takes place, and then the SMS is
sent.
For the initiation of an SMS a single-point information as well as a double-point information

can be used, whereby it can be differentiated when an SMS message shall be generated (def-
inition of the parameters "IOA1, 2, 3" and the corresponding pull-down menu).
The phone number to which the SMS shall be sent is settable.
Structure of an SMS:
Plant name
Station name
Text designation of the message (if set)
State of the information: off, on, intermediate position (0-0), faulty position (1-1)
Event time tag: day:month:year:hour:minute:second:millisecond
IOA of the data point
7.3.1.1.3 Ethernet, LAN (Ax, only CP-6040)
The IEC 60870-5-104 protocol is a transmission protocol on OSI-layer 5-7 for the communica-
tion between control systems or between master stations and remote terminal units. For OSI-
layer 3+4 the TCP/IP protocol is implemented.
In contrast to the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol, which establishes connections over serial inter-
faces, the IEC 60870-5-104 interface enables the communication over networks (Local Area
Network "LAN" and Wide Area Network "WAN"). Thereby common network components such
as switches and routers can be used.
The IEC 60870-5-104 protocol uses a signal-orientated data model. Every message repre-
sents one data point, such as for instance a measured value, a setpoint value or a command.
This message is thereby defined by an address and a data type. The address then determines
which signal is concerned, whereby the transmitter and the receiver must know the meaning
of the address.
For the transmission of data a "TCP connection" is set up between 2 participating stations.
One station can set up an independent connection to several different stations. Each station
has equal access and can spontaneously perform a data transmission.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
General Functions
Communication between one station and one or more remote stations (IEC 60870-5-104)
LAN/WAN Communication via Ethernet TCP/IP according to IEC 60870-5-104

Supported functionality according to document SICAM RTUs Interoperability
IEC 60870-5-101/104
Acquisition of events (transmission of data ready to be sent)
General interrogation, outstation interrogation
Clock synchronization
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)
Up to 4 different SNTP servers can be interrogated (redundancy)
Cyclic, can be set in a seconds grid; self-adapting
Command transmission
Supervision of maximum transport delay in control direction (command received too
late)
Transmission of integrated totals
At one time, exactly one SICAM TOOLBOX II can be served
Functions for supporting redundant communication routes
Redundant connections managed by the master control element and/or protocol ele-
ment (according to IEC 60870-5-104 Edition 2.0)
controlling station
controlled station
Synchronous redundant connections
7.3.1.1.4 Internet, GPRS (Ax, only CP-6040)
Communication via GPRS is an expansion of GSM. The substation and the central station are
connected each via router and firewall with a wireless radio network. The router in the central
station establishes the connection to the respective network provider via the internet.
Each substation establishes a VPN tunnel to the central station. The Virtual Private Network
permits to establish a safe and encrypted connection via an unsafe network. The spontaneous
data transmission via the VPN tunnel is performed by means of Ethernet TCP/IP and the
standardized network protocol IEC 60870-5-104.
Transmission facility Transmission rate Power supply
*)
Wavecom M1206B-ON Autobauding;
Fastrack Modem GSM, download max. 43.2 kbps,
GPRS Class 10 upload max. 28.8 kbps
*)
Cisco Router 1711-VPN/K9 10/100 Mbps
VPN/Security Package
*)
Note
For the communication via GPRS an additional connection cable is required.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.3.1.2 Message Settings (Ax)
Maximum length (bytes) 0…255 Message length; 100 default,

0 = no chaining (1 element per message)
Faulty marking NT bit/IV bit Internally always the NT bit is used
1)
Link address 0…65535 represents the station number; 1 default
1)
Bytes link address 1 byte/2 byte 1 byte default
1)
Bytes CASDU 1 byte/2 byte IEC-60870-5-101 (1 byte Component No.
and 1 byte Region No.); 2 byte default
Bytes IOA 1) 1 byte/2 byte/3 byte IEC-60870-5-101 (describes the DP ad-
dress); 3 byte default
nd
Bytes COT 1) 1 byte/2 byte With 2 byte the 2 byte is always 0
1)
Bytes time tag 3 byte/7 byte Length of time tag of information objects
Monitoring direction
Single-point information TI 1: without time tag without real-time
TI 30: with time tag with 7 byte real-time
Double-point information TI 3: without time tag without real-time
Measured value normal- TI 9: without time tag without real-time
ized TI 34: with time tag with 7 byte real-time
Measured value scaled TI 11: without time tag without real-time
Measured value TI 13: without time tag without real-time
floatingpoint TI 36: with time tag with 7 byte real-time
Count TI 15: without time tag without real-time
End of initialization TI 70 2)
Command direction
Single-point information TI 1 without real-time
TI 2 with 3 byte real-time
TI 30 2) with 7 byte real-time
Single command TI 45 without real-time
Double command TI 46 without real-time
Setpoint value normalized TI 48 without real-time
Setpoint value scaled TI 49 without real-time
Setpoint value TI 50 without real-time
floatingpoint TI 63 2) with 7 byte real-time
General interrogation com. TI 100 2)
Counter interrogation com. TI 101 2)
Clock synchronization TI 103 2)
Test command TI 104
TI 107 2) with 7 byte time
1)
applies only for multi-point traffic and dial-up traffic
2)
fixed preset

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.3.1.3 Message Settings (SK)
Station number 0…99

Address conversion
SK 1703 SICAM MIC
Source component num- CASDU2 = 255
ber
Data type see "Monitoring direction", "Command
direction"
Source module number Station number
MOD 20 = 1
Source value number IOA (<=31)
Bit number IOA2
IOA 3 (=0)
Data type Bit number
Singlepoint 0, 1, 2, … 15
Doublepoint 0, 2, 4, … 14
Measurand normalized 0, 1, 2, … 15
Monitoring direction
SICAM MIC type TI SK 1703 type Data type DFK
Single-point 1 16 single-point information nrt 8 03
Double-point 3 8 double-point information MG/MA nrt 10 43
Measurand normalized 9 11 bit binary value + sign nrt 2 10
Measurand scaled 11 15 bit binary value + sign nrt 3 20
Measurand floatingpoint 11 32 bit floating-point value nrt 13 08
Integrated total 15 31 bit binary value + sign nrt 4 30
Command direction
SICAM MIC type TI SK 1703 type Data type DFK
Singlepoint 1 16 single-point information nrt 8 03
Single command 45 1 single-point command nrt 11 04
Setpoint command nor- 48 11 bit binary value + sign nrt 2 10
malized
Setpoint command scaled 49 15 bit binary value + sign nrt 3 20
Setpoint command 50 32 bit floating-point value nrt 13 08
Floatingpoint
General interrogation 100 system message 0 05
command
Counter interrogation 101 system message 0 05
command

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.3.2 Protocol Settings
7.3.2.1 Multi-Point Traffic (Ax)

Power supply modem internal Internal = supply of an external modem is
1) provided by the PS-66xx (default),
external
external = external supply
Radio circuit identifier 0…255 Identification of the radio circuit;
0 default (not used)
Repeater operation yes Communication via intermediate stations;
no "no" default
Monitoring timeout 0…6535.5 s Test call for checking the connection;
3 min default
DLC frequency range 2) 30…90 kHz 183.82 bit/s Modulation method of the DLC Modem
30…90 kHz 369.09 bit/s
30…90 kHz 744.05 bit/s
30…90 kHz 1512.10 bit/s
30…90 kHz 3125.00 bit/s
30…90 kHz 6696.43 bit/s
30…90 kHz 245.10 bit/s
30…90 kHz 429.13 bit/s
30…90 kHz 992.06 bit/s
30…90 kHz 2016.13 bit/s
30…90 kHz 4166.67 bit/s
30…90 kHz 5681.82 bit/s
30…90 kHz 367.65 bit/s
30…90 kHz 738.19 bit/s
30…90 kHz 1488.10 bit/s
10…30 kHz 3024.19 bit/s
10…30 kHz 61.27 bit/s
10…30 kHz 123.03 bit/s
10…30 kHz 248.02 bit/s
10…30 kHz 504.03 bit/s
10…30 kHz 1041.67 bit/s
10…30 kHz 2232.14 bit/s
10…30 kHz 81.70 bit/s
10…30 kHz 164.04 bit/s
10…30 kHz 330.69 bit/s
10…30 kHz 672.04 bit/s
10…30 kHz 1388.89 bit/s
10…30 kHz 1893.94 bit/s
10…30 kHz 122.55 bit/s
10…30 kHz 246.06 bit/s
10…30 kHz 496.03 bit/s
10…30 kHz 1008.06 bit/s
1)
applies only for CE-0701 or CE-0702
2)
applies only for the DLC Modem

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.3.2.2 Multi-Point Traffic (SK)

*)
Power supply modem internal Internal = supply of an external Modem is provid-
external ed by the PS-66xx (default),
Packing for broadcast unpacked In the master station the setting for SICAM MIC
telegram from the packed must be "unpacked"; if another station is set as
master "packed", the setting here must be "packed";
"unpacked" default
Retry count 0…192 2 default
180 s default
Component number in not available Specifies whether a component number is includ-
transmit direction available ed in transmit direction;
"not available" default
receive direction available ed in receive direction;
"available" default
*)
7.3.2.3 Repeater Operation (SK)

*)
Power supply modem internal Internal = supply of an external modem is provid-
Radio circuit identifier 0…255 Identification of the radio circuit;
Repeater operation yes/no Communication via intermediate stations;
no default
3 min default
transmit direction available ed in transmit direction;
"not available" default
receive direction available ed in receive direction;
"available" default
*)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.3.2.4 Dial-Up Traffic (Ax)

2) 4)
PIN 0…65535 Pin code of the GSM modem;
Line modulation 2) V.32
V.110
B channel protocol 3) V.110
X.75
Own phone number 3) 18 digits
Modem power supply 2) internal Internal = supply of an external modem is provid-
Redundant operation to selected
2 central stations not selected
Main number 18 digits Telephone number of the central station
Fallback number 1 18 digits Fallback number, if main number not available
Login password 8 signs Dial-up password: also to be set in the central
station;
"SAT TEST" default
Number of retry dials 0…255 Number of total retry dials;
5 default
Pause after dial 0…65535 ms Time interval between the retry dials;
60 s default
Cycle time daily Weekday when a test call is made;
every Monday "daily" default
every Tuesday
every Wednesday
every Thursday
every Friday
every Saturday
every Sunday
Time for monitoring no monitoring Time of day when a test call is made;
00 (hour) 00 (minute) 08:00 default
: :
23 (hour) 59 (minute)
Spontaneous connec- with class 1 data
tion no
Delay of call acception 0…20 s the modem responses only if the call is not ac-
1) cepted within this time by a parallel switched
phone;
"not selected" default
Phone provider 1) A1 SMS (Austria) SMS: supported providers for sending;
D1 Alpha Service for the SMS sending via an analog phone line a
(Germany) connection to a phone provider is established
E-Plus SMS (Germany)
one2one (Great Britain)
Telepage private (Swit-
zerland)
Telephone line via selected SMS: defines if the modem is operated at an
telephone extension not selected extension station of a phone system;
station 1) "not selected" default

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

Send international area selected SMS: defines if the international area code shall
code 1) not selected be sent too;
"not selected" default
1) 2)
Phonenumber 18 digits SMS: telephone number of the receptor
At IOA1,2,3 1) 2) 0…255/0…255/0…255 SMS: address of the data point to be reported;
0/0/0 default
And 1) 2) change SMS: defines when the respective data point
raising edge (event) shall be sent;
falling edge "raising edge" default
0/0/0 default
0/0/0 default
0/0/0 default
0/0/0 default
0/0/0 default
0/0/0 default
0/0/0 default
1)
applies only for Coherent Eurocom 24, Westermo TD-36
2)
applies only for Siemens M20/Siemens TC35/Falcom A2/Wavecom WMOD2
3)
applies only for Westermo IDW-90
4)
applies only for Insys GSM 4.1
The connection setup takes place spontaneously at change of a data point (class 1 data) or
on request of a data point by the master control (class 2 data).
For measured values of the class 1 the connection setup takes place at reaching of a settable
threshold.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.3.2.5 Ethernet LAN and Internet GPRS (Ax, only CP-6040)

Own MAC address fixed Hardware address of the Ethernet adapter
Own IP address 32 bit IP address of the Ethernet adapter;
172.16.0.3 default
Subnetmask 32 bit Serves for the classification of the IP address;
0.0.0.0 default (not used)
Default Gateway 32 bit IP address of default router;
(Router) 0.0.0.0 default (not used)
Interface half duplex Full-duplex method is usually required if the
full duplex SICAM MIC is remote via glass fibre converter;
half-duplex default
Remote station 1 IP 32 bit IP address IP address of IEC 60870-5-104 remote station;
address 0.0.0.0 default (not used)
SICAM MIC device controlling Specification whether remote terminal unit or
function for remote controlled central station;
station 1 "controlling" default
Cycle time 1…1023 min Clock synchronization: 0 = not used;
"1" default
NTP 1 IP address 1) 32 bit IP address IP address of the NTP Server 1 for clock syn-
chronization
chronization
chronization
chronization
Monitoring time 1…255 s 0 = no monitoring
Timeout until clearing 1…127 min With communication fault at expiration of this time
queues 1…127 h all rings are deleted, and all DO are terminated
Connection establish- 1…255 s Max. time for the establishment of a connection;
ment (t0) 30 default
Send, test APDUs (t1) 1…255 s Expected acknowledgement time (of transmitter);
15 default
Ack. in case of no data 1…255 s Max. time for transmitting an acknowledgement
(t2) (from receiver), even if no data are present;
10 default

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

Test Frames (t3) 1…16383 s If no data are sent this time starts and the con-
nection is checked; 20 default
Max. unacknowledged 12 fixed Number of transmit messages until an acknowl-
APDUs (k) edgement is expected
Number od APDUs 8 fixed Max. number of receive messages after which an
until acknowledge (w) acknowledgement is sent
2)
Waiting time (ACK) 1…255 s Is redoubled with each repitition of a message,
maximum time of each repitition: 20 s;
2 s default
TCP resends 2) 0…255 2 s default
paket size (MSS) for 256…1460 bytes 1460 default
HTTP
delayed data transmit Selected Until all connections are established, max. 3
(StartDT ACT) enabled Not selected minutes
1)
a voting is performed at 3-fold cycle time, minimum voting time is 60 minutes
2)
applies only for Internet GPRS
Note
For communication type "Internet GPRS" the parameter SICAM MIC mode must be set to controlling, and
the original master to controlled. That assures that SICAM MIC establishes a connection actively only if
necessary (event triggered).
7.3.3 Settings if no Communication is Selected
If for SICAM MIC no communication is selected, there is still the option to send SMS. In this
case the function is possible only with GSM supporting transmission facilities.
The settings for the transmission facility for sending SMS are described in section Message
Settings (Ax) (relevant parameters for GSM modem).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.3.4 Communication Failure Handling
The ring lengths for class 1 data and class 2 data are 200 single messages each. Measured
values are status compressed.
CON and TERM messages are only then recorded in the respective rings for class 1 data and
class 2 data, if a return information monitoring is set by parameter. Otherwise they are record-
ed in a ring that can include 10 messages.
With communication type multi-point traffic, dependent on the "monitoring timeout" all rings
are deleted after detection of the call TIO.
With communication type dial-up traffic no data are discarded after detection of a communica-
tion fault. If a message is queued for transmission, a continuous attempt is made to establish
the connection to the master.
With communication type Ethernet/Internet in "controlling" mode a connection error is signaled

immediately if a parameterized connection fails. In "controlled" mode the "Timeout until clear-
ing queues" is started upon failure of all parameterized connections. If no connection setup
takes place until expiry of this time, all rings will be deleted and a connection fault is signaled
simultaneously.
Warning
After expiry of the monitoring time, additionally all the digital outputs (DO) will be terminated.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.4 Hardware Configuration
In the next table the possible configurations for master control element and I/O module are il-
lustrated.
PS PS-6630 Power supply with enhanced EMC

PS-6632 Power supply with enhanced EMC
MCU CP-6020 Master control element
CP-6040 Master control element with Ethernet interface
IOM 0…IOM 7 not used No I/O module configured
DI-6100 Binary information/count pulse acquisition


DO-6200 Command output via transistor
DO-6212 Command output via relays
DO-6220 Command output basic module

DO-6221 Command output basic module with measurement
DO-6230 Command output relay module

AI-6300 Current/voltage acquisition
AI-6310 Temperature acquisition

AO-6380 Current/voltage output
TE-6420 Speed measurement

*)
TE-6460 Control mast switch in OTW
*)
not topic of this manual
Note
Please consider the configuration rules stated in the SICAM MIC System Description, chapter “System
Overview”, section “I/O Modules”.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5 Process Periphery
The virtual peripheral element (integrated on the master control element) provides the func-
tions for the acquisition, conditioning and output of process data via the
local periphery of the master control element

I/O modules
Type Designation Signal type Acquisition grid *)

Single-point information CP-6020 binary input 10/2.5 ms
acquisition CP-6040
DI-6100
DI-6101
acquisition
DI-6102
Counting pulse acquisition DI-6103
DI-6104
Single-point information CP-6020 binary output
output CP-6040
DO-6200
DO-6212
Single command output CP-6020 binary output
CP-6040
Double command output
DO-6200
DO-6212
DO-6220
DO-6221
DO-6230
Current acquisition AI-6300 analog input 10/2.5 ms
AI-6307
Voltage acquisition
AI-6308
Temperature acquisition AI-6310
Current output AO-6380 analog output
Voltage output
Frequency acquisition TE-6420 binary input 10/2.5 ms
Speed acquisition
*)
concerns the acquisition of the I/O module via the TM bus by the master control element

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Addressing of the Information Objects

The information objects are addressed via the station identification (CASDU) and the infor-
mation object address (IOA). The CASDU results from the parameterization of CASDU1 and
CASDU2 (1 octet each).
The IOA can also be freely parameterized. It consists of 3 octets (IOA1 = Octet 1, IOA2 = Oc-
tet 2, IOA3 = Octet 3). Consequently each data point can be assigned an optional, unambigu-
ous address.
Assignment of the IOA algorithmic

If the IOA is not freely parameterized, then numbering according to the following scheme
takes place:
No. Description IOA address range

0 Master control element 1…15
1 I/O-Module No. 0 16…31
7 I/O-Module No. 6 112…127
8 I/O-Module No. 7 128…143
9 Address range reserved for third-party protocol 144…159
transmit direction
10 Address range reserved for third-party protocol 160…175
receive direction
11 Reserved for TE-6460 Module No. 0/1 176…191
15 System-internal binary information 240…255

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.1 Single-Point Information Acquisition
Acquisition, processing and time-tagging of single-point information irems via digital inputs.
The single-point information acquisition comprises the following functions:
Release/Blocking
Acquisition
Inversion
Message forwarding
7.5.1.1 Release/Blocking
The single-point information acquisition can be released or blocked in the Configuration of the
Contacts of the corresponding I/O module (applies also for master control element I/O).
The release is done for each data point by assignment of the information "single-point infor-
mation" and an unambiguous information object address to a hardware pin.
The blocking is done by assignment "not used". During the blocking the acquisition is stopped.
Error flags are deleted.
7.5.1.2 Acquisition
The acquisition grid for the digital inputs is 1 ms or 10 ms (dependent on the used
I/O module).
The processing of the digital inputs to single-point information items takes place for
I/O modules in the adjusted "acquisition grid for TM modules" (System Settings), for master
control element I/Os directly. The parameters for the processing can be entered in the Set-
tings of the I/O module.
7.5.1.3 Inversion
The active state of the input (open-circuit/closed-circuit) can be changed by parameter setting.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.1.4 Message Forwarding
The forwarding of the single-point information takes place spontaneously upon change or on
request. The spontaneous message is time-tagged (resolution 1 ms or 10 ms dependent on
the used I/O module). The format is adjustable by parameter setting.
The table describes the data point quality descriptor and the cause of transmission according
to IEC 60870-5-101/104.
Data point quality descriptor Note

BL…blocked Not supported
SB…substituted Not supported
NT…not topical Created by the master control element due to peripheral element
failure
IV…invalid Not supported
Cause of transmission Note
02…background scan Not supported
03…spontaneous Upon change of information state or
Upon change of the quality descriptor
05…requested Not supported
11…return information caused by Remote command
remote command
12…return information caused by Local command
a local command
20…interrogated by general After reception of a GI request or
interrogation Automatically (after start-up, parameter change etc.)
21…interrogated by group 1 Not supported
interrogation
:
36…interrogated by group 16
interrogation
T…test Not supported
7.5.1.5 Information Objects
The single-point information acquisition supports only data formats within the compatible
range of the IEC 60870-5-101. The format of single-point information items in monitoring di-
rection is determined in the configuration of the protocol.
The following type identifications are valid for the single-point information:
Description Type identification Data type Bytes time tag

Single-point information with time 30 BOOL 7 Byte
Single-point information with time 2 BOOL 3 Byte
Single-point information without time 1 BOOL -

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.1.6 Configuration of the Contacts
The allocation of single-point information to the binary inputs is done data point by data point.
Single-point information items can be allocated to any binary input each.
Parameter Choice Meaning/Note Scope

Pin IN D00 Fixed assigned digital input on
: the master control or
IN D05 I/O module
IN D06 Fixed assigned digital input on
IN D07 the I/O module
: the I/O module
IN D17
DP Calculated automatically de- Per input
pendent on hardware configu-
ration
Type single-point Selection single-point; Per input
double-point "single-point" default
integrated total
not connected
IOA1/IOA2/IOA3 0…255/0…255/0…255 Arbitrary IOA Per input
7.5.1.7 Settings
The following parameters can be set for the processing of the single-point information items:

1)
Class 1 data selected "selected" = class 1 (default) Per input
not selected "not selected" = class 2 2)
Inversion selected Signal state inverted Per input
not selected Signal state not inverted (de-
fault)
1)
data points of class 1 are transmitted to the central station with higher priority than data points of
class 2
2)
dial-up traffic: connection setup and transmission of the data points independently on a change on
request by the central station

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.2 Double-Point Information Acquisition
Acquisition, processing and time-tagging of double-point information items via digital inputs.
The double-point information acquisition comprises the following functions:
Release/Blocking
Acquisition
Inversion
Monitoring intermediate and faulty positions
Message forwarding
The double-point information acquisition can be released or blocked in the Configuration of

the Contacts of the corresponding I/O module (applies also for master control element I/O).
The release is done for each data point by assignment of the information "double-point infor-
mation" and an unambiguous information object address to a hardware pin.
7.5.2.2 Acquisition
I/O module).
The processing of the digital inputs to single-point information items takes place for
I/O modules in the adjusted "acquisition grid for TM modules" (System Settings), for master
control element I/Os directly. The parameters for the processing can be entered in the Set-
tings of the I/O module.
Both information bits of a double-point information must be within a half nibble. When connect-
ing the digital inputs, following assignment must be carried out:
OFF information at less significant bit

ON information at more significant bit
7.5.2.3 Inversion
The inversion can be set for both contacts (OFF and ON) seperately.
7.5.2.4 Monitoring Intermediate and Faulty Position
The transfer of an intermediate position (neither ON nor OFF binary information is present) is
prevented for a parameterized time. Also the transfer of a faulty position (both ON and OFF
binary information is present) is prevented for a fixed time.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The forwarding of the double-point information takes place spontaneously upon change or on
request. The spontaneous message is time-tagged (resolution 1 ms or 10 ms dependent on
the used I/O module). The format is adjustable by parameter setting.
to IEC 60870-5-101/104.

failure
IV…invalid Not supported
03…spontaneous Upon change of information state or
Upon change of the quality descriptor
11…return information caused by Remote command
remote command
12…return information caused by Local command
local command
interrogation Automatically (after start-up, parameter change etc.)
interrogation
:
interrogationder

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The double-point information acquisition supports only data formats within the compatible
range of the IEC 60870-5-101. The format of double-point information items in monitoring di-
rection is determined in the configuration of the protocol.
The following type identifications are valid for the double-point information:

Double-point information with time 31 BOOL 7 Byte
Double-point information with time 4 BOOL 3 Byte
Double-point information without time 3 BOOL -
The allocation of the double-point information to the binary inputs is done data point by data
point.

Pin IN D00 (OFF) Fixed assigned digital input
IN D01 (ON) pair on the master control or
I/O module
IN D02 (OFF) Fixed assigned digital input
I/O module
I/O module
IN D07 (ON) pair on the I/O module
pendent on hardware configu-
ration
Type single-point Selection double-point; Per 2 successive
double-point "single-point" default inputs
integrated total
not connected
IOA1/IOA2/IOA3 0…255/0…255/0…255 Arbitrary IOA Per double-point
information

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.2.8 Settings
The following parameters can be set for the processing of the double-point information items:

Faulty state fixed 500 ms default Per I/O module
supression time
Class 1 data selected "selected" = class 1 (default) 1) Per 2 successive
not selected "not selected" = class 2 2) inputs
Inversion IN Dxx selected Signal state inverted For this input
(OFF) not selected signal state not inverted (de-
fault)
Inversion IN Dyy selected Signal state inverted For this input
(ON) not selected Signal state not inverted (de-
fault)
Intermediate state 0.1…6553.5 s 5 s default Per 2 successive
supression time inputs
1)
class 2
2)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.3 Count Pulse Acquisition
Acquisition, processing and time-tagging of integrated totals and counter values via digital in-
puts.
The count pulse acquisition comprises the following functions:
Release/Blocking
Acquisition
Inversion
Impulse counting
Count formation
Counter value formation
Counter interrogation
Interval control
Message forwarding
The count pulse acquisition can be released or blocked in the Configuration of the Contacts of
the corresponding I/O module (applies also for master control element I/O).
The release is done for each data point by assignment of the information "integrated total" and
an unambiguous information object address to a hardware pin.
While a counter is blocked the counter value is frozen. Error flags are deleted.
If the counter is enabled again, then it resumes with its old count value.
7.5.3.2 Acquisition
I/O module).
The processing of the digital inputs to integrated totals takes place for I/O modules in the ad-
justed "acquisition grid for TM modules" (System Settings), for master control element I/Os di-
rectly. The parameters for the processing can be entered in the Settings of the I/O module.
7.5.3.3 Inversion
By means of the inversion the falling edge instead of the raising edge is counted.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.3.4 Impulse Counting
The impulse counter is incremented with each raising edge of the count impulse at the binary
input. With selected inversion the impulse counter is incremented with each falling edge.
After startup of the master control element the status of the impulse counter begins with the
value 0.
7.5.3.5 Counter Value Formation
The counter value formation serves for rating of count pulse with counter constants (counter
value = number of count pulses). The value range of the counter values is adjustable by the
parameter "overflow at".
7.5.3.6 Integrated Total Formation
Freeze and Transmit

At defined freezing moments the integrated total for the transmission is formed with a freezing
trigger. Thereout result the following type of counter value conditioned value:
Frozen absolute value

Current absolute value of the counter at the moment of the last freezing trigger. This cor-
responds to a "counter freezing without reset" according to the standard
IEC 60870-5-101/104.
counter value
lu e
va
te
s olu
ab
us
no
n ti
co
frozen absolute
value n+1
frozen absolute
value n
time
freezing moments

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The source of the trigger for freezing is the same like the source of the trigger for transmis-
sion.
For the interrogation, each integrated total can be assigned to a counter group by means of
the parameter "IEC 60870-5-101 group (RQT)":
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
7.5.3.7 Counter Interrogation
The transfer of the selected integrated totals as spontaneous information object "integrated to-
tal" is carried out by means of a trigger for transmission. This trigger may occur at the same
time as or separate from the trigger for freezing.
7.5.3.8 Interval Control
An interval control enables the autonomous freezing and transmission of the integrated totals,
without external activation by a periodical information from the open-/closed-loop control func-
tion or by a spontaneous information object "counter interrogation".
The interval control generates the freezing and transmission trigger. The interval can be set in
minutes (parameter "counter freeze or request") and is synchronized to the full hour.
7.5.3.9 Transmission of Integrated Total
The forwarding of the frozen counting values happens either spontaneously or by a counter in-
terrogation. Thereto SICAM MIC supports Mode A and Mode C according to IEC 60870-5-
101/104. The Mode can be selected by means of the parameter "counter freeze or request":
Mode A: Local freezing and spontaneous transmission.

The interval for the spontaneous transmission can be adjusted.
Mode C: Freezing due to a counter interrogation and transmission due to another coun-
ter interrogation.
The necessity of a counter interrogation command can be set.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The forwarding of the integrated total takes place spontaneously upon change or on request.
The spontaneous message is triggered by the Interval Control. The message is time-tagged
(resolution 10 ms). The format is adjustable by parameter setting.
to IEC 60870-5-101/104.

sequence number With each trigger for latching for a group the sequence number is
increased in the range from 1…31.
CY…carry On overflow of the count in the associated count period
CA…presets Not supported
IV…invalid Counter acquisition via binary inputs
Failure of the acquisition module (peripheral element without
µp- support)
03…spontaneous Interrogated counter values on a trigger for transmission by:

Interval control
Counter interrogation message including freezing trigger
37…interrogated by general Counter interrogation message without freezing trigger for all
counter request groups
38…interrogated by group 1 Counter interrogation message without freezing trigger for inter-
interrogation rogated group
:
interrogation
7.5.3.11 Spontaneous Message Reception
to IEC 60870-5-101/104.

QCC…identifier counter interro- See following table
gation
06…activation Must be set
T…test Not evaluated

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Identifier counter interrogation
FRZ RQT *) Meaning

0 1…4 Transmission of selective group 1…4
5 Transmission of all groups (1…4)
1 1…4 Latching of selective group 1…4
5 Latching of all groups (1…4)
2 1…4 Latching with reset of selective group 1…4
5 Latching with reset of all groups (1…4)
3 1…4 Resetting of selective group 1…4
5 Resetting of all groups (1…4)
*)
0…31 public range
32…63 private range
The count pulse acquisition supports only data formats within the compatible range of the IEC
60870-5-101. The format of integrated totals is determined in the configuration of the protocol.
The following type identifications are valid for the integrated total:

Integrated total with time 37 DINT 7 Byte
Integrated total with time 16 DINT 3 Byte
Integrated total without time 15 DINT -
Counter interrogation command 101 DINT
The allocation of the pulse counters to the binary inputs is done data point by data point.
Input Choice Meaning/Note Scope

Pin IN D00 Fixed assigned digital input on
: the master control or
IN D05 I/O module
IN D07 the I/O module
: the I/O module
IN D17
pending on hardware configu-
ration
Type single-point Selection integrated total; Per input
double-point "single-point" default
integrated total
not connected

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.3.14 Settings
The following parameters can be set for the processing of the counting impulses:

Class 1 data selected "selected" = class 1 (default) 1) Per input
Inversion selected Signal state inverted Per input
not selected Signal state not inverted (de-
fault)
Overflow at 31 bit binary 2147483647 Value range for Per input
24 bit binary 16777215 carry:
2 decades BCD 99 overflow in the
3 decades BCD 999 corresponding
… … integration
9 decades BCD 999999999 period
IEC 60870-5-101 group 1 Assignment of the integrated Per input
group (RQT) group 2 total to group 1…group 4
group 3
group 4
Count freeze or 1 minute (Mode A) 1 minute default Per input
request 2 minutes (Mode A)
3 minutes (Mode A)
5 minutes (Mode A)
10 minutes (Mode A)
15 minutes (Mode A)
30 minutes (Mode A)
60 minutes (Mode A)
counter interrogation
command (mode C)
1)
class 2
2)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.4 Current Acquisition
Acquisition, processing and time-tagging of direct currents from transducers via analog inputs.
The current acquisition comprises the following functions:
Release/Blocking
Acquisition
Correction
Adaptation
Suppression of Zero Range
Plausibility Check
Change Monitoring
Message Forwarding
The current acquisition can be released or blocked in the Configuration of the Contacts of the
corresponding I/O module.
The release is done for each data point by assignment of the information "current" and an un-
ambiguous information object address to a hardware pin.
7.5.4.2 Acquisition
The acquisition grid and the physical measuring range for the analog inputs are dependent on
the used I/O module. The acquisition of the value is done via an Analog/Digital Converter
(ADC).
The processing of the analog inputs to measuring values takes place in the adjusted scan
rate. The parameters for the processing can be entered in the Settings of the I/O module.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.4.3 Correction
The hardware is calibrated during assembly, it means a highly precise fullscale value is creat-
ed (Example: 20 mA for measuring range -20 mA to +20 mA), and the acquired ADC-value as
well as the offset of the ADCs is stored non-volatile in an EEPROM.
In operation the offset of the ADCs is determined cyclic. Each ADC-value measured is cor-
rected by the Offset-deviation and by the Fullscale-deviation. The measuring range is repre-
sented as range -32000 to +32000.
32000
Value CORR (ADC - ADC OFF )
ADC FSW - ADC OFFW
ValueCORR ..... corrected value

ADCFSW ........ ADC fullscale value with calibration
ADCOFFW ....... ADC offset with calibration
ADCOFF ......... ADC offset
ADC ….......... current measured ADC-value
Example: Measuring range -20 mA to +20 mA
ValueCORR
+32000
-20
+20 current value
[mA]
-32000

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.4.4 Suppression of Zero Range and Plausibility Check

By zero-range suppression, value fluctuations of the sensor in the zero-current state can be
suppressed. For this, the zero-range suppression affects on a defined zero range.
Plausibility Check
By the plausibility check, values which are smaller than the limit of the plausible range are set
to the value Y0 and marked as faulty.
Hysteresis
For the zero-range suppression and the plausibility check a hysteresis function is provided.
The hysteresis ensures that values which fluctuate around the limits between zero range and
implausible value are not continually transmitted.
Zero-range suppression and plausibility check are possible for 3 standard cases (can be
switched on and off by parameter):
X0 X100 XNU XNO XG Y 0 *) Y 100 *) YN
Unipolar measurement 0 >X0 -5% of 5% of -3% of 0 +1 Y0

X100 X100 X100
Bipolar measurement <0 |X0| -5% of 5% of – -1 +1 Y at
X100 X100 X=0
Live zero measurement 20% of 100% 10% of X0 15% of 0 +1 Y0
X100 X100 X100
*)
the table applies only for normalized values, for scaled or floating-point values the Y0 resp. Y100
values are to be set
X0 ……lower limit of the (set) measuring range.......... (X_0%)

X100 ……upper limit of the (set) measuring range......... (X_100%)
XNU ……lower limit of the zero range............................ (zero_range_Xnu)
XNO ……upper limit of the zero range........................... (zero_range_Xno)
XG ……limit of the plausible range.............................. (MV_conv_free_Xg)
Y0 ……technological value at X0 ................................ (Y_0%)
Y100 ……technological value at X100.............................. (Y_100%)
YN ……technological value within zero range............. (zero_range_Yn)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.4.4.1 Unipolar Measurement
with suppression of zero range and plausibility check

Value *) Meaning
X0 0 Lower limit of the measuring range (set by parameter)

X100 20 mA Upper limit of the measuring range (set by parameter)
Y0 0 Technological value at X0
Y100 +1 Technological value at X100
XNU -1 mA Lower limit of the zero range
XNO 1 mA Upper limit of the zero range
XG -0.6 mA Limit of the plausible range
YN 0 Technological value within zero range
*)
example
Measured value Y100 Normalized value
Y0
X NU XG X0 XNO X 100
Data point quality descriptor
IV
OV

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
without suppression of zero range and plausibility check

Value *) Meaning

*)
example
Y0
X0 X100
IV
OV

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.4.4.2 Bipolar Measurement

Value *) Meaning
X0 -20 mA Lower limit of the measuring range (set by parameter)
Y0 -1 Technological value at X0
XNU -1 mA Lower limit of the zero range
*)
example
XG X0 XNU XNO X100
Y0
IV
OV

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

Value *) Meaning
X0 -20 mA Lower limit of the measuring range (set by parameter)
*)
example
X0 X100
Y0
IV
OV

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.4.4.3 Live Zero Measurement

Value *) Meaning
X0 4 mA Lower limit of the measuring range (set by parameter)
XNU 2 mA Lower limit of the zero range
XG 3 mA Limit of the plausible range
*)
example
Y0
XNU XG X0 X100
XNO
IV
OV

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

Value *) Meaning
X0 4 mA Lower limit of the measuring range (set by parameter)
*)
example
Y0
X0 X100
IV
OV
7.5.4.5 Change Monitoring
So as not to load the transmission equipment unnecessarily, the adapted value is monitored
for change in accordance with the following rules:
The first value determined is transmitted immediately.

Each change of the data point quality descriptor "invalid" triggers an immediate transmis-
sion, excluded from this is a change of the quality descriptor "overflow".
Change monitoring in accordance with the method of the additive threshold value proce-
dure (no data point quality descriptor marked).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Additive Threshold Value Procedure

A large threshold, an additive threshold and a processing grid are defined by parameter set-
ting. If the deviation from the last-transmitted value is greater than the large threshold, the new
value is immediately transmitted.
Otherwise, in the parameterized processing grid the deviations from the last-transmitted value
are totalled according to the sign. Only if the amount of this total exceeds the parameterized
additive threshold is a spontaneous transmission initiated with the actual, adapted value.
A transmission of the measured value due to a general interrogation does not affect the
threshold value procedure.
The forwarding of the processed current value takes place spontaneously or on request. The
spontaneous message forwarding is triggered by the Change Monitoring. The message is
time-tagged (resolution 10 ms). The format is adjustable by parameter setting.
to IEC 60870-5-101/104.

failure
IV…invalid Error event (offset error, conversion error, EEPROM error) or
Measured value is not in the implausible range, possible
parameter error
OV…overflow Non-linearized value outside the parameterized measuring
range (X0, X100) or
Conditioned value outside the range (Y0, Y100); the conditioned
value is limited to Y0 or Y100.
01…cyclic Not supported
03…spontaneous Alteration of the measured value depending on the thresholds
or
Alteration of the quality descriptor
interrogation Automatically (e.g. After start-up, parameter change etc.)
interrogation
:
interrogation

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The current acquisition supports only data formats within the compatible range of the IEC
60870-5-101. The format of measured values is determined in the configuration of the proto-
col.
The following type identifications are valid for the current values:
Data type
Description Type identification Bytes time tag
Measured value normalized with time 10 INT 3 Byte
Measured value normalized without time 9 INT -
Measured value scaled with time 12 INT 3 Byte
Measured value scaled without time 11 INT -
Measured value floating point with time 14 REAL 3 Byte
Measured value floating point without 13 REAL -
time
The allocation of the current values to the analog inputs is done data point by data point.

Pin IN V0 I/U Fixed assigned analog input on
: the I/O module
IN V3 I/U
DP Calculated automatically de-
ration
Unit current Selection current Per input
voltage "current" default
not used
Type normalized Data type; Per input
scaled "normalized" default
floating point

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.4.9 Settings
The following parameters can be determined for the processing of the current values:

Scan rate 0.5 s/1 s/2 s/5 s/ Processing grid; Per input
10 s/20 s/30 s/60 s 0.5 s default
Absolute threshold 0…103% 2% default Per input
Additive threshold 0…1000% 150% default Per input
Nominal range -20 mA -20 mA default Per input
X_0% 0 mA
4 mA
Nominal range 20 mA Fixed Per I/O module
X_100%
Nominal range Y_0 -1…1 Normalized; -1 default Per input
-32768…32767 scaled; -32000 default;
19 20
-1.0x10 … 1.0x10 1) floating point; 32000 default
Nominal range -1…1 Normalized; 1 default Per input
Y_100 -32768…32767 scaled; 32000 default
19 20
Zero range sup- selected "selected" default Per input
pression and plau- not selected
sibility check
1)
value is limited to 20 digits incl. sign and 6 decimal places (thereby the first 8 digits are exact)
2)
class 2
3)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.5 Voltage Acquisition
Acquisition, processing and time-tagging of direct voltages from transducers via analog inputs.
The voltage acquisition comprises the following functions:
Release/Blocking
Acquisition
Correction
Adaptation
Plausibility Check
Change Monitoring
Message forwarding
The voltage acquisition can be released or blocked in the Configuration of the Contacts of the
The release is done for each data point by assignment of the information "voltage" and an un-
ambiguous information object address to a hardware pin.
7.5.5.2 Acquisition
the used I/O module. The acquisition of the value is done via an Analog/Digital Converter
(ADC).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.5.3 Correction
The hardware is calibrated during assembly, it means a highly precise fullscale-value is creat-
ed (Example: 10 V for measuring range -10 V to +10 V), and the acquired ADC value as well
as the offset of the ADCs is stored non-volatile in an EEPROM.
In operation the offset of the ADCs is determined cyclic. Each ADC value measured is cor-
rected by the Offset-deviation and by the Fullscale-deviation. The measuring range is repre-
sented as range -32000 to +32000.
32000
Value CORR (ADC - ADC OFF )
ADC FSW - ADC OFFW
ValueCORR ..... corrected value

ADCFSW ........ ADC fullscale value with calibration
ADCOFFW ....... ADC offset with calibration
ADCOFF ......... ADC offset
ADC ….......... current measured ADC-value
Example: measuring range -10 V to +10 V:
value CORR
+32000
-10V
+10V voltage value
V
-32000

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.5.4 Suppression of Zero Range and Plausibility Check

By zero-range suppression, value fluctuations of the sensor in the zero-current state can be
suppressed. For this, the zero-range suppression affects on a defined zero range.
Plausibility Check
By the plausibility check, values which are smaller than the limit of the plausible range are set
to the value Y0 and marked as faulty.
Hysteresis
For the zero-range suppression and the plausibility check a hysteresis function is provided.
The hysteresis ensures that values which fluctuate around the limits between zero range and
implausible value are not continually transmitted.
Zero-range suppression and plausibility check are possible for 3 standard cases (can be
switched on and off by parameter):
X0 X100 XNU XNO XG Y 0 *) Y 100 *) YN
Unipolar measurement 0 >X0 -5% of 5% of -3% of 0 +1 Y0

X100 X100 X100
Bipolar measurement <0 |X0| -5% of 5% of – -1 +1 Y at
X100 X100 X=0
Live Zero measurement 20% of 100% 10% of X0 15% of 0 +1 Y0
X100 X100 X100
*)
the table applies only for normalized values, for scaled or floating-point values the Y0 resp. Y100
values are to be set
X0 ……lower limit of the (set) measuring range.......... (X_0%)

X100 ……upper limit of the (set) measuring range......... (X_100%)
XNU ……lower limit of the zero range............................ (zero_range_Xnu)
XNO ……upper limit of the zero range........................... (zero_range_Xno)
XG ……limit of the plausible range.............................. (MV_conv_free_Xg
Y0 ……technological value at X0 ................................ (Y_0%
Y100 ……technological value at X100.............................. (Y_100%)
YN ……technological value within zero range............. (zero_range_Yn)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.5.4.1 Unipolar Measurement

Value *) Meaning
X100 1V Upper limit of the measuring range (set by parameter)
XNU -0.05 V Lower limit of the zero range
XNO 0.05 V Upper limit of the zero range
XG -0.03 V Limit of the plausible range
*)
example
Y0
XNU XG X0 XNO X100
IV
OV

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

Value *) Meaning
*)
example
Y0
X0 X100
IV
OV

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.5.4.2 Bipolar Measurement

Value *) Meaning
X0 -1 V Lower limit of the measuring range (set by parameter)
XNU -0.05 V Lower limit of the zero range
*)
example
XG X0 XNU XNO X100
Y0
IV
OV

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

Value *) Meaning
X0 -1 V Lower limit of the measuring range (set by parameter)
*)
example
X0 X100
Y0
IV
OV

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.5.4.3 Live Zero Measurement

Value *) Meaning
X0 0.2 V Lower limit of the measuring range (set by parameter)
XNU 0.1 V Lower limit of the zero range
XG 0.15 V Limit of the plausible range
*)
example
Y0
XNU XG X0 X100
XNO
IV
OV

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

Value *) Meaning
X0 0.2 V Lower limit of the measuring range (set by parameter)
*)
example
Y0
X0 X100
IV
OV
The first value determined is transmitted immediately

Each change of the data point quality descriptor "invalid" triggers an immediate transmis-
sion, excluded from this is a change of the quality descriptor "overflow"
Change monitoring in accordance with the method of the additive threshold value proce-
dure (no data point quality descriptor marked)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

The forwarding of the processed voltage value takes place spontaneously or on request. The
to IEC 60870-5-101/104.

failure
IV…invalid Error event (offset error, conversion error, EEPROM error) or
Measured value is in the implausible range, possible parame-
ter error
OV…overflow Non-linearized value outside the parameterized measuring
range (X0, X100) or
Conditioned value outside the range (Y0, Y100); the conditioned
value is limited to Y0 or Y100
or
20…interrogated by general After reception of a GI request or automatically (e.g. After start-
interrogation up, parameter change etc.)
interrogation
:
interrogation

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The voltage acquisition supports only data formats within the compatible range of the IEC
col.
The following type identifications are valid for the voltage values:

Measured value normalized without time 9 INT -
Measured value scaled without time 11 INT -
time
The allocation of the voltage values to the analog inputs is done data point by data point.

Pin IN V0 I/U Fixed assigned analog input on
: the I/O module
IN V3 I/U
ration
Unit voltage Selection voltage Per input
current "current" default
not used
Type normalized Data type; Per input
scaled "normalized" default
floating point

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.5.9 Settings
The following parameters can be determined for the processing of the voltage values:

10 s/20 s/30 s/60 s 0.5 s default
Absolute threshold 0…103% 2% default Per input
Nominal range -10 V -10 V default Per input
X_0% 0V
2V
Nominal range 10 V Fixed Per AI-6300
X_100% module
Nominal range Y_0 -1…1 Normalized; -1 default Per input
-32768…32767 scaled; -32000 default
19 20
-1.0x10 … 1.0x10 1) floating point; -32000 default
Nominal range -1…1 Normalized; 1 default Per input
Y_100 -32768…32767 scaled; 32000 default
19 20
Zero range sup- selected Default Per input
pression and plau- not selected
sibility check
1)
value is limited to 20 digits incl. sign (thereby the first 8 digits are exact)
2)
class 2
3)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.6 Temperature Acquisition
Acquisition, processing and time-tagging of temperature values via from resistance thermome-
ters via analog inputs.
The temperature acquisition comprises the following functions:
Blocking
Acquisition
Noise rejection
Smoothing
Change monitoring
Message Forwarding
The temperature acquisition can be released or blocked in the Configuration of the Contacts
of the corresponding I/O module.
The release is done for each data point by assignment of the information "floating point" and
7.5.6.2 Acquisition
the used I/O module and the selected resistance thermometer. Via an analog/digital converter
(ADC) the voltage drop at the temperature-dependent resistance is calculated.
A resistance thermometer can be connected using 2-, 3- or 4-wire technique.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.6.3 Smoothing
The smoothing is used for the filtering of statistical fluctuations of the acquired measured val-
ue, that are meaningless for the process management and unnecessarily burden the trans-
mission equipment.
The smoothing takes place according to the formula
Value SMOOTH Value ANP (1 - F) Value SMOOTH_OLD F
ValueSMOOTH .................. smoothened new value

ValueANP ....................... unsmoothened value
ValueSMOOTH_OLD ............ smoothened old value
F ................................... smoothing factor (0.00…0.99)
7.5.6.4 Adaption
From the acquired measured value the current resistance value of the resistance thermometer
is determined. This resistance value is converted into a temperature value.
The selection according to which characteristic (Pt100 or Ni100) conversion is to take place, is
carried out with the setting of the measuring range. By means of the parameter "temperature
unit" it can be selected whether the temperature is to be transferred in degrees Celsius or in
degrees Fahrenheit.
If the calculated temperature value is outside the selected measuring range, the quality de-
scriptor "invalid" (IV) is set in the spontaneous information object.

Each change of the data point quality descriptor (value faulty) triggers an immediate
transmission. Excluded from this is a change of the OV bit.
No data point quality descriptor marked: change monitoring in accordance with the method
of the additive threshold value procedure.


DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The forwarding of the processed temperature value takes place spontaneously or on request.
The spontaneous message forwarding is triggered by the Change Monitoring. The message is
to IEC 60870-5-101/104.

failure
IV…invalid Calibration values not plausible (exclusively for connection in
2-wire technique) or
Reference measurement not plausible or
Offset measurement not plausible or
ADC faulty (e.g. Offset error) or
The acquisition submodule is not supplying any data or
The temperature is not in the plausible range
OV…overflow Not supported
or

interrogation
:
interrogation

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The temperature acquisition supports only data formats within the compatible range of the IEC
col.
The following type identifications are valid for the temperature values:

time
The allocation of the temperature values to the analog inputs is done data point by data point.

Pin IN V0 Fixed assigned analog input on
… the I/O module
IN V3
Type floating point Selection floating point Per input
not connected "floating point" default
Connection 2 wire Connection technique for Per input
3 wire resistance thermometer;
4 wire "4-wire" default
Text max. 10 characters Per input
Control direction factory calibration
Type *) single command The factory calibration can be Per input
not connected started under "process display"
(webserver) or from the control
system;
no remote factory calibration
possible;
"not connected" default
Text *) max. 10 characters Per input
*)
*)
parameter applies only if the type "2 wire calibration process" has been selected
Note
Connecting in 2-wire technique, a calibration process is required. You find the instruction thereto in Ap-
pendix D, Connection of Resistance Thermometers.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.6.9 Settings
The following parameters can be set for the processing of the temperature values:

10 s/20 s/30 s/60 s 0.5 s default
Absolute threshold 0…103% 1) 2% default Per input
1)
Noise rejection 50 Hz 50 Hz default Per input
60 Hz
16 Hz
Smoothing 2…99% *) Can be set in 1% steps, 1% Per input
illegal;
0% default (no smoothing)
Sensor PT100 (-50…+350°C) Type of sensor; Per input
PT100 (-100…+700°C) P100 (-50..+350 °C) default
NI 100 (-60…+250 °C)
Unit Degree C Degree celsius/ Per input
Degree F degree fahrenheit
1)
percentages are related to the parameterized temperature range
2)
class 2
3)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.6.10 Values for the Linearization Tables
Char. Curve for Pt100 Resistance Thermometer

Defined Measuring Range: -50,00 °C to 350,00 °C
Usable Measuring Range: -70,00 °C to 370,00 °C
Actual
Basic Basic value Basic value U subpr. R linear T linear T actual Actual T diff.
value
value [dec] [hex] [V] [Ohm] [°C] [°C] value [dec] [°C]
[hex]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0,0000 72,3300 -70,0000 -70,0000 0 0 0 0 0 0,00
1 4.095 0 F F F 0,3125 82,6000 -42,5000 -44,2250 3.839 0 E F F -1,73
2 8.191 1 F F F 0,6250 92,8700 -15,0000 -18,2000 7.715 1 E 2 3 -3,20
3 12.287 2 F F F 0,9375 103,1400 12,5000 8,0513 11.625 2 D 6 9 -4,45
4 16.383 3 F F F 1,2500 113,4100 40,0000 34,4872 15.563 3 C C B -5,51
5 20.479 4 F F F 1,5625 123,6800 67,5000 61,1538 19.534 4 C 4 E -6,35
6 24.575 5 F F F 1,8750 133,9500 95,0000 88,0263 23.537 5 B F 1 -6,97
7 28.671 6 F F F 2,1875 144,2200 122,5000 115,1316 27.574 6 B B 6 -7,37
8 32.767 7 F F F 2,5000 154,4900 150,0000 142,4474 31.643 7 B 9 B -7,55
9 36.863 8 F F F 2,8125 164,7600 177,5000 170,0000 35.746 8 B A 2 -7,50
10 40.959 9 F F F 3,1250 175,0300 205,0000 197,8056 39.888 9 B D 0 -7,19
11 45.055 A F F F 3,4375 185,3000 232,5000 225,8378 44.063 A C 1 F -6,66
12 49.151 B F F F 3,7500 195,5700 260,0000 254,1389 48.278 B C 9 6 -5,86
13 53.247 C F F F 4,0625 205,8400 287,5000 282,6944 52.531 C D 3 3 -4,81
14 57.343 D F F F 4,3750 216,1100 315,0000 311,5143 56.824 D D F 8 -3,49
15 61.439 E F F F 4,6875 226,3800 342,5000 340,6000 61.156 E E E 4 -1,90
16 65.535 F F F F 5,0000 236,6500 370,0000 370,0000 65.535 F F F F 0,00
Linearization data-50°C to 350°C

Standard Characteristic Curve - Linearization Characteristic Curve
400
350
300
250
200
T actual 150
[°C]
100
50
0
-50
-100
0
4095
8191
12287
16383
20479
24575
28671
32767
36863
40959
45055
49151
53247
57343
61439
65535
16 Bit Processing Values decimal
Linearization data -50°C to 350°C

Deviation T diff. [°C] = T actual [°C] - T linear [°C]
0,00
-1,00
-2,00
-3,00
T diff. [°C]
-4,00
-5,00
-6,00
-7,00
-8,00
0
4095
8191
12287
16383
20479
24575
28671
32767
36863
40959
45055
49151
53247
57343
61439
65535

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

Defined Measuring Range: -100,00 °C bis 700,00 °C
Usable Measuring Range: -120,00 °C bis 720,00 °C
Actual
value
[hex]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0,0000 52,1100 -120,0000 -120,0000 0 0 0 0 0 0,00
1 4.095 0 F F F 0,3125 70,8094 -67,5000 -73,8015 3.604 0 E 1 4 -6,30
2 8.191 1 F F F 0,6250 89,5088 -15,0000 -26,7280 7.277 1 C 6 D -11,73
3 12.287 2 F F F 0,9375 108,2081 37,5000 21,0721 11.006 2 A F E -16,43
4 16.383 3 F F F 1,2500 126,9075 90,0000 69,5724 14.790 3 9 C 6 -20,43
5 20.479 4 F F F 1,5625 145,6069 142,5000 118,8024 18.631 4 8 C 7 -23,70
6 24.575 5 F F F 1,8750 164,3063 195,0000 168,7738 22.530 5 8 0 2 -26,23
7 28.671 6 F F F 2,1875 183,0056 247,5000 219,5557 26.491 6 7 7 B -27,94
8 32.767 7 F F F 2,5000 201,7050 300,0000 271,1528 30.517 7 7 3 5 -28,85
9 36.863 8 F F F 2,8125 220,4044 352,5000 323,6411 34.612 8 7 3 4 -28,86
10 40.959 9 F F F 3,1250 239,1038 405,0000 377,0406 38.778 9 7 7 A -27,96
11 45.055 A F F F 3,4375 257,8031 457,5000 431,4209 43.021 A 8 0 D -26,08
12 49.151 B F F F 3,7500 276,5025 510,0000 486,8258 47.343 B 8 E F -23,17
13 53.247 C F F F 4,0625 295,2019 562,5000 543,3088 51.750 C A 2 6 -19,19
14 57.343 D F F F 4,3750 313,9013 615,0000 600,9433 56.246 D B B 6 -14,06
15 61.439 E F F F 4,6875 332,6006 667,5000 659,8144 60.839 E D A 7 -7,69
16 65.535 F F F F 5,0000 351,3000 720,0000 720,0000 65.535 F F F F 0,00

800
700
600
500
400
T actual [°C]
300
200
100
0
-100
-200
0
4095
8191
12287
16383
20479
24575
28671
32767
36863
40959
45055
49151
53247
57343
61439
65535
0,00
-20,00
T diff. [°C]
-40,00
4095
8191
12287
16383
20479
24575
28671
32767
36863
40959
45055
49151
53247
57343
61439
65535
0

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

Defined Measuring Range: -60,00 °C bis 250,00 °C
Usable Measuring Range: -80,00 °C bis 270,00 °C
Actual
value
[hex]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0,0000 59,9000 -80,0000 -80,0000 0 0 0 0 0 0,00
1 4.095 0 F F F 0,3125 75,5188 -58,1250 -47,3624 6.111 1 7 D F 10,76
2 8.191 1 F F F 0,6250 91,1375 -36,2500 -16,5250 11.885 2 E 6 D 19,73
3 12.287 2 F F F 0,9375 106,7563 -14,3750 12,1126 17.247 4 3 5 F 26,49
4 16.383 3 F F F 1,2500 122,3750 7,5000 38,9583 22.274 5 7 0 2 31,46
5 20.479 4 F F F 1,5625 137,9938 29,3750 64,1563 26.992 6 9 7 0 34,78
6 24.575 5 F F F 1,8750 153,6125 51,2500 88,0179 31.460 7 A E 4 36,77
7 28.671 6 F F F 2,1875 169,2313 73,1250 110,6161 35.692 8 B 6 C 37,49
8 32.767 7 F F F 2,5000 184,8500 95,0000 132,0625 39.707 9 B 1 B 37,06
9 36.863 8 F F F 2,8125 200,4688 116,8750 152,3360 43.503 A 9 E F 35,46
10 40.959 9 F F F 3,1250 216,0875 138,7500 171,6094 47.112 B 8 0 8 32,86
11 45.055 A F F F 3,4375 231,7063 160,6250 189,8959 50.536 C 5 6 8 29,27
12 49.151 B F F F 3,7500 247,3250 182,5000 207,3611 53.806 D 2 2 E 24,86
13 53.247 C F F F 4,0625 262,9438 204,3750 223,9376 56.910 D E 4 E 19,56
14 57.343 D F F F 4,3750 278,5625 226,2500 239,6625 59.855 E 9 C F 13,41
15 61.439 E F F F 4,6875 294,1813 248,1250 254,8813 62.704 F 4 F 0 6,76
16 65.535 F F F F 5,0000 309,8000 270,0000 270,0000 65.535 F F F F 0,00

300
250
200
150
T actual100
[°C]
50
0
-50
-100
12287
16383
20479
24575
28671
32767
36863
40959
45055
49151
53247
57343
61439
65535
0
4095
8191

40,00
35,00
30,00
25,00
T diff. [°C]
20,00
15,00
10,00
5,00
0,00
0
12287
16383
20479
24575
28671
32767
36863
40959
45055
49151
53247
57343
61439
65535
4095
8191

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.6.11 Calculation between 2 Basic Values
Basic value (n+3)

y = linearized standardized Pt100 value
Basic value (n+2)
Basic value (n+1)
Basic value (n)

Basic value (n+1) - Basic value n
n * 1000h (n+1) * 1000h (n+2) * 1000h (n+3) * 1000h
x = standardized Pt100 value
The selection of the relevant basic values for the calculation is done with the 4 more signifi-
cant bits of the standardized Pt100 value:
( x n 1000h) (n 1) n
y n
1000h

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.7 Frequency Acquisition
Acqisition, processing and time-tagging of frequencies via digital inputs. The function is only
possible in conjunction with an I/O module for period duration monitoring.
The frequency acquisition comprises the following functions:
Release/Blocking
Acquisition
Correction
Change monitoring
Message forwarding
The frequency acquisition can be released or blocked in the Configuration of the Contacts of
the corresponding I/O module.
The release is done for each data point by assignment of the information "floating point" and
7.5.7.2 Acquisition
The acquisition grid for the digital inputs is 100 s (dependent on the used I/O module).
The processing of the digital inputs to frequency values takes place in the adjusted scan rate.
The parameters for the processing functions can be entered in the Settings of the I/O module.
7.5.7.3 Correction
The correction of the measured value takes place on the I/O module. The measuring ranges
are adjusted automatically by the firmware of the master control element (autoscaling). The
selectionof the measuring range is done with regard to an optimization of the measuring time.
Measuring range fmin fmax

1 1.19Hz 250 Hz
2 250 Hz 526.32Hz
3 500 Hz 1052.63Hz
4 1000 Hz 2105.26Hz
5 2000 Hz 4210.53Hz
6 4000 Hz 9421.05Hz
7 8421.05Hz 10000 Hz

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.7.4 Frequency Characteristic
For the technological adaption applies Y0 = X0, Y100 = X100.
Y100
Y0
frequency
X0
status
IV
OV

transmission. Excluded from this is a change of the OV bit.
of the additive threshold value procedure.


DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The forwarding of the processed frequency value takes place spontaneously or on request.
The spontaneous message forwarding is triggered by the Change Monitoring. The message is
to IEC 60870-5-101/104.

failure
IV…invalid The measured value is not in the plausible range, open-circuit
OV…overflow Non-linearized value out of the set measuring range (X0, X100)
or
Conditioned value out of range (Y0, Y100); the conditioned
value is limited to Y0 resp. Y100
or
interrogation
:
interrogation
The frequency acquisition supports only data formats within the compatible range of the IEC
60870-5-101 are supported. The format of measured values is determined in the configuration
of the protocol.
The following type identifications are valid for the frequency values:

time

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The allocation of the frequency values to the analog inputs is done data point by data point.

Pin IN IC0 Fixed assigned digital input on
: the I/O module
IN IC3
ration
Type floating point "floating point" default
not connected
7.5.7.9 Settings
The following parameters can be set for the processing of the frequency values:

Scan rate 0.1 s/0.5 s/1 s/2 s/5 s/ Processing grid; Per input
10 s/20 s/30 s/60 s 0.1 s default
Absolute threshold 0…103% 1) 2% default Per input
1)
Nominal range 1.2 Hz Fixed Per input
X_0%
Nominal range 2…10000 Hz Frequency range; Per input
X_100% 50 Hz default
1)
percentages are related to the parameterized frequency range
2)
class 2
3)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.8 Speedmonitoring
Acquisition, processing and time-tagging of speeds via digital inputs. The range of application
is mainly for generators in power stations.
The function is only possible in conjunction with an I/O module for period duration measure-
ment. For each I/O module only one speed acquisition is possible, alternatively with 1 or 2
sensors, which are compared for plausibility against one another.
Note
In a SICAM MIC are maximum 2 speedmonitoring functions possible.
The speedmonitoring comprises the following functions:
Blocking/Release
Acquisition
Direction of rotation detection
Standstill detection
Creep detection
Output of binary information items in case of fault
Output of switching commands
Speed output
Change Monitoring
Message Forwarding
The function Speedmonitoring can be performed either as stand-alone variant or with a pro-
cess communication (serial/LAN/WAN).
The speed acquisition can be released or blocked in the Configuration of the Contacts of the
The release is done for each data point by assignment of the information "speedmonitor" and

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.8.2 Acquisition
The acquisition grid for the digital inputs is 100 s (dependent on the used I/O module).
As source for the speed serves an impulse sensor, for instance a Namur sensor with gear
wheel.
The processing of the digital inputs to speed values takes place in the adjusted scan rate. The
parameters for the processing functions can be entered in the Settings of the I/O module.
7.5.8.3 Direction of Rotation Detection
For a direction of rotation detection 2 sensors are necessary. The sensors must be mounted
staggered with a phase displacement of 30 up to 90 degrees. With a phase displacement out-
side of this range the direction of rotation can not be detected reliably.
For a correct direction of rotation detection, a period with 4 edges in a defined sequence is re-
quired (see figure):
Status A: Direction forward

Status B: Direction backward
Status
A
IN IC0
IN IC1
1 2 3 4 t
Status
B
IN IC0
IN IC1
t
1 2 3 4
By means of that mechanical inaccuracies and a gear tooth loss are filtered, in order that it
does not come to unwanted effects (for example a direction of rotation reversal).
7.5.8.4 Gradient Monitoring
With the adjustable values for start time constant and nominal speed (frequency of pulses at
speed 100%) a maximum permitted gradient is calculated. If the input signal changes faster
than the gradient allows, the speed is calculated via the gradient. Only if the input signal is
smaller than the calculated value, it is valid again.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.8.5 Standstill Detection
During a shutdown process, at a frequency below 1.9 Hz it is switched over to impulse count-
ing and a standstill detection is performed. Starting from 4.1 Hz it is switched over to period
duration measurement and the speed is calculated.
Upon under-usage of an adjustable number of pulses during an adjustable time period, a bina-
ry information is output via a digital output.
7.5.8.6 Creep Detection
During standstill the measurement is switched to impulse counting in order to be able to exe-
cute a creep detection.
The creep can be activated and deactivated with a signal "guide vane closed". If the signal =
0, the creep detection is deactivated, because a start of the machine is assumed.
7.5.8.7 Speed Threshold Values
Depending on the speed value criteria for the definition of events like
a trip
switching on/off of pumps, refrigerations or other aggregates
can be assigned via up to 14 digital outputs.
The criteria for the activation of an output are adjustable by means of
Threshold value
Selection of the control direction (exceedance or under-usage)
Operate lag
Hysteresis
Sense of rotation (with use of 2 sensors)
Control of Exceedance
Upon exceedance of the threshold value the delay time (operate lag) is started. If the thresh-
old value keeps staying exceeded until the expiration of this time, the output is set. If the
speed gets smaller than the threshold value minus the hysteresis, the output is reset.
Control of Under-Usage
Upon under-usage of the threshold value the delay time (operate lag) is started. If the thresh-
old value keeps staying exceeded until the expiration of this time, the output is set. If the
speed gets greater than the threshold value plus the hysteresis, the output is reset.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The first value determined is transmitted immediately

transmission. Excluded from this is the OV bit
of the additive threshold value procedure

7.5.8.9 Error Contact as Watchdog for the Speedmonitoring
The output D01 on the master control element can be activated upon failure of the module or
upon failure of all speed signals.
The relay contact is normally closed and in case of error open. It includes the following errors:
Failure of the speedmonitoring module

Failure of all speed signals
Failure of the master control element
Firmwarekill
Failure of the power supply
7.5.8.10 Speed Output
The speed output takes place via an analog output. The measuring range for the speed output
is defined by parameter setting. The number of impulses at nominal speed is
n nom Z
f
60
f .................... frequency
nnom .............. nominal speed
Z ................... number of gear teeth

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
With the selected option "speed is displayed signed" the analog value is sent with sign to the
analog output, with deactivated option as absolute value.
Display range of the speed Output range Option Y_0 Y_100

-100%…0…100% -10 mA…10 mA yes/no -100 100
-100%…0…100% 4…20 mA yes -400 100
-100%…0…100% -20 mA…4 mA…20 mA no -150 100
0…200% 4…20 mA no -300 200
Switching Power Rating of the Output Relays
Parameter Physical range Value

Relay CP-60x0 Max. Switching voltage 60 VDC + 30%
Max. Switching current 1 A at 60 VDC (60 W) ohmic load
Transistor DO-6200 Max. Switching voltage 60 VDC + 30%
Max. Switching current 0.3 A at 60 VDC (18 W) ohmic load
Relay DO-6212 Max. Switching voltage 220 VDC + 10%
Max. Switching current 0.18 A at 220 VDC (40 W) ohmic load
Warning
Check if an interposing relay is necessary!
7.5.8.11 Data Points for the Software
The following error information items and operating states are usable as software data points:
Fault (sum of all faults in the speed module)

Failure analog output
Failure communication
Rotation direction forward
Rotation direction backward
Speed signal 1 faulty
Speed signal 2 faulty
Speed threshold value 0…13
Standstill
Creep Schleichdrehzahl
Speed as measured value
These data points can be output via I/O modules. They are available also for the communica-
tion.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The forwarding of the processed speed value takes place spontaneously or on request. The
to IEC 60870-5-101/104.

failure
IV…invalid The measured value is not in the plausible range, open-circuit
OV…overflow Non-linearized value out of the set measuring range (X0, X100)
or
Conditioned value out of range (Y0, Y100); the conditioned
value is limited to Y0 resp. Y100
or
interrogation
:
interrogation
The speed acquisition supports only data formats within the compatible range of the IEC
col.
The following type identifications are valid for the speed values:

time

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The allocation of the speed values to the analog inputs is done data point by data point.

Pin IN IC0 *) Fixed assigned digital input on
IN IC1 *) the I/O module
DP Calculated automatically ac-
cording to hardware configura-
tion
Type speedmonitoring Selection speedmonitoring; Per input
floating point "floating point" default Per input pair
not connected
Text max. 10 characters Per input
Per input pair
IOA1,2,3 0…255/0…255/0…255 Arbitrary IOA Per input
Per input pair
*)
only IN IC0 selected: measured value without sign; IN IC1 (only in conjunction with IN IC0):
measured value with sign
7.5.8.15 Settings
The following parameters can be set for the processing of the speed values:

Frequency of the impulses at 2…10000 Hz
nominal speed 100%
Acceleration time constant for 0.1…99.9 s Serves for calculation of the max. allowable
generating unit gradient 1)
Speed output
Speed is output with sign selected Analog value is sent with sign or without
(forward = positive, backward not selected sign (as absolut value) to the analog output
= negative) 2)
Speed output on AO 0…255/0…255/0…255
Assignment of single-point information items on DI
Guide vane closed signal 0…255/0…255/0…255 Bounce suppression for usage of two
speed sensors
Assignment of error information items on DO (single-point information)
Fault 0…255/0…255/0…255 0/0/0 default (not used)
Failure AO 0…255/0…255/0…255 0/0/0 default (not used)
Failure communication 0…255/0…255/0…255 0/0/0 default (not used)
2)
Hand of rotation backward 0…255/0…255/0…255 0/0/0 default (not used)
2)
Hand of rotation forward 0…255/0…255/0…255 0/0/0 default (not used)
Allowable deviation of rota- 0.1…255% The used inputs are checked for wire-
tional speed 2) breakage; at disparity of the speed signals
the smaller value is set "faulty"
Acquisition rotation wrong 3) 0…255/0…255/0…255 0/0/0 default (not used)
2)
Acquisition rotation 1 wrong 0…255/0…255/0…255 0/0/0 default (not used)
2)
Acquisition rotation 2 wrong 0…255/0…255/0…255 0/0/0 default (not used)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

Speedlimits
value greater 0.1…255% Percent of the nominal speed;
smaller "greater" default
hand of rota- forward "backward" default
Speed limit 13
Speed limit 0 tion 2) backward
: operate lag 0…2000 ms 0 ms default
IOA 0…255/0…255/0…255 0/0/0 default (not used)
hysteresis 0…255% Percent of the nominal speed;

default 5%
Standstill detection
Pulses 0…65535 0 default
Monitoring time 0…6000 s 1 s default; 0=no standstill detection
Output (DO, single-point 0…255/0…255/0…255 Upon under-usage of the adjusted number
information) IOA1, 2, 3 of pulses in the adjusted time interval a
binary information is set
Closing and slow release 0…6000 s Delay for setting and resetting the binary
delay information; default 1 s; 0 = no delay
Creep detection
Pulses 0…65535 0 default
Output (DO, single-point 0…255/0…255/0…255 After the set number of pulses, a binary
information) IOA1, 2, 3 information is set;
default 0/0/0 (no creep detection)
Settings for the measurand
Scan rate 0.1 s/0.5 s/1 s/2 s/5 s/ Processing grid;
10 s/20 s/30 s/60 s 0.1 s default
Absolute threshold 0…103% 2% default
Additive threshold 0…1000% 150% default
Nominal X_0% 1 Hz fixed
Class 1 data selected "selected" = class 1 (default) 4)
Single-point informatios for the communication
Every single-point information selected With this release, all the binary information
for the DO additional to com- not selected items are also sent to the communication;
munication "selected" default
Error output (D01 output on CP-60x0)
Error output is set in case of selected D01 output must be set to "error output" in
failure of the module or in not selected the system settings;
case of failure of all speed "not selected" default
signals
1)
if the input signal is changing faster than the gradient allows, the speed is calculated by means of
the gradient, only if the input signal is below the calculated value, it is valid again
2)
applies only with setting of 2 sensors (IN IC0, IN IC1)
3
applies only with setting of 1 sensor (IN IC0)
4)
class 2
5)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.9 Pulse Command Output
The pulse command output is used for the chronologically limited activation of an actuator
over a binary output. The activation of the actuator is thereby dependent on the result of a se-
ries of checks.
The function is only possible in conjunction with an I/O module for command output.
The scope of checks is adjustable and dependent of the used I/O module:
Command output (OC)

Command output with internal checks (IC) - only with DO-622x/DO-6230
Command output with resistance check (RC1) - only with DO-6221/DO-6230
The possible circuitry variants of the actuator are
1-pole
1.5-pole
2-pole
The pulse output comprises the following functions:
Release/Blocking
Triggering via spontaneous message reception
Initiate command output
Formal check
Direct command
Select and execute command
1-out-of-n check
Set control location
Impulse duration monitoring
Command output time
Return information monitoring
Terminate command output
Functions dependent of the system element:
Prepare control circuit

Idle check
Selective activation check
Resistance check
Interference voltage check
Electric current measurement
Earth-fault check
Activate actuator
Selective activation check
Electric current measurement
Activation of actuators with self interruption
Deactivate actuator
Idle check
General Functions:
Error handling
Periodical control circuit check

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.9.1 Command Output Procedure
7.5.9.1.1 Command Output (OC)
Output relay Command relay Actuator

optional
external internal external
Function Actions and examinations Error handling

Initiate command output Receive the spontaneous information
object command (ACT) and set system-
internal information "command output
busy"
Selection and execution Abortion
command
1-out-of-n check Abortion with additional
information
Activate actuator Send the spontaneous information object
command (ACTCON) and set system-
internal information "command C00…Cnn
running"
Switch on command relay
Switch on output relay
Monitor pulse duration
Output time
Deactivate actuator
Switch off output relay
Switch off command relay
Terminate command output Send the spontaneous information object
command (ACTTERM) and reset system-
internal information items "command
output busy"and "command C00…Cnn
running"
If with this procedure a faulty state is recognized, an immediate abortion of the output is car-
ried out. Depending on the fault different measures are started (refer to Error Handling).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.9.1.2 Command Output with internal Check (IC1)
Note
This type of command output is only possible with utilizatiuon of an I/O module DO-6220 or DO-6221 in
conjunction with a DO-6230.
Output relay Command relay Actuator

optional

busy"
Selection and execution Abortion
command
information
Prepare control circuit
Idle check Selective activation check Abortion with blockage
running"
Switch on command relay System-internal selective activation check Abortion with blockage
Switch on output relay System-internal selective activation check Abortion with blockage
Output time
Deactivate actuator
Switch off output relay Selective activation check Abortion with blockage
Switch off command relay Idle check Abortion with blockage
running"

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.9.1.3 Command Output with Resistance Check (RC1)
Note
This type of command output is only possible with utilizatiuon of an I/O module DO-6221 in conjunction
with a DO-6230.
Output relay Semi conductor Group relay Actuator

switch optional
Measuring
Test voltage Command relay
circuit

busy"
Selection and execution Abortion with additional
command information
information
Prepare control circuit Semiconductor switch is closed
Idle check Abortion with blockage
Switch on command relay Selective activation check Abortion with diagnosis
Interference voltage check Check of the output relay Abortion with blockage
Current measurement Check of the group relay and earth-fault Abortion with diagnosis
check with 1.5-pole and 2-pole output
Switch on group relay Selective activation check Abortion with blockage
Interference voltage check Check of the output relay Abortion with blockage
Resistance check 1-out-of-n check of the external command
circuit and earth-fault check with 1-pole
output
running"
Switch on output relay Periodical selective activation check
Current measurement Periodical check of the semiconductor Abortion with diagnosis
switch, measuring circuit and the external
wiring
Output time
Deactivate actuator
Switch off semiconductor
switch
Switch off output relay Selective activation check

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

Current measurement Check of the output relay Abortion with blockage
Switch on semiconductor
switch
Switch off command relay Selective activation check Abortion with diagnosis
Resistance check Check of the command relay Abortion with diagnosis
Switch off group relay Idle check Abortion with diagnosis
running"
The command output can be released or blocked in the Configuration of the Contacts of the
The release is done for each data point by assignment of the information "single command" or
"double command" and an unambiguous information object address to a hardware pin.
The blocking is done by assignment "not used". During the blocking the activation is stopped
and the command output is terminated. Error flags are deleted.
7.5.9.3 Initiate Command Output
The initiation of the command output is carried out by means of a spontaneous information ob-
ject "command". The function pulse command output supports both methods for command
transmission according to IEC 60870-5-101/104:
Direct command
In addition, the pulse command output supports single- and double commands:
The single command activates one command relay and supports exclusively the single
command state "ON"
The double command activates two command relays (OFF and ON), but only one at a
time. It supports the double command states "OFF" and "ON"

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.9.3.1 Formal Check
On reception of the spontaneous information object "command", an internal check takes place
before the setpoint command is carried out.
The following checks are performed:
Cause of transmission is
Activation or
Abortion of Activation
Type identifier in the spontaneous information object corresponds with the parameterized.
Command identifier is
No definition or
Short command execution time or
Long command execution time
Command state of a single command is
ON (OFF is not permitted)
Command state of a double command is
OFF or
ON
If the formal check is not passed,
the command is rejected and

a negative confirmation of the activation is sent
7.5.9.3.2 Direct Command
The procedure for the command transmission according to IEC 60870-5-101/104 for "direct
command" ("execution command") is utilized if the maximum time between select and execute
is "0".
On reception of the spontaneous information object "command" with the cause of transmis-
sion "activation" and the data point identifier "execute", the command output procedure is initi-
ated.
1-out-of-n check
No command selected
No command in execution
Control circuit checks (dependent on the system element)
Depending on these checks a positive or negative confirmation of the activation takes place.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.9.3.3 Select and Execute Command
The procedure for the command transmission according to IEC 60870-5-101/104 for "select-
and execute command" is utilized if the maximum time between select and execute is greater
than "0". The corresponding parameter specifies, within which time the execute command
must be received following the selection command.
Selection Command (Select)

sion "activation" and the data point identifier "select" gets checked, whether the selective
command is permitted.
Maximum time between select and execute > 0.

1-out-of-n check
No command selected.
No command in execution.
If these conditions are not fulfilled,

a negative confirmation of the activation is sent.
If these conditions are fulfilled,
a positive confirmation of the activation is sent and

the activation the execute command is waited for.
Expiration of Timeout
If the maximum time between select and execute expires,
the selected command is rejected.
Abortion of the Selection

The waiting state can be terminated by means of a spontaneous information object "com-
mand" with the cause of transmission "deactivation", the qualifier of command "S/E" is not rel-
evant.
The command to be executed is selected, it means the elements of the spontaneous in-
formation object of the select- and execute command are identical, except the elements
"cause of transmission", "S/E" (irrelevant) and the elements of timetag.
a negative confirmation of the abortion of the activation is sent and

the selected command is NOT rejected.
the selected command is aborted and

a positive confirmation of the abortion of the activation is sent.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Execute Command (execute)

sion "activation" and the data point identifier "execute" within the set maximum time between
select and execute after a selection command gets checked, whether the execute command
is permitted:
formation object of select- and execute command are identical, except the element "S/E"
and the elements of the timetag.
1-out-of-n check
No command in execution.
Control circuit checks (dependent on the system element).


the command output initiated (dependent on the system element).
7.5.9.3.4 1-out-of-n Check
SICAM MIC permits the output of only one command at a time. With reception of the sponta-
neous information object "command" the command output is busy as long as the command
output is active.
The 1-out-of-n check cannot be deactivated and is always effective concerning the entire sys-
tem (applies for all command outputs).
The reception of a spontaneous information object "command" during a busy command output
has the effect, that
the command will be rejected and

7.5.9.3.5 Set Control Location
The cause of transmission is derived from the originator address of the corresponding infor-
mation object "command".
On reaching the setpoint position or after expiration of the intermediate position suppression
time during a valid command output, in the spontaneous information object "double-point in-
formation" the cause of transmission is entered dependent on the originator address.
In all other cases (no valid command activation etc.) changes of the state are forwarded with
an originator address "spontaneous".

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The following table shows the derivation of the cause of transmission from the control location:
Originator address Cause of transmission

0 spontaneous
1…127 return information, caused by a remote command
128…255 return information, caused by a local command
7.5.9.4 Monitor Pulse Duration
7.5.9.4.1 Command Output Time
The command output time defines how long the actuator is actuated. It is differentiated be-
tween
a command output time independent of the process and

a command output time dependent on the process.
For the command output time independent of the process, the output time is defined in the
spontaneous information object "command":
Short or long command output time:

The command output time is to be set for all the commands of the I/O module.
No definition:
For each data point the command output time can be set (command output duration no
additional definition).
If the command output time = 0,

the activation is negatively confirmed.
So that the output time is effective in the spontaneous information object "Command", the
state information monitoring "Termination (TERM)" must be deactivated.
For the command output time dependent on the process the duration of the command output
is normally determined by the return information .
7.5.9.4.2 Return Information Monitoring
The state information monitoring is used to
limit the command output to the output time required by the process and
signal an unsuccessful command initiation.
The state information monitoring can be activated for each command, likewise the source of
the command return information (process-technical address).
For a correct function of the return information monitoring a positive edge of the return infor-
mation is required. For double command only the relevant return information (ON or OFF) is
evaluated.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Note
To exclude misconduct for the signaling of an unsuccessful command output, the return information moni-
toring time should be longer than the command output time.
Maintained actuator
Actuate actuator
Command output time
Return information
Return information
monitoring time
Command ACT
information object
spontaneous
Command ACTCON positive positive
Command ACTTERM positive positive
7.5.9.4.3 Special Cases
Actuator does not reach the desired end position

If the actuator does not reach the endposition, or only after expiration of the command return
information monitoring time,
the actuator is activated for the command output duration and

Actuate actuator
Command output time
Return information
Return information
monitoring time
Command ACT
information object
spontaneous
Command ACTCON positive
Command ACTTERM negative

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.9.5 Prepare Control Circuit (dependent on the System Element)
7.5.9.5.1 Idle Check
The idle check is performed periodically, even if no command is to be output.
By means of reading the relay coil activation the idle check recognizes if all the relays (com-
mand relays, group relays, output relays) are in idle state (switched off).
If the idle check recognizes an error, all the relays are switched off once again and a new idle
check is performed. If furthermore no idle state is present, an abortion with blockage is per-
formed as error handling.
7.5.9.5.2 Selective Activation Check
By means of reading the relay coil activation the selective activation check recognizes if ex-
clusively the desired relay(s) is (are) activated.
With the selective activation check a further 1-out-of-n check is performed to prevent an un-
wanted switch-on of several actuators by means of a defect of the module.
If the selective activation check recognizes an error, the desired relay is activated once again.
If the relay remains furthermore in the wrong position, an abortion with blockage is performed
as error handling.
7.5.9.5.3 Resistance Check
The resistance check can be switched on for each command. Thereby the possibility exists to
perform the resistance check with each command output or only with the periodical control
circuit check.
With the resistance check a further 1-out-of-n check is performed to prevent an unwanted
switch-on of several actuators by means of an external wiring error (for instance short-circuit
between two or more actuators).
The resistance check determines the resistance of the actuator to be activated. The meas-
urement is performed with a reference voltage of 2.5 V or 10 V dependent of the parameter-
ized resistor value. The measured resistance may have a deviation of +40% up to 27.6% of
the parameterized resistance value.
Note
A safe recognition of external wiring errors is given only if the resistance of all actuators that are activated
by a system element, is approximately equal.
The resistance check is used also for the recognition of remaining closed relays on the mod-
ule after switching off. Thereby a resistance of must be measured.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.9.5.4 Electric Current Measurement
The electric current measurement can be switched on for each command. It checks the exter-
nal command output circuit for instance on short-circuit or break.
7.5.9.5.5 Activation of Actuators with Self Interruption
With the connection of actuators with interruptable command output circuit, a correct current
measurement is no longer possible. So that no error is detected with this circuitry variant, the
periodical current measurement can be switched off with a corresponding parameter. The first
current measurement after activation of the actuator is not affected with that.
7.5.9.5.6 Earth-Fault Check
In dependance of the wiring variant 2 methods for the earth-fault recognition are applied:
with 1.5 or 2-pole circuitry by means of an electric current measurement

with 1-pole circuitry by means of a resistance check
For the further contemplations 3 kinds of grounding of the battery (points A, B and C in the fol-
lowing figures and explanations) are differentiated:
A…Plus pole of the battery grounded

B…Battery symmetrically grounded
C…Minus pole of the battery grounded
Legend for the subsequent figures:
UBAT = 24…220 VDC

RSYM = 56 k
RM = 900
RL = 30…44 k
RE < 145 k
Earth-Fault Recognition with 1.5 or 2-pole Circuitry

With this circuitry variants the earth-fault check can be switched on for each command inde-
pendently of the resistance check or the electric current measurement. Thereby the possibility
exists to perform the resistance check with each command output or only with the periodical
control circuit check.
Warning
With 2-pole circuitry, for proper function of the earth-fault recognition the group relay must be used addi-
tionally.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Output relay Group relay Command relay Actuator

A
I
RE
Measurement circuit &
B UBAT Test voltage RL
Semi-conductor switch
RE
II
C RM
RSYM
External Internal External
An earth-fault is detected in each combination of grounding type (A, B, C) and location of the
earth-fault (I, II).
Earth-Fault Recognition with 1-pole Circuitry

With this circuitry variant the earth-fault check is performed always in the process of the re-
sistance check.
However, a wiring fault, a wrong resistance of the actuator, or an earth-fault can not be differ-
entiated.
Warning
It depends on the battery grounding method whether an earth-fault can be detected.
Output relay Group relay Command relay Actuator

A
I
RE
Measurement circuit &
B Test voltage RL
Semi-conductor switch
RE
II
C RSYM RM
External Internal External
Grounding method Earth-fault Detection Remarks

A I No Generally not relevant because the
earth fault creates a parallel connection
II Yes The actuator is short-circuit by the earth
fault
B I No Usually detected by an external moni-
toring device
II Yes The measured resistance is outside the
allowed tolerance
C I No Battery short-circuit
II No Actuator is activated without switching
operation

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.9.6 Error Handling
The error handling of the command output distinguishes between:
Meaning
Abortion Error in the operation or parameterization

Abortion with diagnosis Error in the external wiring
Abortion with blockage Error in the module
Note
In the event of an error the command output tries to deactivate all the relays in order to interrupt the com-
mand output circuit. Whether the command output circuit is interrupted in fact is dependent on the error.
7.5.9.6.1 Abortion
The command output is aborted and a spontaneous information object with negative "confir-
mation of the activation" or negative "termination of the activation" is sent.
Consequently the system element is ready for a command.
7.5.9.6.2 Abortion with Diagnosis
The command output is aborted, a diagnosis information is set and a spontaneous information
object with negative "confirmation of the activation" or negative "termination of the activation"
is sent.
Consequently the system element is ready for a command.
7.5.9.6.3 Abortion with Blockage
If the error is resulting from a defect on the module the command output is blocked. If occa-
sion arises no spontaneous information object "confirmation of the activation" or "termination
of the activation" can be sent upon a command.
This state can be corrected either by means of a power-up or a reset of the system element.
The startup behavior can be set by parameter.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.9.7 Periodical Control Circuit Check
The periodical control circuit check recognizes if the command circuits are ready to operate
without starting the actuator. The check is performed in a settable grid.
Procedure:
Idle check by means of reading the relay coil activation status

Check on relay contacts got stuck
Check of all control circuits by means of sequential activation of the relays. Thereby a se-
lective activation check and a continuity check or a resistance check is carried out.
7.5.9.8 Output
The command output takes place dependent on the command type (single command or dou-
ble command, alternatively 1-pole, 1.5-pole or 2-pole), via up to 4 digital outputs. On the mas-
ter control element only 1-pole commands can be output.
The output takes place for I/O modules in the adjusted acquisition grid for TM modules
(System Settings), for master control element I/Os immediately. The parameters for the pro-
cessing functions can be entered in the Settings of the I/O module.
7.5.9.8.1 Circuitry Variants
1-pole Circuitry
Peripheral Element Advantage:
Command
Actuator Simpliest wiring of the actuators (e.g. ex-
relay 0
ternal common busbar with direct connec-
tion to the battery).
Command
relay 1 Disadvantage:
Single error in the wiring can lead to un-
wanted activation of the actuator. Single
error in the area of the busbar (e.g. short
circuit) leads to a blocking of all the actua-
Command tors.
relay n
Output
relay

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
1.5-pole Circuitry
Command Single error in the wiring can not lead to an
Actuator
relay 0
unwanted activation of the actuator. Wiring
of the actuators via an external common
Command
relay 1
busbar is possible.
Disadvantage:
Higher wiring effort for the actuators as with
1-poler circuitry. Single error in the area of
the busbar (e.g. short circuit) leads to a
Command blocking of all the actuators.
relay n
Output
relay
2-pole Circuitry
Command The occurrence of an error at an actuator is
relay 0 Actuator non-retroactive on the other actuators.
Disadvantage:
Higher wiring effort for the actuators.
Command
relay 1
Command
relay n
Output
relay

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.9.9 Triggering via Spontaneous Message Reception
The activation of the command output takes place via a spontaneous message. The com-
mand output is corresponding to the entered state in the message.
This table describes the data point quality descriptor and the cause of transmission according
to IEC 60870-5-101/104.

S/E…select/execute Select/execute command
QU…qualifier of command 0…command output time corresponding to the parameter of
each command
1…command output time corresponding to the global parameter
per I/O module for short command output time
2…command output time corresponding to the global parameter
per I/O module for long command output time
3…persistent command (not supported)
Cause of transmission
06…activation Command with select leads to a preparation of the command

output
Command with execute leads to a command output
08…deactivation A prepared command output ("select") is cancelled
P/N…positive/negative confirma- Not evaluated
tion
The single command or the double command is confirmed by a message with the same for-
mat.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
to IEC 60870-5-101/104.

S/E…select/execute Corresponding to the received command message
QU…qualifier of command Corresponding to the received command message
07…confirmation of the activation Positive confirmation on select command

no command output running (1-out-of-n) and
command output execute, if all conditions for the execute
command or for the direct command are fulfilled
Positive confirmation on execute command
no command output running (1-out-of-n) and
"select/execute" not set or
this command has been prepared by a "select" and
all the set checks are passed (before closing output relay)
otherwise there is a negative confirmation
09…deactivation confirmation Positive confirmation on
Command output prepared ("select")
otherwise a negative confirmation takes place
10…termination of the activation Only if the command initiation has been answered by a positive
"activation confirmation"
Positive confirmation on
Command output ended properly and
Return information in correct state
otherwise there is a negative confirmation
P/N…positive/negative confirma- Refer to cause of transmission 07, 09 and 10
tion
The pulse command output supports only data formats in the compatible range of the
IEC 60870-5-101. The format of the commands cannot be set by parameter.
The following type identifications are valid for the single command:

single command with time tag 58 BOOL 7 Byte
single command without time tag 45 BOOL -
The following type identifications are valid for the double command:

double command with time tag 59 BOOL 7 Byte
double command without time tag 46 BOOL -

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The allocation of the commands to the binary outputs is done data point by data point.
Parameter Choice Meaning Scope

Pin OUT D00 1) Fixed assigned digital output
OUT D01 1) 2) on the master control or
I/O module
OUT D02 1) Fixed assigned digital output
: on the I/O module
OUT D07 1)
OUT D10 1) 3) Fixed assigned digital output
: on the I/O module
OUT D17 1) 3)
CA00 4) Fixed assigned digital output
: on the I/O module
CA07 4)
CB00 4) Fixed assigned digital output
: on the I/O module
CB07 4)
DP Calculated automatically corre-
sponding to hardware configu-
ration
Type single command Selection single command Dependent on the
double command selection double command; method
single-point 1) "single command" default
not connected
Method 1-pole Connection (single) 1 digital output
Connection (double) 2 digital outputs
1.5-pole 5) Connection (single) 2 digital outputs 6)
Connection (double) 3 digital outputs 6)
2-pole 5) Connection (single) 2 digital outputs
Connection (double) 4 digital outputs
IOA1/IOA2/IOA3 0…255/0…255/0…255 Arbitrary IOA Per command
1)
not for DO-6220, DO-6221, DO-6230
2)
the output D01 of master control element can alternatively to the "normal" command output also
be used as watchdog or as fault contact; in this case no double command output is possible on
the master control element
3)
only for DO-6200
4)
only for DO-6220, DO-6221, DO-6230
5)
not for DO-6200
6)
1 output for activation of the group relay

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.9.12 Settings
The following parameters can be determined for the processing of the single or double com-
mands:

Short command 0.01…655.35 s 500 ms default Per I/O module /
output time per master con-
trol element
Long command 0.01…655.35 s 6 s default Per I/O module /
output time per master con-
trol element
Max. time between 0…6553.5 s 0 default (direct/only execute) Per I/O module /
select and execute per master con-
trol element
Termination 0.1…6553.5 s 15 s default (CON->TERM) Per I/O module /
(TERM) per master con-
trol element
Command output 0…655.35 s 1 s default Per command
duration without
additional definition
IOA 1,2,3 of the 0…255/0…255/0…255 0/0/0 default (not used) Per command
command return
information
Polarity +/- Per I/O module
Control circuit 0…255 Per I/O module
check
Resistance value 1 30…44000 Per I/O module
Output circuit yes/no Per command
interrupted
Current check yes/no Per command
Resistance check yes/no/only in case of Per command
control circuit check
Output relay 0/1 Per command
Ground-fault check yes/no/only in case of Per command
control circuit check (1.5 or 2-pole)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.10 Binary Information Output
Output of binary states that are specified either by periodical information of the higher-level
open-/closed-loop control function or can be set with spontaneous information objects.
The function is only possible in conjunction with an I/O module for binary information output.
The binary information output comprises following functions:
Release/Blocking
Activation via spontaneous message reception
Output
The binary information output can be released or blocked in the Configuration of the Contacts
of the corresponding I/O module.
The release is done for each data point by assignment of the information "single-point infor-
mation" and an unambiguous information object addresse to a hardware pin.
and the information output is terminated. Error markings are deleted.
7.5.10.2 Output
The binary information output is done respectively via a digital output.
The output takes place for I/O modules in the adjusted "acquisition grid for TM modules"
(System Settings), for master control element I/Os immediately. The behavior of the output
can be set in the Settings of the I/O module.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.10.2.1 Behavior of the Output upon Failure
On failure of the communication, or on activation by means of spontaneous message recep-

tion depending on the data point quality descriptor, the output state can be kept or terminat-
ed.
The behavior of the output "in case of communication break" can be selected.
Note
If the output state shall be terminated upon communication failure, the termination takes place after a
delay of 5 minutes.
The following figure shows the behavior dependent on the settable parameter:
Failure mode: terminate
power up ready failure reset ready

firmware
de-energized startup normal operation startup normal operation
shut down
Failure mode: keep
power up ready failure reset ready

firmware
shut down
kept value

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The digital output is activated by means of a spontaneous message. The activation of the in-
formation output takes place with the state entered in the message.
to IEC 60870-5-101/104.

BL…blocked Not evaluated
SB…substituted Not evaluated
NT…not topical Information state is not accepted according to the adjusted be-
havior on failure (kept) or output is terminated
IV…invalid Information state is not accepted (kept) or output is terminated
02…background scan Information state assessed depending on the data point quality
descriptor
03…spontaneous Information state assessed depending on the data point quality
descriptor
05…requested Information state assessed depending on the data point quality
descriptor
11…return information caused by Information state assessed depending on the data point quality
remote command descriptor
12…return information caused by Information state assessed depending on the data point quality
local command descriptor
20…interrogated by GI Information state assessed depending on the data point quality
descriptor
21…interrogated by group 1 Information state assessed depending on the data point quality
interrogation descriptor
:
interrogation
The binary information output supports only data formats within the compatible range of the
IEC 60870-5-101 are supported. The format of the single-point information in output direction
can not be set with parameters. It is dependent on the remote station.
The following type identifications are valid for the single-point information.

single-point information with time 30 BOOL 7 Byte
single-point information with time 2 BOOL 3 Byte
single-point information without time 1 BOOL -

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The allocation of single-point information to the binary outputs is done data point by data
point.
Output Choice Meaning Scope

1)
Pin OUT D00 Fixed assigned digital output
OUT D01 1) on the master control or
I/O module
OUT D02 1) Fixed assigned digital output
… on the I/O module
OUT D07 1)
OUT D10 1) 2) Fixed assigned digital output
… on the I/O module
OUT D17 1) 2)
ration
Type single command Selection single-point inform.; Per output
double command "single command" default
single-point 1)
not connected
Method 1-pole Connection type (irrelevant) Per output
IOA1/IOA2/IOA3 0…255/0…255/0…255 Arbitrary IOA Per information
1)
not for DO-6220, DO-6221, DO-6230
2)
only for DO-6200
7.5.10.6 Settings
The following parameters can be set for the processing of a single-point information:

In case of commu- keep output "terminate output" default Per output
nication break terminate output"

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.11 Current Output
Output of setpoint values via analog outputs for current output. Setpoint values can be set ei-
ther by periodical information of the higher-level open-/closed-loop control function or by spon-
taneous information objects.
The function is only possible in conjunction with an I/O module for analog value output.
The current output comprises the following functions:
Release/Blocking
Initiate setpoint command output
Formal check
Direct command or
Technological adaption
Output
Substitute value or keep value at failure
The current output can be released or blocked in the Configuration of the Contacts of the cor-
responding I/O module.
The release is done for each data point by assignment of the information "current" and an un-
ambiguous information object addresse to a hardware pin.
and the current output is terminated. Error markings are deleted.
7.5.11.2 Initiate Setpoint Command Output
The initiation of the setpoint command output procedure is carried out by means of a sponta-
neous information object "setpoint command". The function setpoint command output sup-
ports both methods for command transmission according to IEC 60870-5-101/104:
Direct command

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
On reception of the spontaneous information object "setpoint command", an internal check

takes place before the setpoint command is carried out.
Activation or
Abortion of Activation.

command" ("execute command") is utilized if the maximum time between select and execute
is "0".
On reception of the spontaneous information object "setpoint command" with the cause of
transmission "activation" and the data point identifier "execute" the command output proce-
dure is initiated.
Selection Command (select)

transmission "activation" and the data point identifier "select" the setpoint value output is pre-
pared.

The setpoint command to be selected is released.
the setpoint command is rejected and


the execute command is waited for.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
the selected setpoint command is rejected.

The waiting state can be terminated by means of a spontaneous information object "setpoint
command" with the cause of transmission "deactivation", the qualifier of command "S/E" is not
relevant.

the selected command is rejected and


transmission "activation" and the data point identifier "execute" within the set maximum time
between select and execute after a selection command gets checked, whether the execute
command is permitted:
The setpoint command to be executed is selected, it means the elements of the spontane-
ous information object of select- and execute command are identical, except the element
"S/E" and the elements of the timetag.
Setpoint command not in execution.


the setpoint command output is initiated.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.11.3 Technological Adaptation
The technological adaptation enables to adapt the received setpoint value (technological or
normalized value) to the current value to be output.
By parameterizing two interpolation points the current value to be output is adapted linearly.
For this, the technological or normalized value Y 0 is set for the lower limit of the output range
X0, and the technological or normalized value Y100 for the upper limit of the output range X100 .
The parameterized output range must thereby lie within the limits defined by the hardware.
The X-values define the current to be output. The Y-values define the received setpoint value.
7.5.11.3.1 Characteristic
Example: Output of -10 mA to +10 mA

Activation via a setpoint command, normalized value
Setpoint value Y0
X0 X100
Y0
Setpoint value Output

Y0 -1 X0 -10 mA
Y100 1 X100 10 mA

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.11.4 Output
The current output is done respectively via an analog output. The value determined as a result
of the activation and processed afterwards is output.

tion depending on the data point quality descriptor, the last value output is kept or a parame-
terized substitute value is output.
Failure mode: substitute value
reset ready failure reset ready

firmware
shut down
value = 0 substitute value
Failure mode: keep

Firmware
stillgesetzt
value = 0 kept value

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The analog output is activated via a spontaneous message. The activation takes place with
the value entered in the message and adapted for the output.
to IEC 60870-5-101/104 and the consequences for the adaptation and the output.

S/E…select/execute See cause of transmission "activation"
QL…qualifier of setpoint com- Not evaluated
mand
06…activation Setpoint command with "select" leads to the preparation of a

setpoint value output
Setpoint command with "execute" leads to a setpoint value out-
put
08…deactivation A prepared setpoint value output (select) is cancelled
tion
The setpoint command is confirmed by a message with the same format.
to IEC 60870-5-101/104.

S/E…select/execute Corresponding to the received setpoint command
QL…qualifier of setpoint com- Corresponding to the received setpoint command
mand
07…confirmation of the activation Positive confirmation on

setpoint value prepared ("select"), if all conditions for the
select command are fulfilled
setpoint value executed ("execute"), if all conditions for the
execute command or for the direct command are fulfilled
setpoint value prepared ("select")
10…termination of the activation Not supported
tion

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The current output supports only data formats within the compatible area of the
IEC 60870-5-101. The format of the setpoint commands can not be set by parameter, it is ra-
ther dependent on the remote station.
The following type identifications are valid for the output of current values:

setpoint command normalized without 48 REAL -
time
setpoint command normalized with time 61 REAL 7 Byte
setpoint command scaled without time 49 DINT -
setpoint command scaled with time 62 DINT 7 Byte
setpoint command floatingpoint without 50 REAL -
time
setpoint command floatingpoint with time 63 REAL 7 Byte
The allocation of the current values to the analog outputs is done data point by data point.

Pin OUT V0 I/U Fixed assigned analog output 20 mA / 500
: on the I/O module 10 mA / 1k
OUT V3 I/U
DP fixed Calculated automatically corre-
ration
Unit Current Selection current output; Per output
voltage "voltage" default
not used
Type current normalized Data type; Per output
current scaled "normalized" default
current floating point
IOA1/IOA2/IOA3 0…255/0…255/0…255 Arbitrary IOA Per output

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.11.8 Settings
The following parameters can be set for the processing of the current output:

Max. time between 0.1…6553.5 s 0 default (direct/only execute) Per i/o module
select and execute
In case of commu- keep output Per output
nication failure substitute value output
Substitute value 0…4095 0 default Per output
Nominal range X_0 -10 mA Fixed corresponding to Per output
% -20 mA X_100%
Nominal range 10 mA 10 ma default Per output
X_100 % 20 mA
Nominal range Y_0 -1…1 Normalized; -1 default Per output
-32768…32767 Scaled; -32000 default
19
-1.0x10 … 1.0x1020 *) Floating point; 32000 default
Nominal range -1…1 Normalized; 1 default Per output
Y_100 -32768…32767 Scaled; 32000 default
19
*)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.12 Voltage Output
Output of setpoint values via analog outputs for voltage output. Setpoint values can be set ei-
ther by periodical information of the higher-level open-/closed-loop control function or by spon-
taneous information objects.
The function is only possible in conjunction with an I/O module for analog value output.
The voltage output comprises the following functions:
Release/Blocking
Initiate command output
Formal check
Direct command or
Technological adaption
Output
Substitute value or keep value at failure
The voltage output can be released or blocked in the Configuration of the Contacts of the cor-
responding I/O module.
The release is done for each data point by assignment of the information "voltage" and an un-
ambiguous information object addresse to a hardware pin.
and the voltage output is terminated. Error markings are deleted.
7.5.12.2 Initiate Setpoint Command Output
The initiation of the setpoint command output procedure is carried out by means of a sponta-
neous information object "setpoint command". The function setpoint command output sup-
ports both methods for command transmission according to IEC 60870-5-101/104:
Direct command

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
On reception of the spontaneous information object "setpoint command", an internal check

takes place before the setpoint command is carried out.
Activation or
Abortion of Activation.

command" ("execute command") is utilized if the maximum time between select and execute
is "0".
transmission "activation" and the data point identifier "execute" the command output proce-
dure is initiated.
Selection Command (select)

transmission "activation" and the data point identifier "select" the setpoint value output is pre-
pared.

The setpoint command to be selected is released.
the setpoint command is rejected and


the execute command is waited for.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
the selected setpoint command is rejected.

The waiting state can be terminated by means of a spontaneous information object "setpoint
command" with the cause of transmission "deactivation", the qualifier of command "S/E" is not
relevant.

the selected command is rejected and


transmission "activation" and the data point identifier "execute" within the set maximum time
between select and execute after a selection command gets checked, whether the execute
command is permitted:
The setpoint command to be executed is selected, it means the elements of the spontane-
ous information object of select- and execute command are identical, except the element
"S/E" and the elements of the timetag.
Setpoint command not in execution.


the setpoint command output is initiated.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.12.3 Technological Adaptation
The technological adaptation enables to adapt the received setpoint value (technological or
normalized value) to the voltage value to be output.
By parameterizing two interpolation points the voltage value to be output is adapted linearly.
For this, the technological or normalized value Y 0 is set for the lower limit of the output range
X0, and the technological or normalized value Y100 for the upper limit of the output range X100 .
The parameterized output range must thereby lie within the limits defined by the hardware.
The X-values define the voltage to be output. The Y-values define the received setpoint value.
7.5.12.3.1 Characteristic
Example: Output of –10 V to +10 V

Activation via a setpoint command, normalized value
Setpoint value Y0
X0 X100
Y0
Setpoint value Output

Y0 -1 X0 -10 V
Y100 1 X100 10 V

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.12.4 Output
The voltage output is done respectively via an analog output. The value determined as a re-
sult of the activation and processed afterwards is output.

tion depending on the data point quality descriptor, the last value output is kept or a parame-
terized substitute value is output.
Failure mode: substitute value

firmware
shut down
value = 0 substitute value
Failure mode: keep

Firmware
stillgesetzt
value = 0 kept value

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The analog output is activated via a spontaneous message. The activation takes place with
the value entered in the message and adapted for the output.
to IEC 60870-5-101/104 and the consequences for the adaptation and the output.

S/E…select/execute See cause of transmission "activation"
QL…qualifier of setpoint com- Not evaluated
mand
06…activation Setpoint command with "select" leads to the preparation of a

setpoint value output
Setpoint command with "execute" leads to a setpoint value out-
put
08…deactivation A prepared setpoint value output ("select") is cancelled
tion
The setpoint command is confirmed by a message with the same format.
to IEC 60870-5-101/104.

S/E…select/execute Corresponding to the received setpoint command
QL…qualifier of setpoint com- Corresponding to the received setpoint command
mand
07…confirmation of the activation Positive confirmation on

setpoint value prepared ("select"), if all conditions for the
select command are fulfilled
setpoint value executed ("execute"), if all conditions for the
execute command or for the direct command are fulfilled
setpoint value prepared ("select")
10…termination of the activation Not supported
tion

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The voltage output supports only data types in the compatible area of the IEC 60870-5-101
are supported. The format of the setpoint commands can not be set by parameter, it is rather
dependent on the remote station.
The following type identifications are valid for the output of voltage values:

setpoint command normalized without 48 REAL -
time
setpoint command normalized with time 61 REAL 7 Byte
setpoint command scaled without time 49 DINT -
setpoint command scaled with time 62 DINT 7 Byte
setpoint command floatingpoint without 50 REAL -
time
setpoint command floatingpoint with time 63 REAL 7 Byte
The allocation of the voltage values to the analog outputs is done data point by data point.

Pin OUT V0 I/U Fixed assigned analog output 10 V / 1k
: on the I/O module
OUT V3 I/U
ration
Unit Voltage Selection voltage output; Per output
current "voltage" default
not used
Type voltage normalized Data type; Per output
voltage scaled "normalized" default
voltage floating point
IOA1/IOA2/IOA3 0…255/0…255/0…255 Arbitrary IOA Per output

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.5.12.8 Settings
The following parameters can be set for the processing of the voltage output:

Max. time between 0.1…6553.5 s 0 default (direct/only execute) Per i/o module
select and execute
In case of commu- keep output Per output
nication failure substitute value output
Substitute value 0…4095 0 default Per output
Nominal range X_0 -10 V Fixed Per output
%
Nominal range 10 V Fixed Per output
X_100 %
Nominal range Y_0 -1…1 Normalized; -1 default Per output
-32768…32767 Scaled; -32000 default
19
Nominal range -1…1 Normalized; 1 default Per output
Y_100 -32768…32767 Scaled; 32000 default
19
*)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.6 Decentralized Archive
By means of the decentralized archive (DEAR) it is possible to store events of a substation lo-
cally and – whenever it is required – to transmit to the corresponding control system. On the
other hand it is possible to restore the archive of a control system after a communication fault.
Note
The online engineering via web browser is supported by the firmware CPC60 as of revision 14.
The offline engineering is supported by WEBmic as of revision 14, as well as by the SICAM TOOLBOX II
as of version 4.0.
SICAM MIC supports 1 archive. This archive can consist of several files.
DEAR is separated in three partial functions:
Saving of data of a substation

Transmission to the control system
Update of the archives in the control system
7.6.1 Manner of Operation
7.6.1.1 Acquisition of Events
Every data point used in a substation can be assigned for the record in the decentralized ar-
chive by parameter setting.
SICAM MIC records an assigned data point dependent on the type in the archive:
Spontaneous upon change of state (binary information)

In a time-scale (measured value)
Each record contains a time tag with a resolution of 1 ms.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Structure of a record:
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte
0 Type identification
1 Cause of transmission
2
CASDU
3
4 IOA1
5 IOA2
6 IOA3
7
9 Data field (max. 5 byte)

10
11
12
Milliseconds
13
14 IV 0 Minutes
15 S 0 Hours
7.6.1.2 Addressing of the Data Points
The addressing of the data points is basically arbitrary. All the data points recorded in an ar-
chive have the same CASDU in SICAM MIC. It is not possible to assign more than one
CASDU.
7.6.1.3 Archiving before Time Setting
Data points are saved only if the time of SICAM MIC is set. Archive records with relative time
are not possible.
With dial-up traffic a connection is established after startup and in order to that the time will be
set.
7.6.1.4 Handling of the Day Alternation
In case of a day alternation, the so-called "day alternation buffer" is recorded chronological in
the ring. If a data point with a time-tag of the day before has been received, it is recorded be-
fore the day alternation information since never the complete time-tag is stored.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.6.1.5 Supported Type Identifications
Since for the data transmission the file transfer according to IEC 60870-5 is used, only type
identifications which are named in the standard are supported:
TI Data point type Type of archiving

1)
30 single-point information with 7 bytes time Spontaneous
1)
31 double-point information with 7 bytes time Spontaneous
34 measured value, normalized with 7 bytes time Cyclic 2)
35 measured value, scaled with 7 bytes time Cyclic 2)
36 measured value, short floating point with 7 bytes time Cyclic 2)
1)
37 integrated total with 7 bytes time Spontaneous
1)
upon each change of state of a data point, this is recorded in the archive
2)
datapoints are recorded in the archive according to the adjusted recording grid
7.6.1.6 Generation of Archive Files
To reduce the load of the communication link the archive is apportioned in files. Depending on
the Configuration as much records are stored temporarily in the NV RAM until the selected file
size is reached. Subsequently, in each case a file is produced and stored on the SIM card. If
the maximum number of 975 records in the archive is reached, every further record overwrites
each time the oldest record (first in – first out principle).
During the storing of the file from the NV RAM on the SIM card the NV RAM is not utilizable
for further archives of data points. The data are recorded at this moment in the RAM and will
be stored in the NV RAM after terminating of the file writing. The file in the NV RAM will be de-
leted after successful writing on the SIM card.
Note
In case of a voltage failure during the file writing data can be lost.
To enable a fast access in case of an interrogation, for each file the time of the first record and
the time of the last record is stored in the NV RAM.
Note
During startup SICAM MIC compares the file information with that on the SIM card. If there is any differ-
ence, the stored archive on the SIM card will be deleted and an error information is recorded in the History
Diagnosis. Therefore, the archive is not preserved if the SIM card is put into another master control ele-
ment.
The datapoints are recorded with their datapoint number each in the files, the information ob-
ject address of the datapoint is added only upon interrogation of the file. The assignment of
the information object address and type identification is stored on the SIM card.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.6.2 File Transfer according to IEC 60870-5
Calling the archive has to be initiated by a control system. The file transfer is performed ac-
cording to IEC 60870-5. Every control system which works according to that standard can ini-
tiate a transfer of archive files from SICAM MIC.
Note
For instance with a SAT 250 SCALA control system the versions as of 6.10 must be used for calling the
archive. The SAT 250 SCALA System will initiate a file transfer automatically when a going communication
error is recognized.
The control center system SICAM 230 does not support the call of the archive.
To enable the interrogation for the main directory, those CASDU1 and CASDU2 must be
known. All the further addresses for addressing the subdirectories and files are determined by
the sequence of interrogation.
The sequence of messages for the interrogation of archive files is defined according to
IEC 60870-5-101/-104:
1. Interrogation main directory by the control system
SICAM MIC sends the subdirectory list
IOA1 IOA2 IOA3 Name Type Length Time

001 000 000 00003 Dir 0 07.07.04 08:49:00.000
2. Interrogation subdirectory by the control system
SICAM MIC sends the list of files
IOA1 IOA2 IOA3 Name Type Length Time

002 000 000 00013 File 0 07.07.04 01:45:00.000
003 000 000 00014 File 0 07.07.04 02:40:00.000
004 000 000 00015 File 0 07.07.04 03:34:00.000
005 000 000 00016 File 0 07.07.04 04:28:00.000
006 000 000 00017 File 0 07.07.04 05:22:00.000
007 000 000 00018 File 0 07.07.04 06:16:00.000
008 000 000 00019 File 0 07.07.04 07:10:00.000
009 000 000 00020 File 0 07.07.04 08:05:00.000
010 000 000 00021 File 0 07.07.04 08:56:00.000
3. Interrogation single files by the control system
SICAM MIC sends the requested file(s)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.6.2.1 Definitions for the Request of Files
The files are transmitted sorted in the file overview. The oldest file is displayed first, the
youngest file last.
The data points within a file are not sorted chronological, however, a single data point
within a file is recorded chronological.
For each file the "time of the last record" into the file is transmitted in the file overview,
since the acquisition time of the data point may not be within the storing time period.
Via the "time of the last record" (creation time) the control system is able to request for the
file(s) which contain the records of the desired recording period.
Interrogation criteria:
A communication failure directly at the interface to the control system is detected by it-
self, and it is able to request for the files over the period of the failure automatically
With communication failure in further hierarchy (at interfaces which do not lead directly
to the control system) a notification of the period to be requested is performed by a
coming/going single-point information
The file directory can be accessed by several remote stations at the same time. A trans-
mission, however, can be performed only to one remote station. If there are several inter-
rogating remote stations, the transmission takes place first to the remote station belonging
to the first received interrogation. The other interrogations are acknowledged negative as
long as the current transmission is completed.
Note
If SICAM MIC recognizes errors in the directory or upon the file handling (for instance a negative acknowl-
edgement, the transmission will be cancelled.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.6.2.2 Parameter Setting Rules for Remote Stations
The following rules apply for Control Systems on SICAM RTUs nodes:
In the remote station do not set a delay time for communication fault.
At interfaces over those archive data to be transmitted set "delete ring".
In the Ax 1703 node addresses of all the files for type identification 126 must be routed de-
tailed, if the spontaneous transmission of the file directory with source address "0" is ena-
bled.
In the Ax 1703 node route detailed all file transmission messages in command direction.
The CASDU 1, 2 for the main directory request (TI 122) must not be 0, 0 and 255, 255.
Only the data format "transmission of event sequences " in a section of 64 kByte is sup-
ported.
In the main directory may exist several subdirectories, however, only one with the
Name "3".
In the subdirectory exist only files with ascending number (0…65535).
Example for the Addressing of an Archive

CASDU1 CASDU2 IOA1 IOA2 IOA3 Remarks
main directory 10 10 0 0 0 Defined by IEC
subdirectory 10 10 1 0 0 Freely selectable
file #1 10 10 2 0 0 Freely selectable
file #2 10 10 3 0 0 Calculated automatically
… … … … … … …

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.6.3 Settings
7.6.3.1 Configuration
The configuration parameters for the decentralized archive apply for the entire SICAM MIC.
Parameter Choice Remark
Timeout for the file transfer 1…255 minutes Delay for cancellation of the
transmission in case of communi-
cation fault;
30 default
Addressing subdirectory 0…255/0…255/0…255 0/0/0 default
Addressing file 0…255/0…255/0…255 0/0/0 default
Recording grid for measured 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 minutes 15 default
values
Number of bytes COT 1, 2 Format for archive entries;
2 default
Number of bytes CASDU 1, 2 Format for archive entries;
2 default
Number of bytes IOA 1, 2, 3 Format for archive entries;
3 default
Maximum message length for 1…200 byte 100 default
one segment
Memory configuration archive 3 files with 250 records each Selection of file number and size;
1) (=750 records) "3 files" default
5 files with 150 records each
(=750 records)
(=800 records)
(=950 records)
(=975 records)
(=8500 records) 2)
Spontaneous transmission of disabled Directory list is transmitted on
directory list with originator 0 enabled change (file written or deleted);
"disabled" default
1)
in the file overview one file more than set in the memory configuration is displayed, since always
one file is being processed (also the total number of data point records can be greater by the
number of records of one file);
if this parameter is changed orthe archive is configured initially, the configuration may take up to
10 minutes after the "ready" display of the master control element
2)
SIM card 128 KB required

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.6.3.2 Assign Data Points of the Peripheral Elements
The assignment of data points for the decentralized archive takes place data point by data
point.
Every data point which is set in the telecontrol function can be selected for the record in the
decentralized archive.
Parameter Value range Meaning/Note Scope

DP fixed Acc. to parameter setting Per data point
Type fixed Acc. to parameter setting Per data point
Text fixed- Acc. to parameter setting Per data point
IOA1/IOA2/IOA3 fixed Acc. to parameter setting Per data point
Archive selected Selection if data point shall be Per data point
not selected recorded in the archive;
"selected" default
7.6.3.3 Assign Data Points of the PLC
Up to 50 data points used in the automation function can be selected for the record in the de-
centralized archive.
Parameter Value range Meaning/Note Scope

*)
DP fixed Added automatically after Per data point
transfer of the IOA
Type fixed *) Added automatically after Per data point
transfer of the IOA
Text fixed *) Added automatically after Per data point
transfer of the IOA , if existing
in the parameterization
IOA1/IOA2/IOA3 0…255/0…255/0…255 *) Per data point
Archive selected Selection if data point shall be Per data point
not selected recorded in the archive;
"selected" default for binary
information items
"not selected" default for
measured values
*)
with initial startup (cold restart) the data points used in the instruction list (inputs) are entered au-
tomatically into the list

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
7.7 Automation
7.7.1 Settings
The Automation Function can be enabled by means of parameter setting.
Parameter Value range Meaning/Note

PLC program exe- Enable Default value: enable
cution Disabled
7.7.2 Technical Determining Factors
Program volume max. 16 kB

Thereof 1 kB temporary memory for flags and parameters of function blocks
Non-volatile memory 256 Byte
Optional assignment of internal variables (flags) by means of marking "retain"
Edit tool for application program
Web browser: Text editor for Instruction List (ASCII format)
SICAM TOOLBOX II: CAEx plus editor for Function Diagram
Number of datapoints max. 256 (valid for all the I/O variables jointly
The data point address of input and output variables in the controller can be the same
(however, this does not increase the total number)
Spontaneous transmission of the datapoints
All the I/O variables generate spontaneous messages upon change

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
A Variables in the IL
Inhalt
A.1 System Variables ......................................................................................... 350

A.2 Data Points from the Peripheral Element ...................................................... 351

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Variables in the IL
A.1 System Variables
System variables (VAR_GLOBAL) can be read out and further processed in the instruction list
(IL).
A.1.1 Processing
Name Meaning Format

PLC_CYCLETIME Cycle time DINT
PLC_CYCLETIME_OVERFLOW Overflow of cycle time BOOL
PLC_PROCESSINGCOUNTER Processing counter DINT
PLC_PROCESSINGTIME Processing time DINT
A.1.2 Dataflow
Name Meaning Format

PLC_TX_DATAFLOW_030 Dataflow control TI30 BOOL
A.1.3 System Errors
Name Meaning Format

PLC_SYSERROR_xxx BOOL
xxx = error number
A list of relevant error numbers can be found in section C.1.1, Error Indications.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Variables in the IL
A.2 Data Points from the Peripheral Element
The datapoints of the peripheral element are listed in the SICAM TOOLBOX II Online Help,
chapter “Parameter documentation and Diagnosis Info”, section “1703 ACP and 1703 Ax
(IEC) Periphery | Firmwares | USIO60” resp. “… | USIO61” under the respective category.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Variables in the IL

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
B Examples for Application Programs
Contents
B.1 Transfer an Input to a Signaling Output and to a Command Output ............... 354
B.2 Combine two Inputs with AND ...................................................................... 355
B.3 Linear Adaptation with Value Selection ......................................................... 356
B.4 Operating Hours Counter.............................................................................. 357
B.5 Bounce Suppression .................................................................................... 359
B.6 Setpoint Command ....................................................................................... 361
B.7 Create Command with ACTCON/ACTTERM via Input .................................. 362
B.8 Speed Comparison ....................................................................................... 367

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
B.1 Transfer an Input to a Signaling Output and to a Com-

mand Output
The first digital input of the master control element (with default address and type identification
I_030_002_000_000.VALUE) is loaded into the accumulator. In the next line the loaded
value is transferred to the outputs O_030_008_000_000.VALUE and
O_045_009_000_000.VALUE.
Changing the input type from single command to single message with the engineering tool
(web browser), the relay at the output D00 picks up when the input becomes logical "1". Oth-
erwise this output address will be sent to the communication because it is not existing within
the periphery. The default address of the command is D01.
PLC_RESET:
PLC_INIT:
PLC_START:
LD I_030_002_000_000.VALUE (*IN00 TI:30 IOA1:002 IOA2:000 IOA3:000*)
ST O_030_008_000_000.VALUE (*store at output as binary information*)
ST O_045_009_000_000.VALUE (*store at output as command*)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
B.2 Combine two Inputs with AND
The cycle time is set to 50ms. The first two inputs of the master control element will be com-
bined by logical AND. The result is transferred to a flag and additional to a digital output. The
type identification of the output is single message.
PLC_RESET:
LD 50 (*load value 50*)
ST PLC_CYCLETIME (*store at system variable for cycle*)
(*time in ms*)
PLC_INIT:
PLC_START:
LD I_030_002_000_000.VALUE (*read input IN00*)
ST AND.IN0 (*store at input 0 for AND function*)
LD I_030_003_000_000.VALUE (*read input IN01*)
ST AND.IN1 (*store at input 1 for AND function*)
CAL AND (*call function*)
ST M_BOOL_TESTFLAG (*store in a flag*)
ST O_030_008_000_000.VALUE (*store as single command output*)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
B.3 Linear Adaptation with Value Selection
Two analog values are compared and the higher one is selected (MAX). With this one an ad-
aptation kx+d is performed. The processed value receives a new address
(O_036_032_001_001.VALUE). The constants for k (M_REAL_CONSTANTforK) and d
(M_REAL_CONSTANTforD) are defined with initial values in the program sequence
PLC_INIT.
PLC_RESET:
LD 10
ST PLC_CYCLETIME (*cycle time in ms*)
PLC_INIT:
LD 10
ST M_REAL_CONSTANTforK (*constant for k*)
LD -5
ST M_REAL_CONSTANTforD (*constant for d*)
PLC_START:
LD I_036_032_000_000.VALUE (*input 1*)
ST MAX.IN0
LD I_036_033_000_000.VALUE (*input 2*)
ST MAX.IN1
CAL MAX (*the greater value of both is used*)
ST M_REAL_MAXVALUE (*serves for reading which value will *)
ST MUL.IN0 (*be used*)
LD M_REAL_CONSTANTforK
ST MUL.IN1
CAL MUL (*the selected value is multiplicated *)
ST ADD.IN0 (*with the constant and results as "kx"*)
LD M_REAL_CONSTANTforD
ST ADD.IN1
CAL ADD (*after the multiplication add "d"*)
ST O_036_032_001_001.VALUE (*selected adapted value*)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
B.4 Operating Hours Counter
The current second value of the system time of SICAM MIC is loaded. Each time to the se-
cond 0 a positive edge is generated and switched to the CU Input of the upward-counter
(CTU_COUNTER.CU). Thereby the counter will be incremented with 1 per minute.
The sum of the operating hours results of two values:
Current counter score (CTU_COUNTER.CV)

Counter score before the last power down (MR_DINT_MINUTES)
The score will be saved in a retaining flag (M_DINT_MINUTESOLD). This means, after a power
down (startup) the counter will continue with incrementing based on the last value.
The hours result by minutes devided by 60. The hours always will be recalculated based on
the minutes, the same after a power down.
PLC_RESET:
LD 10
PLC_INIT:
LD MR_DINT_MINUTES (*load power-fail safe value*)
ST M_DINT_MINUTESOLD (*freeze in a flag as old value*)
PLC_START:
LD PLC_SYSTIME.SEC (*fetch second value of the system time*)
ST M_DINT_SEC (*and store in variable*)
LD M_DINT_SEC (*current second*)
EQ 0 (*compare with second 0*)
ST CTU_COUNTER.CU (*HIGH always at the second 0, required*)
(*edge detection is implemented within*)
(*the counter*)
CAL CTU_COUNTER (*increments the counter*)
LD CTU_COUNTER.CV (*load current counter score*)
LD M_DINT_MINUTESOLD (*load old value*)
CAL ADD (*call ADD function*)
ST MR_DINT_MINUTES (*store sum of operating minutes in a*)
(*retaining flag, after startup the*)
(*old value will be added to the*)
(*current counter score*)
ST DIV.IN0 (*store at input 0 for DIV function*)
LD 60 (*load constant for 60 minutes*)
ST DIV.IN1 (*store at input 1 for DIV function*)
CAL DIV (*call DIV function*)
ST M_DINT_HOURS (*sum of operating hours = minutes*)
(*divided by 60*)
To reset the counter score it is necessary to reset the counter (CTU_COUNTER.R) as well as
the flag with the retained value (M_DINT_MINUTESOLD).

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
This could be executed by a subroutine before PLC_RESET. With RET the subroutine will be
left.
(*SUBROUTINE*)
ResetCounter:
LD 0 (*the old value for operating minutes*)
ST M_DINT_MINUTESOLD (*is set to "0"*)
ST M_BOOL_RESET (*reset the flag for running this*)
(*subroutine*)
LD 1
ST CTU_COUNTER.R (*reset counter by input R*)
RET
(*END SUBROUTINE*)
The call of the subroutine could be executed at the end (after ST M_DINT_HOURS). Therefore
the flag (M_BOOL_RESET) must be set to "1". Instead of the flag an input address could be
used, for instance a command.
Reaching the command CALC the call of the subroutine will be executed. In the subroutine the
flag (M_BOOL_RESET) will be reset to "0", otherwise the counter would last at "0" as long as
the flag will be reset to "0".
LD 0 (*besides reset of the time the*)

ST CTU_COUNTER.R (*counter input R is set to "0"*)
LD M_BOOL_RESET (*if the flag is set to "1"*)

CALC ResetCounter (*call the subroutine ResetCounter*)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
B.5 Bounce Suppression
If an input signal is bouncing the blocked bit (BL bit) is set. The number of state changes until
the BL bit is set, as well as the monitoring time during which the information must be static un-
til the BL bit is reset, are adjustable via constants. An output is set to "0" during the BL bit is
set.
With an edge detection for the rising edge (R_TRIG_INEDRISE0) and the falling edge
(F_EDTIMEFALL0) the counter (CTU_EDC0) will be incremented by 1. At the same time the R
input of the counter is reset via an ON delay for the rising edge (TON_EDTIMERISE0) as well
as for the falling edge (TON_EDTIMEFALL0). With this function all state changes of the input
will be integrated by the counter (started with the first edge and triggered by each following
one).
As soon as a state change of the input happens the flag (M_BOOL_COUNTER00) is reset and
the input of an AND (module 8) is set (inverted). If the sum of state changes is greater as or
equal to a defined number (CV>=PV) the counter output is set as well, and the BL bit is set.
With the set BL bit the output is reset by another AND (module 9).
After expiration of the monitoring time the R input of the counter is set again, and the counter
is reset. If the BL bit is set it will be reset as well (output of module 8 is reset).
R_TRIG_INEDRISE0
Input
> 1 M_BOOL_MODULE03
1
CU 7
Counter Q
3
upward
2
F_TRIG_INEDFALL0
Parameter PV R
M_BOOL_MODULE7
in the INIT part CTU_EDC0
TON_EDTIMERISE0
TON
> 1
4
M_BOOL_COUNTER00
6
TON
5
&
TON_EDTIMEFALL0 Blocked
&
Output
9
In the operation order the R input of the counter must be reset first, because only afterwards
the positive edge at the CU input of the counter causes an increment. Therefore the applica-
tion program handles the R input before the CU input of the counter.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Example:
number of state changes >= 5

monitoring time of the stability of the input = 10 s
PLC_RESET:
LD 20
PLC_INIT:
LD 5 (*number of transients until*)
ST CTU_FLZ0.PV (*information is set bouncing*)
(*once detected as bouncing, the input signal must last statical "1" for
a preset time until the blocked bit will be reset again*)
LD 10000 (*load constant for 10s*)
ST TON_EDTIMERISE0.PT (*ON delay rising edge*)
ST TON_EDTIMEFALL0.PT (*ON delay falling edge*)
PLC_START:
(*Modules 4,5,6,7 – if there are no more state changes of the input, the
counter will be reset when the preset monitoring time has expired*)
LD I_030_002_000_000.VALUE (*input*)
ST M_BOOL_INPUT00
ST TON_EDTIMERISE0.IN (*rising edge - module 4*)
STN TON_EDTIMEFALL0.IN (*falling edge - module 5*)
CAL TON_EDTIMERISE0.IN (*call module 4*)
ST OR.IN0
CAL TON_EDTIMEFALL0 (*call module 5*)
ST OR.IN1
CAL OR (*call module 6*)
ST M_BOOL_COUNTER00 (*also in graphic*)
ST CTU_EDC0.R (*reset input of counter - module 7*)
(*Modules 1,2,3,7 – rising and falling edge of the input are combined
with an OR and put to the CU input of the counter – each change will be
added*)
LD M_BOOL_INPUT00
ST R_TRIG_INEDRISE0.CLK (*rising edge - module 1*)
ST F_TRIG_INEDFALL0.CLK (*falling edge - module 2*)
CAL R_TRIG_INEDRISE0 (*call module 1*)
ST OR.IN0
CAL F_TRIG_INEDFALL0 (*call module 2*)
ST OR.IN1
CAL OR (*call module 3*)
ST CTU_EDC0.CU (*count up input of counter - module 7*)
ST M_BOOL_MODULE3 (*only for graphic*)
(*Modules 7,8 – with the first edge change the monitoring time will be
started; if the number of edges is greater then the number of transients
within this time, the output of the AND (module 8) is set = blocked*)
CAL CTU_EDC0 (*call module 7*)
ST M_BOOL_MODULE7 (*only for graphic*)
ST AND.IN0
LDN M_BOOL_COUNTER00
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND (*call module 8*)
ST M_BOOL_BOUNCING00 (*is set if the input is bouncing*)
ST O_030_002_000_000.BL (*set blocked bit of the input*)
(*Module 9 - output is reset during the input is detected as bouncing*)

LD M_BOOL_INPUT00
ST AND.IN0
LD M_BOOL_BOUNCING00
STN AND.IN1
CAL AND (*call module 9 if bouncing, then reset*)
ST O_030_002_000_000.VALUE (*output of input information*)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
B.6 Setpoint Command
PLC_RESET:
LD 20
PLC_INIT:
LD 1
ST PLC_TX_DATAFLOW_030 (*single-point inform. to plc & comm.*)
ST PLC_TX_DATAFLOW_031 (*double-point inform. to plc & comm.*)
ST PLC_TX_DATAFLOW_036 (*measured value float to plc & comm.*)
ST PLC_TX_DATAFLOW_050 (*setpoint command float to plc & comm.*)
PLC_START:
(*Mapping inputs to flags*)
LD I_050_171_105_000.S_E (*setpoint command select/execute*)
ST M_BOOL_NyttBVCmL45
LD I_030_008_004_000.VALUE (*single-point information input*)
ST M_BOOL_OmkHandL45
LD I_036_018_039_000.VALUE (*measured value float input*)
ST M_REAL_CmL45
LD I_050_171_105_000.VALUE (*setpoint command float input*)
ST M_REAL_BvCmL45DC
(*Temporary test variables*)

LD I_050_171_105_000.S (*check for a rising edge, otherwise *)
ST R_TRIG_PosFlank1.CLK (*create a confirmation each cycle *)
CAL R_TRIG_PosFlank1 (*if you have no setpoint the logic *)
JMPN HOPP90 (*will jump over the COT procedure*)
LD I_050_171_105_000.S_E
ST O_050_171_105_000.S_E (*here you have to add the select*)
(*before execute procedure*)
ST M_BOOL_NyttBVCmL45 (*setpoint command select/execute*)
LD I_050_171_105_000.VALUE
ST O_050_171_105_000.VALUE (*setpoint command float output*)
ST M_REAL_BvCmL45DC
(*Example for select before execute*)

LD 7 (*7 = confirmation, 10 = termination,*)
ST O_050_171_105_000.COT (*if you set 0, the confirmation would*)
(*be created here, and the termination*)
(*in the following cycle*)
LD 1
ST O_050_171_105_000.S (*setpoint command spontaneous*)
HOPP90:

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
B.7 Create Command with ACTCON/ACTTERM via Input
PLC_RESET: LD 100
ST PLC_CYCLETIME (*cycletime ms*)
PLC_INIT:
PLC_START:
(*Line 4)
(*Read and store double point inputs*)
LD I_031_011_006_016.ON
ST O_031_011_006_016.ON
ST M_BOOL_DPIACLOSE
LD I_031_011_006_016.OFF
ST O_031_011_006_016.OFF
(*Line 9*)
LD I_031_011_006_028.ON
ST O_031_011_006_028.ON
ST M_BOOL_DPIBCLOSE
LD I_031_011_006_028.OFF
ST O_031_011_006_028.OFF
(*Coup 4-9*)
LD I_031_011_008_058.ON
ST O_031_011_008_058.ON
ST M_BOOL_DPICCLOSE
LD I_031_011_008_058.OFF
ST O_031_011_008_058.OFF
(*Line 4)
(*Read and store double command close input*)

LD I_046_001_006_016.COT (*cause of transmission equal 6*)
ST O_046_001_006_016.COT
ST EQ.IN0
LD 6
ST EQ.IN1
CAL EQ
ST AND.IN0
LD I_046_001_006_016.ON (*double command state*)
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
ST M_BOOL_COMACLOSE
(*Interlocking*)
LD M_BOOL_DPICCLOSE
ST AND.IN0
LD M_BOOL_DPIBCLOSE
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
STN M_BOOL_NOACLOSE

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
(*Read and store double command open input*)

ST EQ.IN0
LD 6
ST EQ.IN1
CAL EQ
ST AND.IN0
LD I_046_001_006_016.OFF (*double command state*)
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
ST O_046_001_006_016.OFF (*output double-point command open on
same address*)
(*Command close*)
LD M_BOOL_NOACLOSE
ST AND.IN0
LD M_BOOL_COMACLOSE
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
ST O_046_001_006_016.ON
(*Send ACTCON, ACTTERM control station SAT250*)

LD I_046_001_006_016.PN
ST O_046_001_006_016.PN

ST EQ.IN0
LD 7
ST EQ.IN1
CAL EQ
ST AND.IN0
LD I_046_001_006_016.S
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
ST M_BOOL_COMA_COT
LDN M_BOOL_NOACLOSE
ST AND.IN0
LD M_BOOL_COMACLOSE
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
ST M_BOOL_COMA_LOCKED
ST OR.IN0
LD M_BOOL_COMA_COT
ST OR.IN1
CAL OR
JMPN COMA_END
LD I_046_001_006_016.PN
ST OR.IN0
LD M_BOOL_COMA_LOCKED
ST OR.IN1
CAL OR
ST O_046_001_006_016.PN
LD I_046_001_006_016.ON
ST O_046_001_006_016.ON
LD I_046_001_006_016.OFF
ST O_046_001_006_016.OFF
LD 0
ST O_046_001_006_016.COT
LD 1
ST O_046_001_006_016.S
COMA_END:
(*Line 9*)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

ST O_046_001_006_028.COT
ST EQ.IN0
LD 6
ST EQ.IN1
CAL EQ
ST AND.IN0
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
ST M_BOOL_COMBCLOSE
(*Interlocking*)
LD M_BOOL_DPIACLOSE
ST AND.IN0
LD M_BOOL_DPICCLOSE
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
STN M_BOOL_NOBCLOSE

ST EQ.IN0
LD 6
ST EQ.IN1
CAL EQ
ST AND.IN0
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
ST O_046_001_006_028.OFF (*output double point command open on
same adress*)
(*Command close*)
LD M_BOOL_NOBCLOSE
ST AND.IN0
LD M_BOOL_COMBCLOSE
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
ST O_046_001_006_028.ON

LD I_046_001_006_028.PN
ST O_046_001_006_028.PN

ST EQ.IN0
LD 7
ST EQ.IN1
CAL EQ
ST AND.IN0
LD I_046_001_006_028.S
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
ST M_BOOL_COMB_COT
LDN M_BOOL_NOBCLOSE
ST AND.IN0
LD M_BOOL_COMBCLOSE
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
ST M_BOOL_COMB_LOCKED
ST OR.IN0
LD M_BOOL_COMB_COT
ST OR.IN1
CAL OR
JMPN COMB_END

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
LD I_046_001_006_028.PN
ST OR.IN0
LD M_BOOL_COMB_LOCKED
ST OR.IN1
CAL OR
ST O_046_001_006_028.PN
LD I_046_001_006_028.ON
ST O_046_001_006_028.ON
LD I_046_001_006_028.OFF
ST O_046_001_006_028.OFF
LD 0
ST O_046_001_006_028.COT
LD 1
ST O_046_001_006_028.S
COMB_END:
(*Coup 4-9*)

ST O_046_001_008_058.COT
ST EQ.IN0
LD 6
ST EQ.IN1
CAL EQ
ST AND.IN0
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
ST M_BOOL_COMCCLOSE
(*Interlocking*)
LD M_BOOL_DPIACLOSE
ST AND.IN0
LD M_BOOL_DPIBCLOSE
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
STN M_BOOL_NOCCLOSE

ST EQ.IN0
LD 6
ST EQ.IN1
CAL EQ
ST AND.IN0
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
ST O_046_001_008_058.OFF (*output double point command open on
same address*)
(*Command close*)
LD M_BOOL_NOCCLOSE
ST AND.IN0
LD M_BOOL_COMCCLOSE
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
ST O_046_001_008_058.ON
ST M_BOOL_COMC_OK

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

LD I_046_001_008_058.PN
ST O_046_001_008_058.PN

ST EQ.IN0
LD 7
ST EQ.IN1
CAL EQ
ST AND.IN0
LD I_046_001_008_058.S
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
ST M_BOOL_COMC_COT
LDN M_BOOL_NOCCLOSE
ST AND.IN0
LD M_BOOL_COMCCLOSE
ST AND.IN1
CAL AND
ST M_BOOL_COMC_LOCKED
ST OR.IN0
LD M_BOOL_COMC_COT
ST OR.IN1
CAL OR
JMPN COMC_END
LD I_046_001_008_058.PN
ST OR.IN0
LD M_BOOL_COMC_LOCKED
ST OR.IN1
CAL OR
ST O_046_001_008_058.PN
LD I_046_001_008_058.ON
ST O_046_001_008_058.ON
LD I_046_001_008_058.OFF
ST O_046_001_008_058.OFF
LD 0
ST O_046_001_008_058.COT
LD 1
ST O_046_001_008_058.S
COMC_END:

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
B.8 Speed Comparison
PLC_RESET:
LD 100
PLC_INIT:
LD 1000 (*drop off delay in ms*)
ST TOF_FLCHNGASCEN0.PT
ST TOF_FLCHNGDESC0.PT
PLC_START:
(*Check speed value on change*)
LD I_034_016_000_000.S (*load spontaneous bit speed value*)
JMPN NO_CHANGE (*jump if no change of value*)
(*Change of speed value present*)

LD I_034_016_000_000.VALUE (*load speed value*)
ST M_REAL_VALNEW (*current speed value to flag*)
ST SUB.IN0
LD M_REAL_VALOLD (*load old speed value*)
ST SUB.IN1
CAL SUB (*form difference value*)
ST M_REAL_VALDIF (*difference value to flag*)
(*Take over change of value*)

LD M_REAL_VALNEW (*load current value*)
ST M_REAL_VALOLD (*save current value for next *)
(*change of value*)
(*Value comparison speed ascending*)

LD M_REAL_VALDIF (*load diff. value*)
ST GT.IN0
LD 0
ST GT.IN1
CAL GT (*diff. value > 0: speed ascending*)
ST M_BOOL_SPAS (*set flag speed ascending*)
(*Value comparison speed descending*)

LD M_REAL_VALDIF (*load diff. value*)
ST LT.IN0
LD 0
ST LT.IN1
CAL LT (*diff. value < 0: speed descending*)
ST M_BOOL_SPDE (*set flag speed descending*)
NO_CHANGE: (*jump mark if no change of value*)
(*Drop-off delay speed ascending*)

LD M_BOOL_SPAS (*load flag speed ascending*)
ST TOF_FLCHNGASCEN0.IN
CAL TOF_FLCHNGASCEN0 (*drop-off delay*)
LD TOF_FLCHNGASCEN0.Q
ST O_030_048_000_000.VALUE (*reset output*)
(*Drop-off delay speed descending*)

LD M_BOOL_SPDE (*load flag speed descending*)
ST TOF_FLCHNGDESC0.IN
CAL TOF_FLCHNGDESC0 (*drop-off delay*)
LD TOF_FLCHNGDESC0.Q
ST O_030_049_000_000.VALUE (*set binary output*)
(*Reset flags for speed ascending, descending*)

LD 0
ST M_BOOL_SPAS (*reset flag speed ascending*)
ST M_BOOL_SPDE (*reset flag speed descending*)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
C Error Handling
Contents
C.1 System Errors in the Diagnosis ..................................................................... 370

C.2 Operator Errors ............................................................................................ 378

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Error Handling
C.1 System Errors in the Diagnosis
Error numbers that are logged in the diagnosis (only via web browser).
Meaning of the Ax error classes:
A..... Failure
B..... Module failure
I ...... Internal errors
E..... External errors
K..... Communication errors
W .... Warning
F ..... Freely configurable user error
T ..... Test
C.1.1 Error Indications
Meaning of the columns: Cl = Error class, Er = Error LED, Tr = Transient.
No. Description Cause Remedy Cl Er Tr

*)
000 Call timeout station was not called check connection to the
master and parameter
setting
unknown type identifica- *)
001 Wrong message re- the faulty telegram is
ceived tion indicated in diagno-
unknown CASDU sis | history diagnosis,
starting with the type
identification in hex
*)
002 Error during message pack error currently not implemented
transmit
*)
003 Super high prior queue FIFO overflow at answer overflow of an internal
overflow for login in dial-up traffic buffer, please consult your
system supplier
check IL *)
004 High prior ring overflow ACT/CON messages
cannot be transmitted to possibly to many com-
the remote station mands received via
communication in too
short time
check IL *)
005 Queue overflow class 1 too many data at too slow
communication (no more check if an input signal
than 200 telegrams are is bouncing
sent)
*)
006 Queue overflow class 2 see error 005
*)
007 SIM card not available SIM card not plugged or plug in SIM card correctly
not plugged correctly under the front cover
*)
008 Errors cleared in the history diagnosis it
is indicated, when the
errors were reset
009 Reset by hard- power supply was
ware/power on switched on
010 Reset by remote com- startup command received
mand (TI 105) from master

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Error Handling

011 Reset by watchdog watchdog is exceeded and read diagnosis | history
a startup was performed diagnosis and inform
Siemens
reload parameter *)
012 Firmware disabled (kill) internal software error
invalid parameter file reload IL
loaded if no remedy: carry out a
invalid IL loaded firmware update
*)
013 Warning: ring class 1 see error 005
80% full
*)
014 Warning: ring class 2 see error 006
80% full
015 Firmware loaded in the history diagnosis it
is indicated, when the
firmware was updated
in multi-point traffic this *)
016 DCD continuous level check telecontrol line
might happen at plug-
ging in the nullmodem
cable (mainly with Dell
PCs)
modem has detected a
continuous level
017 Selftest started does not occur in normal
operation
018 UART error occurs only during self test
019 Ethernet chip error occurs only during self test
020 Reset after parameter a startup was triggered
changing by the user due to a pa-
rameter change (on
demand)
SICAM MIC has per-
formed an automatic
startup in consequence
of a parameter change
*)
021 Item number missing item number not available change module
connection to the re- *)
022 Connection 1 loss check IP addresses and K
mote station failed connection parameters in
wrong IP addresses SICAM MIC and the re-
mote station
*)
023 Connection 2 loss see error 022 K
*)
*)
026 Queues cleared
exchange power supply *)
027 No internal modem internal modem supply not
supply possible possible against version >= B or
exchange
CP-6020/CP-6040
against version >= A
*)
028 No current firmware version of webmic with that carry out a firmware up-
revision update the parameters were date
generated is more current
than that of the firmware

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Error Handling

parameterize station in *)
029 Modem blockade substation does not call
actively any more the master, otherwise
the master sends a
wrong password that
the "unknown" station
calls no more
enter the password
correctly, consider up-
per case/lower case let-
ters
*)
030 Active disconnect: no SICAM MIC did not detect check dcd wiring of
request a proper connection re- SICAM MIC to modem
lease
startup in the master *)
031 Passive disconnect: the connection was dis-
open circuit connected incorrectly during active connection
(DCD signal is "0" before check telephone line
command "hang up dial"
has been received)
check telephone line *)
032 Connection setup not connection to master not
possible possible check telephone num-
ber
the system increases *)
033 PLC running time over- the processing time for the
flow execution of the applica- the cycle time automati-
tion program has exceed- cally by 50% (max. 2 s
ed 50% of the set cycle possible)
time if plc is stopped by the
system, use a smaller il
034 PLC checksum error, hardware error (the data in rewrite the il to the SIM I
PLC halted the memory range for the card
application program are
faulty)
035 SIM checksum error, hardware error (the data delete content of the si I
PLC halted on the SIM card are faulty) card and rewrite param-
eters to the SIM card
if no remedy: change
SIM card
036 PLC syntax error, an unknown instruction is check code and comments I
PLC halted programmed in the il in the il (syntax)
037 PLC interval error, the cycle time for the correct value of the I
PLC halted application program is to variable
high PLC_CYCLETIME
variable (range 2 ms … 2 s)
PLC_CYCLETIME processing time of the
processing time of the application program
application program reaches 50% of the
max. cycle time
038 PLC HW config error, in the application program check in parameterization I
PLC halted a wrong type identification and IL, the type identifica-
is used tion of data points used in
the application program
must match with the type
in the parameterization
*)
039 PLC CHR ring overflow number of state changes
from information items and
integrated totals is greater
than the FIFO buffer
chronological can store

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Error Handling

*)
040 PLC CHR global ring number of state changes
overflow from commands, setpoint
values and counter inter-
rogations is greater than
the FIFO buffer chronolog-
ical global can store
*)
041 PLC output ring over- too many telegrams gen- check IL
flow erated by the application
program within one cycle
042 PLC C-stack underflow, in the IL a RET instruction check IL (return to nesting I
PLC halted is programmed without level 0 not possible)
CAL instruction
043 PLC C-stack overflow, too many nesting levels by check IL (max. 20 levels I
PLC halted means of cal instructions permitted)
044 PLC F-stack underflow, too less transfer parame- check IL I
PLC halted ters for a function or func-
tion block programmed
045 PLC F-stack overflow, too many transfer parame- check IL I
PLC halted ters for a function or func-
tion block programmed
046 Permanent loop internal errors check IL
too many startups in check power supply
succession please consult your
endless loop in the system supplier
application program
*)
047 Negative confirmation behavior acc. to IEC
OLA command
*)
048 Negative termination behavior acc. to IEC
OLA command
049 Console system disa- software error please consult your sys-
bled by firmware tem supplier
050 IOA MTS_LAEUFT
wrong
051 IOA enable wrong,
console halted
052 IOA lamptest wrong,
console halted
053 IOA not from DO, con-
sole halted
054 IOA not from DI, con-
sole halted
055 IOA is not an EM, con-
sole halted
056 IOA doubled used,
console halted
057 Wrong telegram re- error with the conversion check parameters in the
ceived (SK) of the SK message to the master, i.e. with/without
IEC message component number, pack-
age,
058 SK addressing fault: IOA1 must not be greater the data point number and
IOA1 too big than 31 IOA are registered under
diagnosis | diagnosis
history

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Error Handling

059 SK addressing fault: must be "0" for measured see error 058
IOA2 must be 0 values and integrated
totals
060 SK addressing fault: not used, must be always see error 058
IOA3 must be 0 "0" in the SK mode
061 SK addressing fault: is the bit number in the see error 058
IOA2 too big SK mode – must not be
greater than 15
062 SK addressing fault: only even bit numbers can see error 058
IOA2 odd (DP) be used for double-point
information items
063 SK addressing fault: IOA1 must be definite over see error 058
IOA2 for SP used all formats
064 SK addressing fault: see error 063 see error 058
IOA2 for SP used
065 SK acknowledgement occurs only with PCBMXX check quality of line
error
066 Permanent reset, firm- too many startups per- check power supply
ware disabled formed within short time, if error cannot be cor-
SICAM MIC has been rected, please consult
switched off and on too your system supplier
many times within
067 PLC enabled no PLC the PLC function is re- block PLC if not used or
code available leased under load PLC code
plc | configuration, but no
code loaded
068 Wait/schedule with internal software error please consult your sys-
disable tem supplier
069 TE-6420 IOA is not the binary output is not set
single-point as single-point information
for this IOA
070 TE-6420 IOA not from the output must be on a do
DO-62xx module and not on the
master control module
071 TE-6420 IOA not from reserved internally
DI-61xx
072 TE-6420 IOA is not the output of the AO is not
Floating-point set to float for this IOA
073 TE-6420 IOA not from the output must be on an
AO-6380 AO-6380
074 TE-6420 IOA doubled somewhere the same IOA
used was assigned for the
TE-6420
075 TE-6420 only 1 rotation the speed monitoring may
speed sup. be released only once per
SICAM MIC
076 TE-6420 IOA unknown the set IOA is not found on
any relevant module
077 TE-6420 IOA not from the IOA is known, but i.e.
an TM module only generated by the
application program

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Error Handling

078 2.5 ms acquisition not minimum one module use only modules with
possible does not support the 2.5 ms detection
2.5 ms detection set detection to 10 ms
(TE-6460, AI-6310,
TE-6420, AI-6300)
079 Ethernet MAC address master control module has please consult your sys-
missing no MAC address tem supplier
080 Modem reset Siemens TC35 modem
does not respond on
commands
connection setup could
no more performed,
therefore the modem
was restarted
power-down/power up
of the modem
no Siemens TC35 was
connected with configu-
ration of the protocol
"no communication"
081 DEAR deleted change of the parame-
ters
SIM card was replaced
CP-6020/CP-6040 was
replaced
082 Logon Administrator login by the administrator
(WEB Server) with following <IP ad-
dress>
083 Logon Guest (WEB login by the guest with
Server) following <IP address>
084 Logoff (WEB Server) logout of the guest resp.
the administrator
089 Abortion DEAR file abortion of the running
transfer USER file transfer by the user
the user performed an
abortion during running
file transfer by means of
the user interface
090 Abortion DEAR file abortion of the running file the set timeout is too
transfer TIMEOUT transfer by timeout in the short
substation there was a communi-
cation failure during the
file transfer
091 DEAR loss of data there was a loss of data reduce data load (too
in DEAR many data are generated
data could no more in SICAM MIC)
being saved on
SIM card resp. NV RAM
092 DEAR internal ring full there was a loss of data reduce data load (too
in dear many data are generated
data could no more in SICAM MIC)
being saved on
SIM card resp. NV RAM
*)
223 Master control module not used -
periphery fault

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Error Handling

missing two-line calibra- check wiring of the *)
224 Peripheral element 00 E
fault tion relevant analog inputs
faulty measuring (live check relevant sen-
zero) sors/sensor voltage
(only for measured values)
*)
225 Peripheral element 01 see error 224 E
fault
*)
fault
*)
fault
*)
fault
*)
fault
*)
fault
*)
fault
*)
239 Master control module not used
periphery failure
wrong hardware identifi- check the set hardware *)
240 Peripheral element 00 B
failure cation configuration
checksum error on TM change peripheral
bus element
automatic detection of a firmware update
defect, i.e. command
output driver)
error in command out-
put circuit or return in-
formation circuit of
module TE-6460
*)
241 Peripheral element 01 see error 240 B
failure
*)
failure
*)
failure
*)
failure
*)
failure
*)
failure
*)
failure
*)
255 Sum error LED (red) minimal 1 error that trig- can be used for further
gers the red ER LED is evaluations in the IL
present (see column Er)
*)
error can be read in the IL by means of variable PLC_SYSERROR_xxx for linking in the logic

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Error Handling
C.1.2 Advanced Error Information
Code Bedeutung
00 Expected acknowledgement time (t1) expired, no acknowledgement on mes-
sage received
01 No Confirmation on a Start frame Activation received
02 No Confirmation on a Stop frame Activation received
03 No Confirmation on a Test frame Activation received
04 U-Frame not correct, the received acknowledgement counter does not match
the expected ones
05 U-Frame not correct, das U-Frame has a wrong code
06 Start character (68) is wrong in message
07 TCP/IP connection was closed by the remote station
08 TCP/IP socket was closed due to unknown reason
09 No SYN ACK on a attempted connection setup received (only in the connec-
tion setup phase)
0A No ARP entry (IP address to MAC address) present
0B Start character (68) is wrong in message, only 1 byte message
0C Send sequence des received message does not match the expected one
0D Send sequence of the received message is too high, more messages re-
ceived than still possible
0E Send sequence of the received message is too high, more messages re-
ceived than possible at all
0F Receive sequence des acknowledgement wrong, does not match the ex-
pected one, greater than expected
10 Receive sequence of the acknowledgement wrong, does not match the ex-
pected one, greater than expected
11 Receive sequence of the acknowledgement wrong, does not match the ex-
pected one, same message already received

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Error Handling
C.2 Operator Errors
The following table shows a selection of error messages that could occur with the operation of
SICAM MIC via the web browser. Since different states can occur depending on the hard-
ware- and software configuration used, it cannot be guaranteed, that the remedies described
here actually always lead to the desired objective.
Behavior Possible Cause Remedy

After a startup of the system the There is a syntax error Carry out correction in the lines
application program (PLC) re- specified under PLC | Diagnosis
mains stopped
Red ER-LED lights up after a The learned configuration does Open the project loaded in
reset of the system not match the configured setting SICAM MIC offline (WEBmic) and
check the parameterized config-
uration
Web browser does not start, if a One or more projects have been Close WEBmic, check with Win-
project is opened with WEBmic or opened previously, but not dows Task Manager whether a
is to be created new logged out WEBmic task is still running, and
end the task
After entering the IP address of a There is no connection to the Check whether SICAM MIC is
SICAM MIC (online) in the web selected SICAM MIC switched on and is connected
browser the message "Page not SICAM MIC is switched off with the PC
available" appears IP address is incorrect With operation via Ethernet
and without router the network
addresses of SICAM MIC and
PC must correspond (accord-
ing to the subnet mask)
After entering the IP address of a The selected SICAM MIC is not Close offline project
SICAM MIC (online) the registra- attainable and the last processed Check IP address and con-
tion mask opens, but after log- offline project is still in your PC nection to the selected
ging on an offline project opens cache SICAM MIC, if necessary write
a new IP address (if need be,
locally with WEBmic)
WEBmic will not close There is still a WEBmic task Close the task or terminate the
running in the background process with Task Manager
After loading an IL the web The IL to be loaded is too Abort loading operation (Stop
browser attempts for a long time large (> 16kB) function in web browser)
(> 1min) to update or no status In general, a loading operation Check whether errors are
information at all comes regard- takes longer, the larger the IL entered under PLC | Diagno-
ing the loading operation is sis
Load a smaller IL
If SICAM MIC returns status
information after the loading
operation, check whether the
IL has been transferred
After loading an IL operator An invalid IL has been loaded If possible, read error displays
masks are incorrect or empty; in (incorrect file of file format) in the diagnosis
some circumstances the red ER- A connection error may have Check whether the correct
LED lights up occurred during the transmis- source file has been loaded
sion Check whether the file which
contains the IL is a text file
(ASCII format)
Check whether the correct
control code is in the text file

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Error Handling
Behavior Possible Cause Remedy

After loading the parameters There is an invalid or unknown Set a valid IP address again
SICAM MIC can no longer be IP address set in the loaded on SICAM MIC with WEBmic,
selected from the web browser; parameter setting after successful transmission
in some circumstances the red An invalid parameter file has enter this address in the web
ER-LED lights up been loaded (incorrect file of browser, SICAM MIC can then
file format) be processed online again
A connection error may have Otherwise the SIM card must
occurred during the transmis- be withdrawn from
sion SICAM MIC and written again
offline with valid parameters
After refresh in the web browser The session has been termi- Avoid longer breaks
(by selecting an input/output nated by the internal timeout (> 15 min.) during the operat-
mask or by applying a parame- The session has been termi- ing or parameter setting
ter) the logon mask appears nated by logon of another user Save changed parameters by
clicking on the apply button
With each refresh in the web
browser the timeout is restarted

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Error Handling

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
D Connection of Resistance Thermometers
Contents
D.1 Calibration Process ...................................................................................... 382

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
D.1 Calibration Process
For the connection of a resistance thermometer in 2-wire technique a calibration process is

required at the analog input module AI-6310.
Preconditions
Automation unit ready for operation
Resistance thermometer completely wired on the system side and connected to the I/O
module
Measurement of the temperature by command interrogation from the control system or by
means of the web browser (user interface online)
Process:
1. Short-circuiting the resistance thermometer. The short circuit should take place as close to
the resistance thermometer as possible.
2. Web browser: Configuration of the input on AI-6310 in monitor direction to Type "Floating
point" as well as connection to "2 wire".
3. Web browser: Set configuration of the input on AI-6310 in control direction to Type "single
command".
4. Web browser: In the Process-display of the AI-6310 actuate Button factory calibration and
read out the temperature value. Or set the command remotely (with the correct IOA address)
via the control system.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
E Set up Dial-up Connection via PPP
Contents
E.1 Windows Settings ......................................................................................... 384

E.4 Settings in Microsoft Windows Vista ............................................................. 406
E.5 Settings in Microsoft Windows XP Professional ............................................ 416
E.6 Settings in Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional ......................................... 425
E.7 Settings in Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 ........................................................... 433
E.8 Restore Settings for the Internet Use ............................................................ 447

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
E.1 Windows Settings
Supported operating systems:
Microsoft Windows 8 Professional ®

Microsoft Windows Vista ®
Microsoft Windows XP Professional ®
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 ®

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
E.2 Settings in Microsoft Windows 8
E.2.1 Modem Installation
Right-click on Start and select the Control Panel.
By way of a double-click on the symbol PHONE AND MODEM open the settings. If you have to
enter location information, write arbitrary numbers and click OK .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Click on the tab Modems and click on
The Hardware Wizard starts, which guides you comfortably through the installation. Place a
tick in the box DON’T DETECT MY MODEM; I WILL SELECT IT FROM A LIST and click Next> .
Under MANUFACTURERS: select (Standard Modem Types)and under MODELS: select a

STANDARD 33600 BPS MODEM, then click Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
In this window mark the wanted port and confirm the input with Next> . Complete the modem
installation in the next window with the button Finish .
Now select the button Properties in the register tab MODEMS and check the MAXIMUM PORT
SPEED of 115200, as shown in the lower window. If this setting shows another value, please
correct it and confirm with OK .
The modem installation is now complete!

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
E.2.2 Network Configuration
To establish a new data-communication connection, open via the start menu the menu item
Control Panel.
Double-click on the symbol Network and Sharing Center.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Click on SET UP A NEW CONNECTION OR NETWORK.
In the following window, as Network Connections Type select the item CONNECT TO THE
INTERNET . Then go to Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
If an Internet connection is already existing, the following windows appears. Select SET UP A
NEW CONNECTION ANYWAY, and continue.
As next step you have to select CONNECTION MANUALLY. Please click on DIAL-UP CONNECTION
and continue.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
In the next step, enter an optional name for your CONNECTION, and an optional numerical value
in the field DIAL UP PHONE NUBMER. Furthermore enter a USER NAME and a PASSWORD. When
you have carried out these steps, confirm each time with Next> .
Pay attention to the ticks in the boxes. Finally, click on Connect .
A window appears with the connection test, that you can abort.
Then select SET UP THE CONNECTION ANYWAY.
Click now on the network icon in the notification area of the Taskbar.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Now a view of all available networks opens. Select hereby the new dial-up connection and
click on Connect .
Now opens the window CONNECT …. Click here on Properties.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Check the settings and if necessary correct them. Then confirm with OK .
Now select the tab NETWORKING.
Mark the line Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then click on Proper-
ties .
In this window the items OBTAIN AN IP ADDRESS AUTOMATICALLY and OBTAIN DNS SERVER
ADDRESS AUTOMATICALLY must be selected. Continue with Advanced… .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
In the last window of the settings, under the register tab IP SETTINGS, the box USE DEFAULT
GATEWAY ON REMOTE NETWORK must not be ticked. Confirm the inputs in each window with OK .
Click now on the network icon in the notification area of the Taskbar.
Now a view of all available networks opens. Select hereby the new dial-up connection and
click on Connect .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Now opens the window CONNECT …. Click here on Dial .
The installation and configuration is thereby complete!

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
E.3 Settings in Microsoft Windows 7
Open via the start menu the menu item Control Panel.
Open the modem-group with a double-click on the symbol PHONE AND MODEM. Go to the index
tab MODEMS and click on ADD... to install the modem.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Under MANUFACTURERS: select (Standard Modem Types)and under MODELS: select a

STANDARD 33600 BPS MODEM, then click Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
To establish a new data-communication connection, open via the start menu the menu item
Control Panel.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Double-click on the symbol Network and Sharing Center.
Click on SET UP A NEW CONNECTION OR NETWORK.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
As next step you have to select CONNECTION MANUALLY.
Click on DIAL-UP CONNECTION and continue.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
In the next step, enter an optional name for your CONNECTION, and an optional numerical value
in the field DIAL UP PHONE NUBMER. Furthermore enter a USER NAME and a PASSWORD. When
you have carried out these steps, confirm each time with Next> .
A window appears with the connection test, that you can abort.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Finally, click on CLOSE.
For advanced settings and to check the new dial-up connection, click on CONNECT TO A
NETWORK. Click with the right mouse button on CONNECTION TO SIE and select Properties.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Mark the line Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then click on Proper-
ties .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
In the last window of the settings, under the register tab IP SETTINGS, the box USE DEFAULT
GATEWAY ON REMOTE NETWORK must not be ticked. Confirm the inputs in each window with OK .
In order to set up a connection open via the start menu the menu item Control Panel.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Click on CONNECT TO A NETWORK in the Network Sharing Center. Select the connection and click
on the button Connect .
Click on the button Dial in the window "Connect Connection to SIE".

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
E.4 Settings in Microsoft Windows Vista
Open the modem-group and double-click on the symbol Phone and Modem Options. Click on the
tab MODEMS and click on Add… to install the modem.
tick in the box DON’T DETECT MY MODEM; I WILL SELECT IT FROM A LIST and click on Next> .
Under MANUFACTURERS select (Standard Modem Types)and under MODELS select Stand-
ard 33600 bps Modem, then click Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
To set up a new data-communication connection, open via the start menu the menu item
Control Panel.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Double-click on the symbol Network Connections.
Go to CREATE A NEW CONNECTION.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
In the following window select the item CONNECT TO THE INTERNET as network connection type.
Then continue with Next> .
As next step you have to select CONNECTION MANUALLY.
Click on DIAL-UP and continue.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
In the next step, enter an optional CONNECTION NAME and an optional numerical value in the
field DIAL-UP PHONE NUBMER. Furthermore, enter a USER NAME and a PASSWORD.
Then a window appears with the connection test, that you can abort.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
To finish click on Cancel .
For advanced settings and to check the new dial-up connection click with the right mouse but-
ton on DIAL-UP CONNECTION SIE DIAL-UP CONNECTION and select the menu item Properties.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Mark the line Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and then click on Properties .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
In the last window of the settings, under the register tab GENERAL, the box USE DEFAULT
GATEWAY ON REMOTE NETWORK must not be ticked. Confirm with OK .
In order to set up a connection, open via the start menu the menu item Connect to and select
Dial-up Connection SIE.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Or you can set up the connection via this window, if it is still open, by clicking the button
Connect .
Click on the button Dial in the window "Connect Dial-up Connection SIE".

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
E.5 Settings in Microsoft Windows XP Professional
Open the modem-group with a double-click on the symbol Phone and Modem Options. In the
following window, click on the tab MODEMS and click on Add… to install the modem.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Under MANUFACTURERS select (Standard Modem Types) and under MODELS select
Standard 33600 bps Modem, then click Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
To set up a new data-communication connection, open via the start menu the menu item
Control Panel.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Double-click on the symbol Network Connections.
Depending on your settings different views are possible. Two possibilities are listed:
with this view, click on CREATE A NEW CONNECTION under Network Tasks
if you have this view on your PC, double-click on the icon New Connection Wizard

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
In both cases, the Network-Assistant now starts. Confirm with Next> .
As next step, select the setting SET UP MY CONNECTION MANUALLY and Next> .
In the window that follows select the item CONNECT USING A DIAL-UP MODEM and continue with
Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
In the next two windows, enter an optional name for your CONNECTION, and an optional numer-
ical value in the field PHONE NUMBER. When you have carried out these steps, confirm each
time with Next> .
Here, enter a USER NAME, a PASSWORD and the verification of the password and click on
Next> .
Pay attention to the ticks in the boxes and continue with Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Finally, click on Finish .
For advanced settings and to check the new dial-up connection (here CONNECT SAT) click on
the button Properties .
Check the settings and if necessary correct them. Confirm with OK .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
In the register tab NETWORKING the settings PPP: W INDOWS 95/98/NT4/2000, INTERNET, as well
as INTERNET PROTOCOL (TCP/IP) must be selected. Mark the line INTERNET PROTOCOL (TCP/IP)
and then click on Properties .
ADDRESS AUTOMATICALLY must be selected. Continue with Advanced...
GATEWAY ON REMOTE NETWORK is not ticked. Acknowledge with the OK button.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
To set up a connection click the button Dial in the window "CONNECTION TO CONNECT TO SAT".

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
E.6 Settings in Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Open via the start menu the menu item Settings | Control Panel.
In the following window, double-click on the symbol Phone and Modem Options.
Click on the tab MODEMS and click on Add… to install the modem.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Under MANUFACTURERS select (Standard Modem Types)and under MODELS select Stand-
ard 33600 bps Modem, then click Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Here mark the wanted port and confirm the input with Next> . Complete the modem installa-
tion in the next window with the button Finish .
Now select Properties and check the MAXIMUM PORT SPEED of 115200, as shown in the low-
er window.
If this setting shows another value, please correct it and confirm with OK .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
E.6.2 Configuration of Network and Dial-Up Connections
To set up a new data-communication connection, open the via the start menu the menu item
Settings | Network and Dial-up Connections.
In the next window double-click on Make New Connection. The “Network Connection Wizard”
starts, which guides you through the configuration. Then confirm with Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
In the following window select the item DIAL-UP TO THE INTERNET as network connection type.
Then go to Next> .
For the next step select the setting I WANT TO SET UP MY INTERNET CONNECTION MANUALLY, OR I
WANT TO CONNECT THROUGH A LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) and click Next> .
Select the option I CONNECT THROUGH A PHONE LINE AND A MODEM and continue with Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
You must now remove the tick from the box USE AREA CODE AND DIALING RULES, and enter an
optional numerical value in the field TELEPHONE NUMBER. Then click on the button Ad-
vanced... , and check whether the item PPP (POINT TO POINT PROTOCOL) is activated in the
register CONNECTION TYPE.
If the settings are correct, confirm with OK and continue with Next> .
In the next two windows enter an optional USER NAME, a PASSWORD and a name for your
CONNECTION. When you have carried out these steps click Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
To complete the setup, select NO under the item DO YOU WANT TO SET UP AN INTERNET EMAIL
ACCOUNT NOW ? and click on Next> .
In the last window remove the tick and complete the configuration with Finish .
For advanced settings, doubleclick on the icon Connection to SIE. In the window “Connect
Connection to SIE” click on the button Properties .
If several modems are already installed on the PC, you must select the desired in the tab
GENERAL.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
In the register tab NETWORKING the settings PPP: Windows 95/98/NT4/2000, Inter-
net, as well as Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) must be selected. If you are using a
stand-alone computer, the other boxes should remain blank for safety reasons. Mark the line
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and then click on Properties .
GATEWAY ON REMOTE NETWORK must not be ticked. The field USE IP HEADER COMPRESSION is ac-
tive.
To confirm the input, acknowledge with the OK button. To set up a connection, click the but-
ton DIAL in the window “Connect Connection to SIE".

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
E.7 Settings in Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
Open via the start menu the menu item Settings | Control Panel.
Double-click on the symbol Modems.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
If you have already installed a modem, the window MODEMS Properties opens, where you
must click on the button ADD... to be able to install a new modem.
The Modem-Assistant Install New Modem starts which guides you through the setup.
If you do not yet have a modem installed on your computer, the Assistant opens immediately.
Place a tick in the box DON’T DETECT MY MODEM; I WILL SELECT IT FROM A LIST and click Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Under MANUFACTURERS SELECT (Standard Modem Types) and under MODELS select
Standard 28800 bps Modem, then click Next> .
Here mark the wanted port and confirm the input with Next> .
If you are installing a modem on your computer for the first time, then you are now asked to
enter the location settings for your computer.
Afterwards please click on Next> . Windows NT then notifies you that your modem has been
installed or configured.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Click on Finish and you are presented with the window “Modems Properties”.
Now select Properties , and check the MAXIMUM PORT SPEED of 115200, as shown in the
lower window. If this setting shows another value, please correct it and confirm with OK .
To be able to create a network- or modem-connection, the protocol TCP/IP and the RAS-
service must be installed on your computer. To do this, open via the start menu the menu item
Settings | Control Panel. In the following window double-click on the symbol Network.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
There are now two possibilities of continuing with the network-configuration:
either TCP/IP and the RAS-service are already installed; I.e. a network or a modem has
already been set up on your computer read more under TCP/IP and RAS-Service al-
ready integrated in your system.
or TCP/IP and the RAS-service are not yet installed, then the Network Setup Wizard starts
in this case read more under TCP/IP and RAS-Service not integrated in your system.
TCP/IP and RAS-Service already integrated in your system

The window „Network“ opens. To verify the settings, click on the tab SERVICES and check
whether the item Remote Access Service is listed. In addition, whether in the register
PROTOCOLS the TCP/IP Protocol and in the register BINDINGS the Remote Access
Server Service are stated.
If all settings exist, skip the next section TCP/IP and RAS-Service not integrated in your sys-
tem and continue with section Setting up Dial-Up Networking.
TCP/IP and RAS-Service not integrated in your system

If you do not have any Windows NT network support installed, Windows NT now requests you
to install the network-support on your system. Insert the Windows NT CD-ROM in the slide-in
tray of the CD-ROM-drive and then click on Yes .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The Network Setup Wizard now starts. Please deactivate the box W IRED TO THE NETWORK and
activate REMOTE ACCESS TO THE NETWORK. Continue with the button Next> .
The system now gives you the opportunity of permitting a network-card search. Please ignore
this request and press the button Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Select the line TCP/IP Protocol from the NETWORK PROTOCOLS. Then continue with
Next> .
Windows NT now shows you which services are installed on your system. Click on Next>
and in the next window likewise on Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Windows NT now requests you to enter the drive letter of the CD-ROM-drive in which the
Windows NT Installation-CD is located (as a rule you must enter "E:\“ or "D:\“.). Then click on
Continue .
In the following window you must select, whether a DHCP-Server (DHCP = Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol) is located in the network. Click on Yes .
The files required by Windows NT are now copied to your system. After the transfer of the files
is complete, you are presented with the window „Add RAS Device”. In the selection list, select
the newly installed modem and confirm with OK .
Your modem should now appear in the list shown in the window „Remote Access Setup”.
Click on this and then on the button Continue .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
After the data has been copied to your system, you should be presented with the bindings in-
formation in a dialogue window. In the selection SHOW BINDINGS FOR: deactivate the NetBIOS
Interface. Mark the line and click on the button Disable . If you are unsure, do not deacti-
vate anything, since these settings are necessary for working in a Windows NT network.
If you have deactivated the NetBIOS interface, continue with Next> . The next window is in-
tended as information. Confirm with Next> .
In the following window you are presented with further network-settings. Ensure that
WORKGROUP is selected and not DOMAIN. To continue, click Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Your network has now been installed on your system. Windows NT now requests you to re-
start your system. Click on the button Finish .
Please remove the Windows NT CD-ROM from your CD-ROM-drive.
Afterwards, click on YES – the computer is restarted.
Setting up Dial-Up Networking

To establish a connection to the modem you must now set up a data-communication dial-up
connection (Data communication). Open via the start menu the menu item Programs AND
SELECT Accessories | Dial-Up Networking.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
There are two possibilities now:
If you have already created a data communication connection, then click on NEW in the
window “Dial-up Networking”, in order to set up a connection.
If you are creating a data-communication connection for the first time, you will receive the
information, that the telephone book is empty. Click on OK in order to create a new con-
nection.
The Assistant starts in order to create a new entry. Enter an optional name for the connection
(e.g. SIE) and click on Next> .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
In the window “Server” select I AM CALLING THE INTERNET and click on Next> .
In the field PHONE NUMBER: enter an optional numerical value and then continue with Next> .
To close the telephone book assistant, confirm with Finish .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
You must now enter or check several other parameters for the data-communication connec-
tion. To do this, click on MORE in the window. Ensure thereby, that the name of the connection
(here SIE) appears in the field PHONEBOOK ENTRY TO DIAL for the modem that you have just set
up.
In the menu window that opens, select the option Edit entry and modem properties….
Please verify all entries of the respective register, as specified.
For DIAL-UP SERVER TYPE: PPP: Windows NT, Windows 95 Plus, Internet must ap-
pear. Ensure that only TCP/IP is activated under Network protocols. Then click on the button
TCP/IP Settings... .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
The tick in the box USE DEFAULT GATEWAY ON REMOTE NETWORK must be removed. Confirm with
OK .
The register SECURITY should also be checked. Then confirm with OK .
To check the connection, click on Dial .

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
E.8 Restore Settings for the Internet Use
Note
The new dial up connection is now the default connection which is activated if the web browser is called. If
the web browser was used before for browsing the internet, this does not work now any more.
In order to use the web browser further for browsing the internet, you must modify the new dial
up connection as follows (the following steps are exemplary and depend on the respective
operating system of the engineering PC):
Open via the start menu the Control Panel

Depending on the display select Network and Internet, and then Internet Options
Select the register tab CONNECTIONS
Mark the option NEVER DIAL A CONNECTION and confirm with OK
Now you can use the web browser again for browsing the internet.
Note
In order to set up a connection to SICAM MIC now, you must start at first the new dial up connection
manually, and afterwards you can connect with the respective target system.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Glossary
SICAM RTUs Glossary
A
Adress type
The address type defines if a system-technical or a process-technical address is entered as address of a
datapoint in a message
Analog input
Hardware for the acquisition of an analog signal via measuring transformer (measured value via current,
voltage, temperature, resistance)
Analog input module

Module (submodule, I/O module, etc.) to acquire analog signals. Task of an "analog input" is the evalua-
tion of analog signals, and consequently the recuperation of the analog process information items. De-
pending on the comprehension of the term, the adaptation is also included or not.
Analog output
Hardware for the output of an analog signal to a display equipment (measured value) or to the setpoint-
value input to an actuator (current, voltage)
Analog output module

Module (submodule, I/O module, etc.) for the output of analog signals. Task of an "analog output" is the
transformation of arithmetical values to currents or voltages, and consequently for the output of analog
process information items.
Application program
Logical arrangement of all program language elements and constructs, that are required for the intended
signal processing for the control of a machine or of a process with a PLC system (acc. to
IEC 61131-12.1).
With CAEx plus application programs for open-/closed-loop control functions are created. An application
program comprises the task(s) and the related program instances and type instances. An application pro-
gram is executed by a resource ( CPU).
Application service data unit

The application service data unit (ASDU) is composed of a data unit identifier and a information object.
The data unit identifier has always the same structure for all ASDUs and consists of 4 octets. Its structure
is as follows:
• Type identification
• Variable structure qualifier
• Cause of transmission
• Common address of ASDU
The common address of ASDU shall normally be identical to the address used in the link layer. The infor-
mation object consists of an information object identifier, a set of information elements and, if present, a
time tag. The information object identifier consists of 2 octets. Its structure is as follows:
• Function type
• Information number
ASDU
Application Service Data Unit
Assign
Linking of datapoint-related information with the object, with that the functions process such information.
At data sources and data sinks of a data stream, datapoint-related information is inserted to or extracted
from the datastream by means of messages. At a source, this information is provided by a function, at a
sink it is utilized by a function.
AU
Automation Unit

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Glossary
Autonomy
An autonomous basisc system element and its supplementary system elements (protocol and peripheral
elements) continue working during a failure of the master control unit
Automation unit
An automation unit is a modular structured device for the acquisition, processing and output of process in-
formation. It communicates in automation networks via a serial or Ethernet protocols with other automa-
tion units or control center systems.
An automation unit consists of at least 1 mounting rack or 1 DIN rail (depending on system), 1 power sup-
ply and 1 basic system element, as well as optional peripheral elements and optional protocol elements.
Automatic dataflow routing

The routing of individual process information items is not necessary. Simply only the direction (monitoring
direction, control direction, both directions) the messages are to be transmitted must be parameterized.
The type identification of each message gives information about to which class a message belongs and
with which methods it is to be distributed.
Messages with process information in monitoring direction are distributed by means of an entry in the to-
pology. Messages with process information in control direction are distributed to their target that is deter-
mined by their CASDU and via interfaces that are defined in the topology. The CASDU is interpreted as
target address.
Ax 1703 peripheral bus

Enables the secured (hamming distance 4), serial, system-internal communication between the basic sys-
tem element and the peripheral elements
Ax PE Bus
Ax 1703 peripheral bus
B
Basic system element
System element for processing of information according to different criterions (e.g. automation,
telecontrol, etc.) and for the administration of system functions (e.g. parameter, diagnosis, etc).
Binary
Representation of information by means of 2 different states or 2 discreet values (=digital)
Binäry signal
Electrical signal that is used for the transport of a binary process information; as well as the digital signal,
2 different and not coherent ranges of the electrical signals are defined, for each a status/value that the
binary process information can receive. Therefore, in the technical data of digital inputs that are designed
fort he acquisition of binary signals, voltage ranges for "logical 0" and "logical 1", the universal designation
for the both states/values.
Binary input
Designation for a module, a submodule, an I/O module etc. fort he acquisition of binary signals; task of a
"binary input" is the evaluation of binary signals and therefore the recovery of the binary process infor-
mation
Binary input
Hardware for the acquisition of a binary signal (single-point information, double-point information)
Binary output
Hardware for the output of a binary signal (information or command)
Binary process information

Process information of type "binary", e.g. circuit breaker position ON/OFF
BSE
Basic System Element (master control element, processing and communication element)

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Glossary
C
CAEx plus
Tool for the creation of application programs (Computer Aided Engineering), based on the tool logiCAD ®
from the company logi.cals ®
CASDU
Common Adress of the ASDU, that part of the ASDU, that is common for all ASDUs of a station
Spontaneous transmission, general interrogation data, periodical data, command preparation, command
command activation (acc. to IEC 60870-5-101)
Class 1 data
If several data points are to be transmitted to the central station (spontaneous or on request) at the same
time, the Class 1 data will be sent before the Class 2 data (priority).
With dial-up traffic, data of the Class 1 lead to a spontaneous connection setup and data transmission.
Class 2 data
If several data points are to be transmitted to the central station (spontaneous or on request) at the same
time, the Class 2 data will be sent after the Class 1 data.
With dial-up traffic, the connection setup and the data transmission takes place only upon interrogation by
the central station.
Command direction
Transmission facility from the central station to a substation
Command return information

The command return information is an additional information for the double-point information, displays the
reason for the status change (breaker tripping or switching operation in progress)
Configuration
Configuration is used in a multiple meaning:
a) engineering of the configuration of an automation unit in the engineering tool
b) physical aligning and mounting of the configured hardware
– plugging in the slot defined by the configuration (slot addressing), or
– setting the address defined by the configuration, and plugging in an arbitrary slot (adjustable address)
COT
Cause of Transmission
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CTS
Clear to Send, handshake control line of an RS-232 interface
Cyclic transmission
Periodical transmission according to the scan rate of the application program
D
Data class
This assignment is specified in the standard IEC 60870-5-101/-104, and serves for the priorization of in-
formation objects for the transmission by the communication function:
Class 1 data
Class 2 data
Dataflow routing
Functions and methods for distribution of messages to ist targets:

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Glossary
Automatic data flow routing

Selective data flow routing
Datapoint
Analog or binary information (process data point, System data point)
Data stream
Transports a sequence of data-point related information through the telecontrol system from a source to
one or more sinks.
There are spontaneous and periodical data streams. (spontaeous data strems transport information in tel-
egrams)
Datentransporter and system message router

System-internal distribution point for application data and system data messages from and to the single
systemfunctions resp. application; application data is distributed by means of routing, system data by
means of target addressing to the data sinks
DCD
Data Carrier Detect; control line of a RS-232 interface for the evaluation of the receive signal level
DCE
Data Communications Equipment; for example a modem
DDC
Data Distribution Center; Tool for the export, import and/or administration of SICAM TOOLBOX II data
Detailed diagnostic record

Comprises 16 diagnostic bits (of a system diagnostic class) that commonly belong logically together
Detailed diagnostic table

Contains all diagnostic bits recognized by the basic system element and the supplementary system ele-
ments
DI
Digital input
DI
Double-point Information
Digital input
Binary input
Digital output
Binary output
DMS
Digital Multiplex System
DO
Digital output
Double command
A pair of commands each of which is used to cause operational equipment to change to one of two de-
termined states.
Monitored information represented by two bits characterizing two determined states and two states of op-
erational equipment.
DSR
Data Set Ready; control line of an RS-232 interface

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Glossary
DTR
Data Terminal Ready; control line of an RS-232 interface
E
EM II
Confiugration tool of SICAM TOOLBOX II (Engineering Manager II)
Ethernet
Wired local network according to IEEE 802.3
External error
Error that is detected through monitoring the information from sensors and actuators.
Can concern the peripheral element, the wiring, and sensors or actuators, insofar as the source of error
can not be unequivocally localized to the peripheral element; otherwise it would be an internal error.
Externally managed parameter

Parameter that is required on a module (e.g. supplementary module), however, is managed and stored on
the higher-level module
F
FAT
File system on storage media (File Allocation Table); FAT16 up to 2 GB, FAT32 as of 32 GB capacity
Fieldbus interface processor

The fieldbus interface processor serves for the serial connection of SICAM RTUs systems to a Profibus
(Profibus Master); Profibus Slaves are connected acc. to EN 50170-2
FIP
Fieldbus interface processor
Firewall
Blockage of a local network or computer against not allowed access from a supraregional network. Func-
tion for the filtering of data from the internet for the protection against invaders and malicious software.
Firmware
Program that is not changeable by the user, that adds a predefined and parameter-settable functionality
to the hardware
FPU
Floating Point Unit
FUD
Function diagram
Function diagram
Graphical program for open-/closed-loop control functions according IEC 61131-3
FW
Firmware
G
Global parameter
Parameter that is managed and stored on the system element (central system function) but used also on
other system elements of the automation unit

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Glossary
GPRS
Global Package Radio Service. Data rates up to 171 kbps, usually up to 85 kbps. Package-oriented con-
nection based on TCP/IP and UDP/IP. Billing usually according to data volume. Network expansion area-
wide.
GSM
Global System for Mobile Communication with the services speech, SMS, direct data connections
I
IL
Instruction list
Instruction list
Line-oriented program for open-/closed-loop control functions acc. to IEC 61131-3
Internal errors
Internal errors are errors which are unambiguously caused by the system element
IOA
Information Object Address
ISDN
Integrated Standard for Digital Network
L
LAN
Local Area Network
Load share operation

Redundant communication via 2 interfaces, whereby the messages are partitioned in undisturbed opera-
tion on both interfaces according to particular rules (dependent on load or priority)
Local parameter
Parameter that is managed on the own module (firmware) and is used only there
M
MDI
Media-Dependent Interface, adaptation to the cable type
MIB
Management Information Base; description file for SNMP
Modem
Data transmission device for connecting date end devices to the telephone network
Module
Hardware that is equipped in a mounting rack or on a carrier module; hardware of a system element
Module failure
Signals that the internal communication with a module is no more possible and is commonly replicated by
the supervising basic system element.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Glossary
Module number
System-technical identification of a system element within an automation unit, part of the IOA in a mes-
sage with system-technical addressing. The other parts of the IOA are the value number and the
subaddress.
Mounting rack
Device wherein that modules and instruments are installed
N
Network interface processor
The network interface processor serves for the connection of SICAM systems to the Ethernet LAN accord-
ing to IEEE 802.3
NIP
Network interface processor
Non-volatile
– Function: also with/after voltage failure further available (no defect)
– Information in a memory: not transient, undetachably
Normally open contact

Relay contact that is open when the relay is not activated; the contact closes when the relay is activated
O
OPM II
Central SICAM TOOLBOX II configuration tool (Object-oriented Processdata Manager)
Output active
If the output pulse is set and a command output (binary output) is already selected (relay activated), the
command is output to the process
P
PBA
Peripheral Module Address
PCM
Puls Code Modulation
PE
Peripheral Element
Peridocal control circuit check

The periodical control circuit check detects if the command circuits are ready to function correctly, without
activating the actuator.Control circuits are checked one by one, by activating all its relays, one by one,
thus closing the control circuit with high restistance.
Periodical datapoint
A periodical datapoint is used for the exchange of a process signal or a derived information between the
peripheral element and the higher-level open-/closed-loop control function.
Periodical information
A periodical information has a deterministic transmission behavior and is used for the exchange of a pro-
cess signal or a derived information between the peripheral element and the higher-level open-/closed-
loop control function.
A periodical information is always transmitted in groups and consequently with the transmission already
have a chronologically consistent interrelationship.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Glossary
Periodical transmission
Exchange of a process signal or a derived information between the peripheral element and the higher-
level open-/closed-loop control function.
Peripheral element
The peripheral element is a supplementary system element for process data acquisition and/or control of
actuators. It comunicates via the Ax-PE-Bus with the basic system element.
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller
PRE
Protocol Element
Programmable logic controller

Digitally operating electronic system, designed for use in an industrial environment, which uses a pro-
grammable memory for the internal storage of user-oriented instructions for implementing specific func-
tions such as logic, sequencing, timing, counting and arithmetic, to control, through digital or analog inputs
and outputs, various types of machines or processes. Both the PC (PLC) and its associated peripherals
are designed so that they can be easily integrated into an industrial control system and easily used in all
their intended functions (IEC 61131-1, chapter 2.50).
Protocol element
The protocol element is a supplementary system element for communication with other automation units
or control systems. It comunicates via the internal bus (ZBG-Bus) with the basic system element.
PSR
SICAM TOOLBOX II configuration tool
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
PT 100
Temperature-dependent resistance element with PT 100 characteristic
R
Routing
Routing of data streams: Messages are "routed" from their sources to their sinks. This works similar to di-
recting railroad cars by setting track switcher. Messages contain data point related information.
Retained variables
Variables in a non-volatile memory. The value of the variable is retained during a power failure.
Router
Network device for connecting two independent network segments as internet and LAN
RS-232
Standard for serial data transmission
RS-485
Standard for serial data transmission
RTS
Request to Send (switch on transmit device), control line of an RS-232 interface
S
SD card
Secure Digital Memory Card; up to 2 GB storage capacity

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Glossary
SD-HC
Secure Digital High Capacity Memory Card; up to 32 GB storage capacity
SD-XC
Secure Digital Extended Capacity Memory Card; up to 2 TB storage capacity
Selective dataflow routing

Routing of individual process information items. In simple applications the messages are distributed by
means of an entry in the topology. For more complex applications, the messages can be distributed selec-
tively by means of dataflow filters: for each communication interface, band-pass filters or blocking filters
can be set. Also wildcards can be used for all address attributes of the message, to direct the dataflow
very specific.
SI
Single-point information
Serial interface module

Hardware of a protocol element that can be installed on a basic system element
Serial interface processor

The serial interface processor serves for the serial connection of SICAM RTUs systems via a transmission
facility or via a direct connection
SIM
Serial interface module
SIP
Serial interface processor
Single command
A command used to cause a change of state of operational equipment in one direction
Single-point information
Monitored information represented by only one bit characterizing two determined states of operational
equipment
SMS
Short Message Service, transmission of up to 160 characters
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNMP is a network protocol to monitor and control network components (e.g. router, switches, server,
printer) from a central station.
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol
Spontaneous datapoint
Binary information that is transmitted upon change spontaneously in a message. It is always transmitted
individually, and usually has a time tag in order to be able to establish a chronologically consistent interre-
lationship afterwards.
With the current, voltage and counting pulse acquisition a spontaneous transmission of the information
takes place threshold value controlled (exception:class 2 data with dial-up traffic).
Spontaneous information object

A spontaneous information object that is transmitted upon change spontaneously in a message, and is
used for the exchange of a process signal or a derived information (including status) between the periph-
eral element and the particular automation unit, another automation unit or a control system.
A spontaneous information object is always transmitted individually and normally has a time stamp, in or-
der to be able to establish a chronologically consistent interrelationship later.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Glossary
Spontaneous transmission
Serves for the exchange of a process signal or a derived information (inclusive status) between the pe-
ripheral element and the own automation unit, another automation unit or a control center system
SSE
Supplementary system element
SSM
Tool for the administration of SICAM TOOLBOX II data (Siemens Stammdaten Manager); reserved for
developer of Siemens AG.
Supplementary system element

Supplementary system elements are situated hierarchically below basic system elements; there are pe-
ripheral elements, and protocol elements
Switch
Network device for connetion and distribution in ethernet
System element
Functional unit consisting of hardware and firmware
System-internal information
Information that is used exclusively for the exchange of control information between peripheral elements
and system functions, and that is not available to the user. It can be transported through the system like a
periodical information or like a spontaneous information object.
A system-internal information is only mentioned in order to explain the behavior of the described func-
tions.
T
TAP
Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TETRA
Terrestrial trunked radio, universal platform for different mobile radio services, time multiplex system with
4 time slots
TM
Terminal Module; Module for mounting on a DIN-rail
TM bus
Bus between peripheral control module (Master) and I/O-module (Slave)
SICAM TOOLBOX II
PC-based set of tools for configuration and service of SICAM automation units
U
User diagnostic classes
Serve for the classification of the individual diagnosis information items additionally to the system diag-
nostic classes. The are freely allocatable (maximal 8 classes).
User diagnostic records

Diagnosis information items, that are formed by means of application-specific routings from the diagnosis
bits of the detailed diagnostic table. Maximal 8 user diagnostic classes can be allocated.

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Glossary
V
VAC
Volts of Alternating Current
VDC
Volts of Direct Current
VPN
Virtual Private Network (logical connection for secure transmission of data via internet)
W
WAN
Wide Area Network
Web services
Web standard for function calls between independent devices

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015
Glossary

DC6-058-2.01, Edition 06.2015

BHB Sicam Mic Eng PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

BHB Sicam Mic Eng PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Preface, Table of Contents

Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Purpose of this manual

Particularly it contains the following information:

Conceptual activities, as for example design and configuration

Recommendations for Third-party Products

Links to Third-Party Websites

SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual 3

Placement into the Information Landscape

Document name Item number

4 SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual

For more information, please contact our Customer Support Center:

Main training centers are:

Nuremberg, Germany (Head Office) Vienna, Austria

Schenectady, NY, USA Hebburn, United Kingdom

SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual 5

6 SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual

SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual 7

8 SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual

1.1 Mechanical Design ......................................................................................... 24

SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual 9

1.8.2 Plant- and Location Designation ................................................................ 47

2 Interfaces and Circuitry .............................................................................................. 51

2.1 Power Supply Modules ................................................................................... 52

3 Engineering Preparation ............................................................................................. 63

3.1 Engineering Tools .......................................................................................... 64

10 SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual

3.2.1.1 Prerequisites ........................................................................................ 66

4 Engineering via SICAM TOOLBOX II .......................................................................... 93

4.1 Telecontrol ..................................................................................................... 94

SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual 11

4.1.2.1 Logon ................................................................................................... 97

5 Engineering via Web Browser .................................................................................. 117

5.1 Telecontrol ................................................................................................... 118

12 SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual

5.1.1 Presets .................................................................................................... 118

SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual 13

5.1.5.7 Decentralized Archive (DEAR) ............................................................ 160

14 SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual

5.2.2.3.1 Enable and Disable PLC Program Execution ................................. 189

6 Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 195

6.1 LED Displays on the Master Control Module ................................................. 196

7 Parameter Setting Instruction................................................................................... 219

7.1 System Settings ........................................................................................... 220

SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual 15

7.2.1 Time Synchronization .............................................................................. 222

16 SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual

7.5.3.7 Counter Interrogation .......................................................................... 251

SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual 17

7.5.6.10 Values for the Linearization Tables ..................................................... 284

18 SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual

7.5.9.5 Prepare Control Circuit (dependent on the System Element)............... 310

SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual 19

7.5.12.2.2 Direct Command............................................................................ 333

A Variables in the IL ..................................................................................................... 349

A.1 System Variables ......................................................................................... 350

B Examples for Application Programs ........................................................................ 353

20 SICAM RTUs, SICAM MIC User Manual

B.8 Speed Comparison ....................................................................................... 367

C Error Handling ........................................................................................................... 369

C.1 System Errors in the Diagnosis ..................................................................... 370

D Connection of Resistance Thermometers ............................................................... 381

D.1 Calibration Process ...................................................................................... 382